CR 35-X - Service Manual For Download

HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Service Manual

Document No: DD+DIS219.06E
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
2nd Edition
CR 35-X CR 25.0
Type 5158 / 100 Type 5156 / 105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:
The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
01-2007 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 12434149

eq_00_about manual_e_template_v02
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
DD+DIS219.06E About this Manual
► Manufacturer
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstraße 161
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 Chapter 0 / 2

01-2007 CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000) Agfa Company Confidential
► Purpose of this document
This document provides information on the structure and contents of the

Service Manual.
► Document History
Edition. Release Changes

Revision Date
2.0 12-2006 compared to previous Edition 1:
• Only layout changes as CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105
(as of SN ≥ 6000) is also integrated in this
Service Documentation, DD+DIS219.06E.


► Chapter Overview
Chapter
0 Order List
1 Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures
2 Functional Description
3 Repair and Service
3.1 Machine specific Safety and Repair Information
3.2 Machine specific Tools, Software Tools and Auxiliary Equipment

3.3 Troubleshooting
3.4 Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
3.5 Replacement of Parts
3.6 Adjustments and Calibrations
3.7 Software Menus and Setting
3.8 Software Releases, Patches
3.9 FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions
4 Reference and Circuit Diagrams
5 Spare Parts List
6 Accessories
7 Field Modifications
8 Manufacturing Standard Modifications
9 Maintenance
10 Service Bulletins
11 Installation Planning 1 2 3
12 Glossary


► Explanation of notes
This documentation uses:

Safety relevant notes
Icon Signal Word Situation
CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the

equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any other
equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can be the
consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user, engineer,
patient or any other person and possible mistreatment of patients
can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or serious injuries can be the
consequence.
Not-safety relevant notes

Icon Name Type of Information
INSTRUCTION: Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally the
described actions.
IMPORTANT: Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE: • Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action without

having a direct influence on the step or action.
• Highlights unusual points
• Indicates background information
• Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the graphical user
interface.
► Conventions
Actions Way of writing Sample

Action, Switch the machine on Switch the machine on
explanation
Action with the mouse or the <omni-cd.exe> Double-click the
"Return" key <omni-cd.exe> icon
Required text input via the vips Enter vips and click on
keyboard <Continue>


1 About this Manual
2nd Edition CR 35-X Type 5158/100 / CR 25.0 Type 5156/105

Service Documentation (DD+DIS219.06E)
IMPORTANT:
The 2nd Edition of the Service Documentation for
CR 35-X Type 5158/100 and CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 , DD+DIS219.06E is valid for:
• CR 35-X – Type 5158/100 and for
• CR 25.0 – Type 5156/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)
Explanation:
The improved detector unit (light guide and photomultiplier) from CR 35-X is
integrated in CR 25.0 and hence the new subtype CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 has been
created.
The improvement is not available for CR 25.0 type 5156/100.
The Digitizer CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 has been introduced in production and can be
distinguished from CR 25.0 Type 5156/100 by the type label:
• Type: 5156/105
• Serial Number SN: ≥ 6000
Note that this Service Documentation is not valid for the other type of CR 25.0 as:
• CR 25.0 Type 5156/100
For the CR 25.0 Type 5156/100 only the CR 25.0 Service Documentation,
DD+DIS071.04E is valid.
Reason The 2nd Edition of this Documentation has been released due to the fact that the
for the former CR 35-X Service Documentation from now on is also valid for the
nd CR 25.0 Type 5156/105.
2 Edition
Only the layout of the Service Documentation and product specific safety notes have
been adapted. No changes of the content have been made.


Product The CR 35-X Type 5158/100 (CR 25.0 Type 5156/105) digitizer is the
Description follow-up model of the CR 25.0 Type 5156/100 digitizer.
It has been designed for General Radiology environments and, particularly, for the
CR Mammography Solution.
Main changes between CR 25.0 Type 5156/100 and
CR 35-X Type 5158/100 (CR 25.0 Type 5156/105) are:
• Acrylic light guide with glued PMT (PhotoMultiplier Tube) is used instead of
optical fibers.
Download This Service Documentation is available on the MedNet GSO Library.

from
MedNet Path: Computed Radiography /CR Digitizers / CR 35-X
Features of The CR 35-X Type 5158/100 (CR 25.0 Type 5156/105) scans the exposed CR
the Digitizer image plate, converts the information into digital data and automatically transfers the
image to the image processing station for further processing and visualization.
The digitizer requires but little manual interaction. All you have to do, after exposure
and identification of the cassette, is to insert it into the digitizer.
The digitizer takes in the cassette, reads the demographic data and routing
information from the memory chip in the cassette, opens the cassette, removes the
image plate and scans the latent image by means of a deflected laser beam.
Once the image is digitized, the cassette is returned to the cassette slot.
Depending on the X-ray intensity which has affected the phosphor during the
exposure, more or less light will be emitted during laser scanning. The light is
converted into an electrical signal. This signal is then converted into a digital bit
stream.
Once converted into digital form, the digitized image is transferred to the image
processing station for further processing and visualization.


Further Further features of the CR 35-X Type 5158/100 (CR 25.0 Type 5156/105) include:
Features of
the Digitzer • The digitizer permits assigning the status “emergency” to an image. An emergency
image will be given priority by the image processing station if the “Emergency” key
is pressed before inserting an unidentified cassette.
• The digitizer permits re-erasing an image plate before re-using it. In specific cases,
this is necessary to prevent ghost images caused by previous exposures or stray
radiation from interfering with the image of interest.
• If the digitizer is dedicated to one ID Station, additional features are available:

• quickly identifying cassettes without the need for an ID Tablet
• reading the identification data of a cassette
• initializing a cassette, i.e. changing the image plate type
Intended This CR 35-X Type 5158/100 (CR 25.0 Type 5156/105) must only be used to scan
Use of the exposed X-ray cassettes, containing an erasable image plate (IP).
digitizer
This device is part of a system, consisting of X-ray cassettes with erasable phosphor
image plates, an identification station for the cassettes and a workstation where the
resulting digital image information is further processed and routed.
It is intended that this device is only operated in a radiological environment by
qualified staff.


Copyright  2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert NV

Agfa Company Confidential

HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Generic Safety Directions
Generic Safety Directions

for Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products
► Purpose of this Document
This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant
information including relevant environmental and occupational safety instructions for
the Service Engineer.
It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products.

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.4:
1.5 04-2014  Corrected link to Global Harmonization Task Force. See
section 12.
 Added reference to user manual safety directions when
operating the device or system. See section 13.
 Added safety note for cleaning and disinfection. See
section 15.
 Added reference to the user manual for cleaning
instructions. See section 15.
 Added safety note in case of power ON and cover
removed. See section 16.
 Added safety note to check tension before working at the
powered-off device. See section 16.
 Added note to combine release system components only.
Refer to section 18.
 Added recommendation to use the supplementary
protective earth connection as additional safety measure,
if available. See section 18.
► Referenced Documents
Document Title
Not applicable Not applicable

The controlled version of this document is available from the Agfa HealthCare Library. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Edition 1, Revision 5
eq_generic_safety_directions_e_template_v01
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2014 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions
► Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
Copyright  2014 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Agfa and the Agfa rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert N.V., Belgium, or its affiliates.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document are held by Agfa HealthCare N.V. or the
respective owners and are used in an editorial fashion with no intention of infringement.
Nothing contained in this legal notice nor in any text in this document shall be construed
as granting by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license or right to use any of the
trademarks, service marks, trade names or logos appearing in this document without the
express prior written consent of their respective owner.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" prior to attempting any operation, repair or
maintenance task on the equipment.
Refer to Document ID 11849633, Agfa Intranet / Agfa Portal via Internet.
the product.

Edition 1, Revision 5 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 2 of 30
04-2014 Agfa Company Confidential
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 DISCLAIMER......................................................................................................... 5
2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6
3 LABELS ................................................................................................................. 7
3.1 CE Mark................................................................................................... 7
3.2 Labels ...................................................................................................... 7
3.3 Labels concerning Laser Radiation ......................................................... 8
4 PRODUCT COMPLAINTS .................................................................................. 10
5 REFERENCES .................................................................................................... 10
6 INTENDED USE.................................................................................................. 11
7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11
8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11
9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12
10 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13
11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14
12 COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................... 14
13 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17
14 RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18
15 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18
16 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19
17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 21
18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 23
19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 25
20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................... 28

21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................28
22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS.................................28
23 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .................28
24 RECYCLING ........................................................................................................29
25 WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................................................................29
26 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI) ...................................30

1 Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified

personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are
otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services.
Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly
affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to
contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting
installation or service procedures.
No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare.
Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with

respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this
document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose.
Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the
use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this
document.
Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you don’t
operate the product correctly or if you don’t have it serviced correctly.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its
documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.
NOTE:
In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to,
distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.

2 Used Icons
Icon Signal Word and Situation

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage
to the equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any
other equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can be the
consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user,
engineer, patient or any other person and possible mistreatment of
patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries can
be the consequence.
INSTRUCTION:
Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow the described
actions literally.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
 Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action
without having a direct influence on the step or action.
 Highlights unusual points.
 Indicates background information.
 Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the graphical
user interface.

3 Labels
3.1 CE Mark
CE Mark This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity)
becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the
manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
3.2 Labels
For the meaning of the labels in and on the product refer to:
 The corresponding product or system User Manuals and
 The figure below, with a list of possible service activity related labels and their
meaning. To prevent injuries or damage to the equipment, follow the instructions
on the label or the related service instructions.
Hot surface Laser radiation Magnetic field Ionizing radiation
High voltage Hand injuries Do not touch Protective earth

connection

3.3 Labels concerning Laser Radiation
According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries.
Each laser source is classified from class 1 to class 4, based on standard
DIN EN 60825-1:2007.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed
instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.
Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye, even

when using optical instruments. Can
nevertheless produce irritating effects, CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
especially with low ambient light
conditions.
Class 1 M: Not dangerous to the human eye if no

optical instruments (magnifying glass or LASER RADIATION
binocular) are used. DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
Can nevertheless produce irritating OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
conditions.
Class 2: Dangerous to the human eye for

intentional staring into the beam.
Not dangerous for short term exposure
< 0,25 seconds.
Using optical instruments does not
increase the risk of eye injury. LASER RADIATION
Can even for short term exposure < 0,25
seconds produce dazzling and irritating DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

conditions.

Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 2M: Dangerous to the human eye when

staring into the beam or when using
optical instruments (magnifying glass or
telescope). No hazard for short term
exposure < 0,25 seconds (aversion
response of the eye) without use of LASER RADIATION
optical instruments. Can produce DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM
dazzling and irritating effects even for OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
short term exposure < 0,25 seconds, CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
especially at low ambient light conditions.
Class 3R: Possibly dangerous to the human eye for

direct view into the beam.
Risks of an eye injury is increasing with
duration of exposure.
Can produce dazzling and irritating
effects, especially with low ambient light LASER RADIATION
conditions.
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE
CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT
Class 3B: Normally dangerous to the human eye

for direct view into the beam.
Viewing diffuse reflections is normally not
dangerous.
Risk of small skin injuries or ignition of
explosive material if the power of the LASER RADIATION
laser beam is close to the upper limits of
class 3 B. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT
Class 4: Dangerous to the human eye for direct

view into the beam or viewing diffuse
reflections.
Very often class 4 lasers also implicate a
fire hazard.
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE
TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED
RADIATION
CLASS 4 LASER PRODUCT

4 Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the
quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must
notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a
patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident,
Agfa HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written
correspondence to the following address:
Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on:
www.agfa.com
As an alternative, contact the Corporate Communication Department:
Agfa-Gevaert N.V.
Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Fax +32 3 444 4485
5 References
Technical Documentation is available via Agfa HealthCare Library and your local Agfa
HealthCare support organization.
Access to the Agfa HealthCare Library:
 (Internal) Agfa users access: http://intra.agfa.net/he/en/intranet/library/index.jsp

 External users access (via the portal): http://healthcare.agfa.net/irj/portal/library

6 Intended Use
This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological
environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any
operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards,
which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks).
AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate
handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.
The intended use statement of the product or system is listed in the User Manual of the
product or system.
7 Intended User
This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application
Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic X–Ray
clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons
who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.
8 Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
This technical documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have
received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product
and applicable environmental and occupational safety matters before attempting to work
with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa trained Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make sure
that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the force of
law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.

9 Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions
Each Agfa trained Field Service Engineer and Clinical Application Specialist:
 Must make his or her personal contribution to improve safety and protect the
environment.
 When working on a customers site, has a duty to take reasonable care to avoid injury
to himself or herself or to others who may be affected by their acts or omissions.
 Is obligated to adhere strictly to regulations and instructions.
 Shall familiarize himself or herself with the provisions of the Agfa Healthcare
Health, Safety and Environment Policy and any specific rules or procedures relating to
occupational safety at work and the protection of the environment.
 Shall promptly report any near misses, accidents, incidents or dangerous occurrences
to their line manager and co-operate fully in any investigation.
 Shall co-operate with company management on matters relating to
health, safety and environment and, where appropriate, discuss with and / or assist
their manager in resolving matters relating to health, safety and environment.
 Shall ensure that any company equipment issued to them, or, for which they are
responsible, is correctly used and properly maintained.
 Shall wear protective equipment whenever instructed or if it is recommended to do so.
 Shall be responsible for good housekeeping in the area in which he or she is working.
 Shall report situations, which could put them at risk, on either company or
customers' premises, to their manager or supervisor; and, if warranted, directly and in
confidence, to the Health and Safety Coordinator, Global HSE* Manager, or ultimately
to the Managing Director.
* Health, Safety and Environment
 Shall report any injuries, diseases or dangerous occurrences to his or her line
manager.
 Shall report any accidents, incidents or near misses to his or her line manager.
 Shall report any situation of which he or she is aware that is potentially dangerous.
 Shall comply with any health surveillance procedure instituted for his or her benefit or
for compliance with regulations.

10 Connections to other Equipment
Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare
equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as
compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare
service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to
do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and
all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the
hospital.
Connections to other equipment:

WARNING:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product
may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION:
Consult the technical documentation before making any connections to other equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
 Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.
 Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been
performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1
harmonized national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard
IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system configurer and is
responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.

11 Accessories and Spare Parts
Parts and accessories replacement:

WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.
INSTRUCTION:
 Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
 Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
 Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible
accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com.
12 Compliance
Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products:

Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)
 ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The

products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the
conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the
technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not
compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of
users.
 ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY: Full quality assurance system

ISO 13485
 ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION: The clinical evaluation follows a defined and

methodologically sound procedure.

Applied standards for Agfa HealthCare Imaging medical electrical equipment:
NOTE:
Equipment delivered by Agfa HealthCare is not necessarily classified as medical
electrical equipment. For details refer to the related user and /or service manual.
 IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for
basic safety and essential performance
 ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices – Application of risk management to medical devices
 IEC 60601-1-2, It specifies the manufacturer of the ME (Medical Electrical) equipment

or ME system provides information to the responsible organization that is essential in
determining the suitability of the ME equipment or ME system for the electromagnetic
environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment of use to permit
the ME equipment or ME system to maintain basic safety and provide its essential
performance without disturbing other equipment.
Additional standards for documentation:
IEC 82079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions for use - Structuring, content and
presentation
Harmonization:
Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) http://www.imdrf.org
This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document of
the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) to assist development of a consistent,
harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a global regulatory
model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user, patient or consumer,
and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME:
The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system
for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products.
It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations.
Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member
countries of the CB Scheme.
Details see: www.iecee.org

Radiation of radio frequency:

CAUTION: For USA only:
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference
to radio communication.
NOTE:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at
his own expense.

13 Safety Directions for Operation
Accessibility of the mains power switch:

CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection.
 Before operating the device or system e.g. for verification of an installation, repair or
preventive maintenance activity, refer to the safety notes in the relevant user manual.
 Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a
message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that
a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these
messages carefully. They will provide information on what to do. This will be either
performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare
service organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this
technical documentation.
 All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be
confused with diagnostic information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic
information could be corrupted, additional investigations must be performed to get
clear diagnostic information.
 Ventilation openings must not be covered.
 If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from
the mains.
 Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
 If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating
personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system
concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped.
 Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields,
since stored data may be lost.
Explosive environment:
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen
which may cause an explosion.

Usage of an un-interruptible power supply:

WARNING:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.
14 Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context
qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the
jurisdiction in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those
authorized by the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be
made of all radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.
Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.
15 Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection
DANGER:
Risk of explosion when using wrong cleaning agent.
Risk of electric shock when cleaning with power ON.
When the equipment is going to be cleaned, be sure to turn OFF the power of each
device, and to unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.
Never use anhydrous or high solvency alcohols, benzine, thinner or any other flammable
cleaning agent.
 For instructions about cleaning of the device or accessories, refer to the user manual.
 Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on
system parts or accessories that can become contaminated through contact with the
patient or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service or user
documents.

16 General Safety Directions for Service Activities
 This system uses high voltage. Consider the respective safety regulations.
 Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.
 Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
 The safety directions for operation (see section 13) are also valid for all service
activities.
 During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).
 All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated
torque values!
 Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the
instructions, all screws used must be hardness rated 8.8.
 All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.
If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the instructions.
 Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232, RJ45, USB or other
interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated
on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).
 When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be
observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you
disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any
parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a
PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering
(electrostatic charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from
electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.

General safety note, in case of power ON and cover removed:

DANGER:
Risk of electric shock when working at the device with opened cover and
power ON.
Only work at the powered device with opened cover for service purposes, if this is
absolutely unavoidable.
Before working at the powered device with opened cover for service purposes,
 first identify the high voltage wires and connectors in the circuit diagram.
 if possible, cover high voltage wires and connectors with insulating material.
 greatest possible care must be taken, never to get in contact with high voltage wires
or connectors.
General safety note to check tension before working at the powered-off device:
DANGER:
High voltage. Risk of electric shock.
Before working at the device with opened covers, perform following steps to ensure the
device is de-energized:
 Switch off the power at the main power switch.
 Prevent that the device can be switched on by other persons. Example: Put a sign
"Don't switch on" in local language to the main switch.
 Use an appropriate tester and confirm that the device is de-energized (0V!).
 Observe additional safety notes at the device and in the specific service documents.
 For devices with capacitors (e.g. X-Ray generator): Confirm by measuring the
voltage at the capacitors, that the capacitors are discharged.
 For devices with batteries for power supply (e.g. mobile X-ray unit): Observe special
safety notes in the related service manual.
Static discharge at electrical components:

CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(Order number: CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this
strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.

17 Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
Install equipment in the patient environment only, if it is classified as “Type B equipment”.

Install all equipment outside the patient environment, which is not classified as “Type B
equipment”. Refer to the specifications in the user manual of the system or product. For
definition of the patient environment see dimensions in the figure below.
R
Patient vicinity
h
Patient vicinity
patient_vicinity.cdr
R = 1.5 m / 4.9 feet (EN 60601-1) or 1.83 m / 6 feet (UL 60601-1)

h = 2.5 m / 8.2 feet (EN 60601-1) or 2.29 / 7.5 feet (UL 60601-1)
Protecting CR (Computed Radiography) equipment against scattered X-Rays:

WARNING:
Image plate is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way,
that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Protecting Film-Screen Systems against scattered X-Rays:

WARNING:
Film is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The film-screen system shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way, that the annual
dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.

Accessibility of the power disconnection device:

WARNING:
Electrical device. Shock possible.
INSTRUCTION:
 Do not position Agfa equipment so it is difficult to operate the disconnection device

when an appliance coupler or separable plug is used as isolation.
 Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and
voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their
engineers.
Fixing equipment at the wall or floor:

WARNING:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.
Floor load:
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Fixing equipment at the ceiling:

CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or
damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.

18 Safety Directions for Installation Activities
 If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare

trained personnel.
 If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA
representative.
 Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care
must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted and carried to avoid injury. The
relevant instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved
by mechanical means or by several people.
 When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-pole
circuit breaker in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is easily
accessible.
 If the device has a supplementary protective earth connection: It is recommended to
use the supplementary protective earth connection as additional safety measure.
 Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if
accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely.
 This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
 In a system, combine released system components only. Refer to the compatibility
information which is referred to from the relevant service manual.
Connection of the device to the power supply:

CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply.
INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains:
 Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available
power supply in the installation room.
 Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
 Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
 Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.

Ground potential differences:

CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
INSTRUCTION:
 Always connect the associated monitor to the same uninterruptible power source as
the PC.
 When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical environments
a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in different localities.
If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a hazard for the
operator or for the patient.
Performing the electrical test according to national regulations before putting the
equipment into service:
WARNING:
Improper ground connections or too high leakage current may lead to electric shocks.
 After installation, before putting the equipment into service, inform the responsible
organization* about the necessity of the electrical test according to national
regulations.
If specific national regulations do not exist: It is recommended to perform the
electrical test according to IEC 62353.
 Make sure, that all grounding connections are present.
*Responsible Organization:
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system. The
accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.
NOTE:
Refer to the Agfa HealthCare Library for system specific IEC 62353 test documents.

19 Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
 This technical documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and
maintenance shall be performed by Agfa trained service personnel. For required
preventive maintenance frequency refer to the technical documentation or contact
local service management.
 In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the
device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to
moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device
immediately after the tests.
 Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor
control board.
 Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
 After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden
or disconnected.
 If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to
the customer. First repair the machine casing.
Replacing batteries:
WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.
INSTRUCTION:
 Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.

 Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
 Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the manufacturer.
 When removing batteries from the equipment take appropriate measures to avoid
short circuit of the battery:
Either use tape to cover the two poles of the battery or put the battery back in its
original packing and secure the packing by tape.

Performing the electrical test according to national regulations after repair work:
WARNING:
Improper ground connections or too high leakage current may lead to electric
shocks.
 After any repair work which may influence electrical safety of the product, inform the
responsible organization* about the necessity of the electrical test according to
national regulations.
If specific national regulations do not exist: It is recommended to perform the
electrical test according to IEC 62353.
 Make sure, that all grounding connections are present.
*Responsible Organization:
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system. The
accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.
NOTE:
Refer to the Agfa HealthCare Library for system specific IEC 62353 test documents.
Performing service activities at devices emitting laser radiation:

WARNING:
Laser radiation. Eye injury possible.
INSTRUCTION:
 Strictly observe the warning notes in the service manual of devices emitting laser
radiation (See service manual chapter describing Safety Guidelines / General
Repair Instructions) and at the corresponding steps of instructions.
 Strictly observe the warning labels at the modules emitting laser light. For the
meaning of the labels refer to section 3.3 in this document.
 Do not look into the laser beam.
 Do not open modules containing a laser. Only open modules containing a laser if
explicitly instructed to do so.
 Do not keep tools in the laser beam unless explicitly instructed to do so.
 Make yourself familiar with the path of the laser light and the conditions, when the
laser beam is switched on. Refer to the functional description in the corresponding
service manual.
 Do not operate modules with laser outside the device.

Sharp edges:
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
Cleaning optical elements:

CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.
Secured screws:
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.
Opening PCs and Workstations:

WARNING:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
 Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
 Unplug before opening.
 Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Replacing fuses:
WARNING:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard.
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on
the device.

20 Safety Directions for remote Service Activities
Remote Service Activities:

WARNING:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to
stop working on the system.
21 Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,

Accessories and Devices
 In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
 Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.
 Before returning any spare part with a built in lithium battery remove it and dispose the
batteries locally according to local waste regulations.
22 Safety Directions concerning Modifications
Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be

implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical
safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances,
removal of locks/instructions etc.).
23 Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials
'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The “Hazardous Material”
instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them
are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the
hazardous substances.

24 Recycling
Agfa HealthCare has Recycling Passports available for equipment and CR cassettes. The
Recycling Passport explains how to dispose or recycle the equipment or CR cassette at
the end of the life cycle.
The Recycling Passports are meant to be used as information for waste treatment
partners and companies that want to recycle or dispose end-of-life Agfa equipment and
CR cassettes.
To get a copy of the required Agfa HealthCare Recycling Passport please contact your
local Sales organization.
25 Waste Disposal
On August 13, 2005, the European Directive on Waste Electrical and

Electronic Equipment (WEEE) 2002/96/EC, amended by Directive
2003/108/EC, came into force.
The directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) aims to

prevent the generation of electric and electronic waste and to promote the
reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery. It therefore requires the collection
of WEEE, recovery and reuse or recycling.
This directive has to be implemented into national law by the individual
European countries by August 13th 2005.
Due to the implementation into national law, specific requirements can be

different within the European Member States.
This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and / or on
its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household
waste.
For more detailed information about take-back and recycling of this product,
please contact your local Agfa service organization. By ensuring this product is
disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences
for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by
inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials will
help to conserve natural resources.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators
please dispose of these separately according to local regulations.

26 Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for
the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or
parts that are removed from the customer’s site. This also applies to the exchange of
spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or
refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health
Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMs, backup tapes, archive tapes.

Chapter 1
HEALTHCARE Controls, Connections,
Imaging Services
and Setup Procedures
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document contains:
• all important routines to be carried out prior to putting the machine in operation
• location and function of the controls and connectors of the machine
• all routines necessary to put an unpacked machine in operation

Revision Date compared to previous version 2.0
2.1 02-2007 • Updated section “Removing the Shipping Brackets”
See section 2.4, pages 7-8.
Document Title
n.a. n.a.


eq_01_setup_procedure_e_template_v02
DD+DIS219.06E Controls, Connections, and Setup Procedures
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and
on the product.


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INTENDED USE OF CR 35-X ..................................................................................................4

2 PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION ...........................................................................5
2.1 Inspection of Packing................................................................................................................5
2.2 Unpacking the Components......................................................................................................6
2.3 Checking the Scope of Delivery................................................................................................6
2.4 Removing the Shipping Brackets..............................................................................................7
3 OPERATION TERMINAL .......................................................................................................10

4 PREPARATIONS FOR THE INSTALLATION ........................................................................11
4.1 Preconditions ..........................................................................................................................11
4.2 Required Service Programs....................................................................................................11
4.2.1 CCM-Tool................................................................................................................................11
4.2.2 Error Message Program..........................................................................................................12
4.3 Preparations for the Installation ..............................................................................................12
5 INSTALLATION OF DIGITIZER .............................................................................................13

5.1 Electric Connection .................................................................................................................13
5.1.1 Connecting the Mains Cable...................................................................................................14
5.2 Start-up ...................................................................................................................................14
5.2.1 Installation without CRUS .......................................................................................................15
5.2.2 Installation with CRUS ............................................................................................................16
5.3 System Integration ..................................................................................................................16
5.4 Make a Backup of machine-specific Data...............................................................................16
6 CONCLUDING THE INSTALLATION.....................................................................................17

6.1 Checking the Technical Image Quality ...................................................................................17
6.1.1 Exposure of a Flatfield ............................................................................................................17
6.1.2 Evaluation of a Flatfield...........................................................................................................19
6.2 Last Steps ...............................................................................................................................20
7 INSTALLATION OF OTHER CR COMPONENTS..................................................................20

8 CHECKLIST FOR INSTALLATION / MACHINE START-UP..................................................21


NOTE:
The Installation Checklist in section 8 of this chapter gives an overview of all steps and
guides through the complete installation process.
1 Intended Use of CR 35-X

The CR 35-X must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing an
erasable image plate (IP). This device is part of a system, consisting of X-ray cassettes
with erasable phosphor image plates, an identification station for the cassettes and a
workstation where the resulting digital image information is further processed and
routed.
It is intended that the CR 35-X is only operated in a radiological environment by
qualified staff.


2 Preparations before Installation

2.1 Inspection of Packing
The following actions should be taken upon delivery of the system components,
preferably by the customer:
• Completeness check of the shipment by means of the packing list (number of
pallets)
• Comparison of the labels on the boxes with the customer's order list and the
shipping papers.
• Checking of the packing material for visible transport damage such as
• dented edges
• damage on the box
• torn fixing elements (metal straps, screws)
• In case of damage visible from the outside turn to your local AGFA
representative.
• Checking of the attached safety indicators on the packing boxes.
figure 1
If the machine was tilted, the If the machine was subjected to shocks, the
arrow head in the circle of the square field in the middle of the
TILTWATCH changes from white SHOCKWATCH changes from white to red.
to red.


2.2 Unpacking the Components

The following actions must be taken by the forwarder upon delivery of the system
components.
(1) Remove the outer packing material.

The individual boxes inside must not be opened by the forwarder.
(2) Take out the accessories or boxes and take out hooks for the ramp.
(3) Take the machine off the pallet and transport it to the installation site.
(4) Dispose the packing material.
NOTE:
For unpacking and lifting the machine off the pallet, an area of minimal 200 cm x 350
cm is required. If the available space at the installation site is limited, the machine can
be unpacked beforehand and rolled to the installation site.
2.3 Checking the Scope of Delivery

The following actions have to be done by the FSE (Field Service Engineer) at the
customer site.
• Check the scope of delivery:
Compare the inventory of every component with the packing list which specifies
the complete scope of delivery
Pieces Description
1 Digitizer
1 Installation Instructions
1 Installation Report
1 User Manual
1 Reference Manual
1 Certificates
2 Mains Cable (1x US- connector, 1 x Euro-DIN connector)
1 UTP network cable (2 x RJ45 connection)
8 floppy disks (3 x Release floppy, 1 x Hard Disk Formatter floppy,
1 x Language floppy, 1 x Backup floppy, 2 x Portex floppy)
1 Handle
1 Cu filter


2.4 Removing the Shipping Brackets

Remove all cushioning parts and transport safeguards prior to first operation as
described below in steps 1 – 11.
figure 2
CAUTION:
Transportation parts can damage the product.
Remove all transportation parts prior to first operation.
(1) Remove two cable ties and swing metal safeguard forward and remove it.
(2) Remove cable tie.
(3) Remove two cable ties and lift the foam strip and remove it.
(4) Remove two cable ties and lift the foam strip and remove it.
(5) Swing the foam block aside and remove it.
(6) Lift and remove the two foam blocks.
(7) Remove cable tie and turn the metal bar upwards approx. 45° and pull it out.
(8) Swing out the cPCI-rack and remove the foam part.
NOTE:
The foam part is hidden behind the cPCI-rack and can not be seen from outside!


(9) Remove the L-shaped transport safeguard.

(10) Install the handle (which is in scope of delivery) instead.
(11) Remove three cable ties at the Photomultiplier.
(2 cable ties on the left side and 1 cable tie on the right side)
figure 3


Controls and Connections
7 5158_reg01_003.cdr
VDE
UL
figure 4
(1) Line switch Digitizer

(2) Port (RS 232 – 25-pin D connector, female D) for the Service PC
(behind the front door)
(3) Status indicator
(4) Emergency buttons
(5) Network connection (unshielded twisted pair)
(6) Voltage adaptation switch
(7) Mains cable VDE/UL
(8) Supplementary grounding cable connection and Potential Equalization


3 Operation Terminal
5155_reg01_002.cdr
figure 5
Display Functions
The key operator level is intended to be used by the normal operator. He uses the
system only to produce diagnostic usable images without the requirement for special
technical skill or background.
Key Function Key Function
• Gives an image the status of • Starts erasing images without

emergency when sending it to scanning them
the processing station
• Provides access to advanced • Gives access to service level
key-operator functions functions
• Exits the service level
• Quits the current function, exits a • Confirms the keyboarded input
menu without saving • Confirms that you have noticed
modifications non-fatal errors
• Exits from key-operator mode • In "LOCKED" condition,
and service level proceeds with the Digitizer
operation
• Moves the cursor one position up • Moves the cursor one position
to previous edit field down to next edit field
• Scrolls upwards or increments • Scrolls downwards or
digits in a numeric entry field decrements digits in a numeric
entry field
• Scrolls backwards through • Scrolls backwards through
multiple choices within a field multiple choices within a field
• Moves the entry position in a • Moves the entry position in a
numerical field in descending numerical field in ascending
order (from right digit to left digit) order (from left digit to right
or toggles between values digit) or toggles between values


4 Preparations for the Installation

4.1 Preconditions
• the digitizer is at its installation site

• finished pre-installation as described in 4.3
NOTE:
When integrating the digitizer into an existing network, it is necessary to create a
CPF– file beforehand (see Chapter 11, Installation Planning, checklist).
With a pure CR Network
(1 Digitizer, 1 Image Processing Station, 1 Preview/ID Station), the shipment
configuration can be used.
4.2 Required Service Programs

The following Software has to be installed on:
• your Service PC or
• the PC of the ID / Preview -Station.
4.2.1 CCM-Tool
The latest version of the CCM - Tool can be downloaded from MedNet.
The CCM - Tool is needed to create and modify the configuration file (adc.cpf) for the
CR 35-X and the other CR System Components.
IMPORTANT:
Possibility of incorrect software performance.
If there is already a previous version installed on your Service PC, remove the
complete directory as well as the icons.
Installation:
• install by executing "setup.exe"
The CCM Tool will be installed in

directory "IMOS" or any directory
of your choice.


4.2.2 Error Message Program

The "SHOW ERROR PROGRAM" with the "ERROR.MSG file" translates the CR 35-X
error codes into clear text.
The "SHOW ERROR PROGRAM" is a part of IMOS, the "ERROR.MSG file" is loaded
in the Digitizer.
4.3 Preparations for the Installation

The following work should be performed before the system components are installed:
• Laying of the network cables (Ethernet).
• Creation and adaptation of the configuration file adc.cpf, together with the
application specialist.
NOTE:
We recommend, creating and adapting the configuration file adc.cpf, before starting
the installation. This allows you a smooth installation.
For detailed information see CR System Components, DD+DIS198.00E, chapter 6.2.


5 Installation of Digitizer
5.1 Electric Connection
CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the digitizer by wrong voltage selection.
Prior to first operation check voltage selector at rear side of digitizer.
If the voltage adaption is not correct, take a screw driver and turn the switch to
correct position.
Voltage selector _reg

11_ 007 .c
dr
5155
Voltage can be adapted to 1

100 / 120 / 230-240 V.
The default setting is 230-240 V
figure 6
NOTE:
If the CR 35-X shall operate at 240 V / 60 Hz use a phase to phase centre tap wall
outlet, otherwise the leakage current will rise over 0.5 mA.


5.1.1 Connecting the Mains Cable

Two mains cables are included as standard delivery:
• USA/Japan: Nema 5-15P; (UL)
• Europe: CEE(7)VII 250 V / 16 A; (VDE)
Mains connection
(1) Remove the yellow sticker
CHECK POWER
from the mains socket of the SELECTION BEFORE
machine only after having CONNECTING TO MAINS
5155_reg01_004.cdr
checked the voltage
adjustment.
(2) Connect the correct mains
cable to the machine and to
the power supply.
figure 7
5.2 Start-up
NOTE:
The Digitizer must not be connected to a network during the start-up process.
(1) Switch on the digitizer.
(2) Check the operation terminal during the initialization.
While booting for the first time, the message "Installation not yet confirmed"
appears.
Confirm with .
(3) After a successful start-up "ready" appears.
(4) Check/adjust date and time in key operator mode.
(5) Choose terminal language in the service menu "Configure – User terminal
language", available after release of Language File.
(6) Store the modified machine-specific data.
(7) Open the service menu "Maintenance – test cycle without scan" and check
the function of cassette- and plate operation with the machine open. Each size
should run at least one time.
(8) Erase all image plates.
End of the mechanical part of start-up. Proceed with 5.2.1 or 5.2.1.2


5.2.1 Installation without CRUS

5.2.1.1 Integrating the Digitizer into an independent, pure CR Network
A pure CR network consists of:
• 1 digitizer
• processing station
In this case the ex factory settings for the IP-address (adcs1 192.9.200.199) can be
used.
A new configuration of the machine is not required.
Measures:
(1) Switch off the digitizer
(2) Connect the digitizer to the Ethernet
(3) Switch on the digitizer
End of network integration. Proceed with 5.3.
5.2.1.2 Integrating the Digitizer into an existing Network

In this case the IP-address has to be adapted to the existing network. This happens by
means of the CPF-file created beforehand.
Measures:
(1) Load the adapted configuration file ”adc.cpf” (see 4.2.1):
- insert the disk with the CPF-File
- select <Install from floppy>
<CPF-File>
(2) Choose a name suggested on the LCD
(3) Store the modified machine-specific data
(5) Connect the digitizer to the Ethernet
The digitizer is now integrated to the network


5.2.2 Installation with CRUS

The CRUS already includes UPS, HUB, isolating transformer and processing station
with monitor, keyboard and mouse. It works together with a digitizer as a pure CR
network.
Measures:
(2) Connect all components
5.3 System Integration
Precondition
The destinations intended for the digitizer, have to be put into operation and must be
obtainable via Ethernet.
Measures:
(1) Check whether the processing station is obtainable.
Service menu: "Checks – Check destinations"
(2) Send a test image to the processing station
Key operator menu “Send test image”
(3) Check the function of the emergency buttons. As a precondition the emergency
buttons must have been programmed via CPF. Standard CPF includes entries
about the emergency buttons. If a new CPF has been created, corresponding
entries have to be present.
End of system integration
5.4 Make a Backup of machine-specific Data
(1) Insert an existing backup floppy or a

new formatted floppy
(2) Start the service program
(3) Select
<save on floppy>
<Machine specific data>
(4) Start the backup procedure
(5) Label the floppy as shown in figure 8. figure 8


6 Concluding the Installation

6.1 Checking the Technical Image Quality
The hard disk of the digitizer contains two flatfields showing the least acceptable
quality.
For quality evaluation flatfields can be sent to a printer via Service-Menu
<CHECKS>
<SEND FLATFIELD>
<CALIBRATION PATTERN>
<BANDING PATTERN>
Compare the samples with the images created by yourself.
6.1.1 Exposure of a Flatfield
(1) Expose a gray field (flatfield) and evaluate the image on the Processing Station
and the Laser printer.
Criteria: homogenous field, stripes etc.
(2) Have a new plate of every format exposed twice as follows:
Rotating
Anode x-ray tube
Cathode
5155_reg01_006.cdr
figure 9
(3) For exposure place the cassette to match the long axes of cassette and x-ray
tube; see figure 9.
1st exposure: Dose: 10 µGy 12.0 mAs – 75 kV – 1.3 m distance, 1.5 mm Cu
filter
NOTE:
Please note that these are approximate values that may vary within the x-ray devices
to reach the specified dose of 10 µGy.


(4) Turn cassette by 180°.
(5) 2nd exposure: use same parameters as in 1st exposure.

(6) Use a dosimeter to measure the dose!
(7) Identify the cassette as follows:
On QS Processing Station:
• Select Study type:
<System Diagnosis>.
• Select Substudy:
<Flat field>.
• Confirm Exposure class:
<200>.
figure 10
On NX Processing Station:
• Select Exam Group:
<System Diagnosis>.
• Select Exposure Type:
<Flat Field>.
• Confirm Detector
Sensitivity: <400>.
figure 11
(8) Insert the cassette into the Digitizer. Print the image on a printer with a window
setting of 0.6 without changing the level setting on the processing station.


6.1.2 Evaluation of a Flatfield
Banding
Fine white or gray lines in fast-scan direction

Aim: No lines visible or effect revealed less than on banding
pattern
If quality is less than “banding pattern test image”: Contact
Support center
NOTE:
Fine white or gray lines can also appear, if there is dust on the scanner (in slowscan
direction) - use the scan-brush for cleaning the scanner.
Calibration /
Shading
Calibration
Dark lines or stripes in slow scan direction
Aim: No lines visible or effect revealed less than on sample
If quality is less than “calibration pattern test image”:
Check / adjust the position of the laser beam via the fiber optics
Expose a new flatfield and compare it with the calibration
pattern.
If quality is still less than calibration pattern:
Make new calibration;
Expose a new flatfield and compare it with the calibration
pattern.
If quality is still less than calibration pattern: Contact Support
center


6.2 Last Steps
(1) Dispose of all packing material. (Depending on the country, by the forwarding
agent or by the hospital).
(2) Complete the Installation Report (enclosed to every device) for all system
components and forward it to the regional RSN Manager.
(3) Fill in the enclosed form "Site and System Data" and send it to HE GSO, if not
done yet.
(4) Fill in the site entry form (available on MedNet) for entering the data in SRSS
and forward it to your national data coordinator.
(5) Hand over the CR System to the application specialist.
NOTE:
Now the technical part of the installation is finished and the application part begins.
Activities beyond the Checklist for Installation/Machine-Start-up must not be booked
on Task Code INS.
7 Installation of other CR Components
NOTE:
For detailed information on the installation of the processing station / client station or ID-
Station, see:
ADC Quality System 2.1.xx DD+DIS135.02E, Chapter 1
CR Quality System 3.0 DD+DIS273.04E
CR Quality System 3.5 DD+DIS302.05E
ADC System Components DD+DIS198.00E, Chapter 3.
NX 1.0 DD+DIS396.06E


8 Checklist for Installation / Machine Start-up
No. Step Task OK

Code
Before Installation
(1) Confirm installation prerequisites INS
(2) Check consignment of all devices for damage and INS
completeness
Installation and Start-up CRUS + Processing Station

(3) Unpack, check consignment for damage and completeness INS
(4) Connect power cords, monitor, keyboard, mouse, and optional INS
devices
(image disks, UPS, DAT-Drive)
(5) Position processing station respectively CRUS. INS
(6) Set in operating system (OS): network settings INS
(7) Set in OS: regional settings INS
(8) Set in OS: time and data INS
(9) For processing station: Set network settings in INS
OS / settings / control panel
(10) For processing station: INS
QS: Open Configuration Viewer / File / Import XML
NX: Start NX Configurator / Load a configuration from an
external media
(11) Check basic functions like receiving, printing, sending, viewing INS
images
(12) Create a site specific backup INS
(13) Check initialization of all cassettes; if required reinitialize them INS
Digitizer Installation and Start-up

(14) Remove shipping brackets and install base plate INS
(15) Connect the power cord INS
(16) When first booting: Confirm installation with OK INS
(17) Check date and time in key operator mode INS
(18) Choose terminal language in service menu INS
(19) Reset Infocounters INS
(20) Make a backup of the machine-specific data INS


No. Step Task OK

Code
(21) Check the mechanic components INS
Perform a "Handling Cycle" to check the function of image
plates and cassettes
(22) Erase all image plates INS
(23) Network Integration INS
load the adapted configuration file adc.cpf
select a station name for the digitizer from the display
make a backup of the machine specific data
connect the digitizer to the Ethernet
(24) System Integration INS
- check whether the processing station is obtainable:
<Checks> <Check destinations>;
- send a test image to processing station: "Send test image"
in key operator menu
(25) Check the image quality INS
send flatfield to a printer:
<Checks> <Send flatfield>
expose flatfields (calibration, banding, Blue LED)
print flatfields (calibration, banding, Blue LED),
compare and evaluate the printouts
(26) Check "Fast Preview" and “Direct ID” option, if activated
CR – Entire System
(27) Perform system test with medical images INS
(28) Hand over the CR system to the field application specialist INS
(29) Fill in the form "Site and System Data" and send it to HE GSO INS
(30) Send the completed "Installation Reports" to the regional INS
Service Manager of your cluster.
Remote Access
(31) Make connection to Service Host INS


HEALTHCARE Chapter 2
Imaging Services Software / Hardware Compatibility
CR 35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 100 (Up to SN < 6000)
Type 5156 / 105 (As of SN ≥ 6000)
► Please note
The chapter “Software / Hardware Compatibility” has been replaced by following

documents:
• Solution Structure Data Document, Document ID* 30781759
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link)
• CR/DR Interoperability Matrix, Document ID* 31333326
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link)
* Access the document by entering the document ID in the Agfa HealthCare Library search window,
or follow the direct link.

service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v02
DD+DIS098.09E Software / Hardware Compatibility
This page is intentionally left blank to enable print out of even and odd pages on duplex printers.

The controlled version of this document resides on Agfa HealthCare Library. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Edition 1, Revision 2 CR 35-X Chapter 2 / Page 2 of 2

05-2011 Type 5158 / 100 Agfa Company Confidential
Imaging Services Functional Description
CR 35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document explains the functional principle including the functions of the individual
assemblies always under normal conditions without any problems (nominal functional
sequence).
Furthermore it describes the structure and function of specific individual assemblies.

Revision Date
Document Title
Service Bulletin CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000) introduced,
DD+DIS407.06E


eq_02_functional_e_template_v02
DD+DIS219.06E Functional Description
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 DIGITIZER AS A PART OF THE CR SYSTEM ........................................................................6

1.1 CR System Components ..........................................................................................................6
1.2 Standard Workflow of a CR System .........................................................................................9
1.3 Direct ID and Emergency Mode - Work Flow of the CR System ............................................10
1.4 Combination of Direct ID and Fast Preview............................................................................12
2 IMAGE PLATES .....................................................................................................................12

2.1 ADC MD 30 Image Plate Principle..........................................................................................12
2.2 CR MD 40 General Plate ........................................................................................................13
2.3 CR MM 3.0 Image Plate – special Treatments .......................................................................14
3 CASSETTES ..........................................................................................................................15
3.1 CR MD 4.0 General Cassette .................................................................................................15
3.2 CR MD 4.1 FLFS (Full Leg Full Spine) Cassette....................................................................16
3.3 Asymmetric Cassette ..............................................................................................................17
3.4 CR Mammography Cassette...................................................................................................18
3.5 CR MD 4.2 Extremities Cassette ............................................................................................19
3.6 Modular Structure of the Digitizer ...........................................................................................22
3.7 Overview of Modules ..............................................................................................................22
3.8 Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................23
3.9 Transport Unit .........................................................................................................................24
3.10 Scan Unit.................................................................................................................................25
3.10.1 Laser Diode.............................................................................................................................27
3.10.2 Polygon Mirror.........................................................................................................................27
3.10.3 Photomultiplier with acrylic Light Collection Module ...............................................................28
3.10.4 Optic Module Housing.............................................................................................................28
3.11 Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................29
3.12 cPCI-Rack ...............................................................................................................................30
3.12.1 CPU-OBERON........................................................................................................................31
3.12.2 Scan Master Board .................................................................................................................32
3.12.3 cPCI Power Supply .................................................................................................................33


3.12.4 Hard Disk ................................................................................................................................34
3.13 Power Unit...............................................................................................................................35
3.13.1 Power Integration Board .........................................................................................................36
4 CYCLE OF A CASSETTE IN THE DIGITIZER.......................................................................37

4.1 Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................37
4.1.1 Starting Machine Cycle by inserting a Cassette .....................................................................37
4.1.2 Identification of the Cassette...................................................................................................37
4.1.3 Lowering and Clamping the Cassette and reading the ID Data .............................................38
4.1.4 Opening the Cassette .............................................................................................................38
4.2 Transport Unit .........................................................................................................................39
4.2.1 Sucking the IP .........................................................................................................................39
4.2.2 Taking IP out of the Cassette and transporting IP to the Scan Unit .......................................39
4.3 Scan Unit.................................................................................................................................40
4.3.1 Positioning the IP relative to Scan Unit...................................................................................40
4.3.2 Stimulation and Scanning the IP (Optical Path)......................................................................41
4.4 Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................41
4.4.1 Unloading IP from Scan Unit and transport to Erasure Unit ...................................................41
4.5 Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................42
4.5.1 Putting IP back into Cassette..................................................................................................42
4.5.2 Putting Cassette out of Digitizer..............................................................................................43
5 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ..............................................................................................44

5.1 Available Software ..................................................................................................................44
5.2 Web Pages..............................................................................................................................44
5.3 Hardware Modification Floppy of Spare Part ..........................................................................44


6 SIGNAL AND DATA FLOW ....................................................................................................45

6.1 Signal Flow..............................................................................................................................45
6.2 Data Flow ................................................................................................................................46
6.3 FLD<XXXXX> Directories.......................................................................................................47
7 CALIBRATION PRINCIPLE....................................................................................................48
7.1 IP Center Calibration (BOL/BOS Adjustment) ........................................................................48
7.1.1 BOL Sensor.............................................................................................................................48
7.1.2 BOS Sensor ............................................................................................................................48
7.1.3 Calibration Procedure .............................................................................................................48
7.2 Shading Calibration.................................................................................................................49


1 Digitizer as a Part of the CR System
1.1 CR System Components
ADC Cassette with image plate inside

The ADC cassette is the “container” for the image plate. During
the handling outside the Digitizer (e.g. exposing the plate) the
image plate is in the cassette. It is only opened inside the
Digitizer. The ADC cassette has an internal chip card which holds
the cassette, patient, examination and routing data belonging to a
certain X-ray exposure. The data put together are called
demographic data.
The image plate takes the place of the X-ray film in a
conventional system. It receives the X-Ray radiation and “stores”
a latent image. The image plates can be reused thousands of
times. The actual restriction of utilization is the mechanical
robustness.
Identification Tablet – CRUS (CR User Station)

The Identification Tablet is used to write the cassette, patient,
examination and routing data to the cassette chip. This data can
be entered manually or by retrieving the data from a Hospital or
Radiology Information System (HIS/RIS).
Writing and reading is done by means of radio frequency in a
contact less manner.
The Identification software is an AGFA product and implemented
in the processing station software.


DICOM Digitizers
(CR 85-X / CR 75.0 / ADC Compact / CR 35-X / CR 25.0 / ADC
Solo)
The Digitizer is used to read the latent image in the image plate.
After the ADC cassette is exposed and identified it is inserted into
the Digitizer. The Digitizer reads the data on the cassette chip,
opens the cassette, takes out the image plate and scans it. The
latent image on the image plate is stimulated by means of a laser
beam to emit light according to X-ray exposure.
The data from the cassette chip is used to set the scan
parameters correctly (e.g. speed class, image plate size, etc.) for
this individual X-ray exposure.
The emitted light is converted into voltage and then digitalized
into a 12/14bit, square root compressed raw image. This image is
transmitted together with the chip data on the fly via Ethernet to
the Processing Station. A backup of that image is made on the
internal hard disk in parallel to retransmit the image in case of
transmission problems. The output format of the Digitizer is
DICOM SCU-CR.
After scanning / transmitting is finished the image plate is erased
with very bright light to make it ready for the next exposure. It is
put back into the cassette and a status flag on the cassette chip
is set from “EXPOSED” to “ERASED”. The cassette is returned to
the user and is ready for the next examination.
CR QS Server Station
The CR QS (Quality System) Server Station is a Windows XP-
based Workstation with the CR Quality-System software
installed.
The CR QS Server Station receives the raw image from the
Digitizer. Every incoming image runs through an image
processing. The processed images are stored on the internal
hard disk(s) of the Server station.
However, the QS Server station only provides short term storage.
The final archiving must be realized either by hardcopies or a
PACS.
Further on, the QS Server station decodes the routing data and
sends the image data to the selected destinations (e.g. Printer,
PACS)
A Softcopy can be sent to an Archive with 8 or 12 bit. To print a
Hardcopy a 8 bit format is used.
For the QS Server station a lot of licensed software options (e.g.
Annotation, Print Composer, etc.) exist.


CR QS Client Station
The CR QS (Quality System) Client Station allows identification
and basic viewing.
NX Processing Station
NX is the successor of the CR QS systems.
NX shows the following features:
• Identify examinations using RIS-based worklists.
• Perform multiple exams at the same time.
• Perform emergency exams, without selecting RIS data for
identification.
• Select exposures fro an exam.
• Edit patient data.
NX does not support client stations.

The NX system can either be installed in or outside an X-ray
room, in mobile environments. It can also be operated in an
secure environment using authentication and certificates.


1.2 Standard Workflow of a CR System
X-Ray device
ID-Tablet - CRUS
ADC Cassette
with image
plate inside
ID-Data
Digitizer
ID- and Image Data
ADC QS
Server/Client
Station
Archive Station
Printer
5158_reg02_007.cdr
figure 1


1.3 Direct ID and Emergency Mode - Work Flow of the CR System
X-Ray device
ADC Cassette
with image
plate inside
Digitizer
ID-Data
ID-Station 5155_reg02_002.cdr
figure 2
Dedicated configuration offers a time saving workflow (approximately one minute for a
two cassettes study). If only one ID Station is dedicated to one CR 35-X, cassettes can
be identified without using an ID-Tablet. This option is called Direct ID. The
demographic data are transmitted from the ID viewer to the digitizer via the network.
This data flow makes it possible to scan an IP and to simultaneously enter the ID data.


• A speed class is selected on the CR 35-X by use of the emergency buttons. The
sensitivity associated with the emergency buttons has been set during the
configuration of the system.
• An exposed but unidentified cassette is inserted into the digitizer.
• By entering the cassette, the digitizer reads the remaining cassette information of
the RF Tag and a communication channel to its dedicated ID Station is opened.
• The digitizer starts scanning the IP and sends an ID Data Request message to
the ID Station along. The ID Window pops up at the ID Station and the ID data
have to be entered.
• After the user completed the information at the ID Station, it is sent back to the
digitizer. The communication channel is closed afterwards.
• The transmission of the scanned image to the Processing Station and the Fast
Preview image data is sent to the PRID-Station.
• Before the cassette is put out, the ID data on the RF Tag is erased and the cycle
counter is increased by the digitizer.
NOTE:
Dealing with an emergency cassette the identification can be left out at all. Therefore,
the user enforces the complete processing of the IP by pressing the Confirm Key at the
digitizer. The digitizer emits an ID Cancel command to the ID Station, where the ID
screen drops and the communication channel is closed. The digitizer completes its
emergency cycle and increases the cycle counter of the cassette.


1.4 Combination of Direct ID and Fast Preview

The features Direct ID and Fast Preview can also work in combination:
• A speed class, by use of the emergency buttons, is selected on the digitizer.
• An exposed but unidentified cassette is inserted into the digitizer.
• The digitizer starts scanning the IP and sends an ID Data Request message to
the ID Station along. The ID Window pops up at the ID Station and the ID data
will be entered.
• While the user is entering the data, the Fast Preview screen of the PRID is not
visible. The transmission of the reduced Fast Preview image will be postponed
until the ID data is completely inserted.
• The digitizer sends the image to the Processing Station and parallel the
reduced Fast Preview image to the PRID. As soon as the calculation of the
image is finished, the Processing Station sends the preview image to the PRID
and replaces the Fast Preview.
2 Image Plates
The CR plate can be identified by the plate type and sensitivity code printed on the
back.
2.1 ADC MD 30 Image Plate Principle

The image plate lying in the cassette consists of five different layers:
Legend figure 3: Image Plate Structure

1 Protective EBC 1
(electron-beam-cured) top coat 2

5146_reg02_003.CDR
3
2 Phosphor layer 4
3 Anti-halo layer, blue
5
4 Support P.E.T, white
5 Laminate figure 3
The phosphor layer is “storing” the picture information as energy.

The EBC top coat provides a smooth surface of the image plate to reach a good signal-
to-noise ratio.
Combination of white support layer and blue anti-halo layer increases the sensitivity.
The anti-halo layer lets through the stimulated light but blocks laser light.
The laminate is needed as base material.

2.2 CR MD 40 General Plate

CR MD40 Plates are initialized with code 15.
The fourth-generation imaging plate is composed of the following six layers:
figure 4
Improved phosphor layer

The storage phosphors used in the phosphor layer provide high absorption efficiency
and excellent homogeneity, while their short response time ensures the fading of the
previous pixel before stimulating the next one.
A high level of sharpness at all spatial frequencies is thus secured.
Since the phosphor layer has been improved, the ADC MD40 imaging plates ensure
increased image quality for lower doses, such as the 400 speed class.
Additional adhesion layer

Another new feature of the ADC MD40 imaging plate is the introduction of an additional
adhesion layer. This gives the ADC MD40 imaging plate better mechanical stability
than its forerunners, and prevents peeling at the corners.
EBC top-coating technology

Agfa's long experience and extensive research into plate abrasion resistance has led to
a dramatic improvement in EBC top-coating technology. This improved technology has
been used for the ADC MD30 as well as for
the ADC MD40.


White support layer and anti-halo layer

The use of a white support layer in combination with an anti-halo layer gives high
sensitivity. The anti-halo layer is an Agfa-patented blue layer that forms a perfect
barrier against laser light, but lets through the stimulated light.
Downward compatibility
Each ADC MD40 imaging plate is identified by a code on the back.
The ADC MD40, ADC MD30 and ADC MD10 plates can be used together without any
problem.
2.3 CR MM 3.0 Image Plate – special Treatments
CAUTION:
Wrong screen cleaner may damage the Image plate.
Do not use the AGFA CR phosphor plate cleaner to clean the CR MM3.0 Mammo
image plates. Use PROSAT wipers instead.
• CR MM3.0 Mammo image plates require dedicated wipers.

• These wipers can only be used once, but different CR MM3.0 Mammo image
plates can be cleaned one after the other with one wiper.
• Storage of the PROSAT wipers:
carefully close the bag of wipers and keep in a cool place (< 25 °C).
• When cleaning CR MM3.0 Mammo image plates, leave the plate surface to dry
for about one (1) minute before putting the plate back into the casette.


3 Cassettes
The principle function of the digitizer is close connected to the structure of the CR
Cassettes. The digitizer accepts only CR Cassettes. All other cassettes, e.g. ADC 70,
are refused.
3.1 CR MD 4.0 General Cassette
NOTE:
The cassette must always be inserted into the digitizer in the correct orientation to
make it possible to identify and handle the cassette!
1 2 3
Legend figure 5:
(1) ADC label
4
(2) ID-Chip carries demographic data
5
(3) Label showing size of Image Plate
(4) Sliders to prevent from usage in film
handling devices
6
(5) Metal label – silver dot – identifies an ADC
Cassette 4
(6) ADC Image Plate (gray surface up, white figure 5

surface down)
The ADC label and the label, showing the size of the contained image plate, are put on
for the identification by the user.
The metal label is detected by the digitizer to identify the cassette as an ADC cassette.
The demographic data is at the ID-Station transferred by no-touch radio frequency

tagging to the ID-Chip and is read out in the digitizer. The data is in that way always
linked to the image.
For protection against electrostatic charging and mechanical damage the inner lining of
the cassette is made of felt.


3.2 CR MD 4.1 FLFS (Full Leg Full Spine) Cassette

Specification
To improve the image quality with Full Leg Full Spine (FLFS) images
a FLFS CR Cassette was introduced.
Identification
The FLFS CR Cassettes are with exception of two major differences identical to the
current standard ADC Cassette (35 cm x 43 cm).
The differences are:
• Reduced backscatter protection (minus 1.5 cm at locking and
hinge side)
• Specific FLFS labeling
figure 6
Further points of identification

• All labels are yellow, which is unique for FLFS
• Labeling “FLFS” to identify cassette as type FLFS
• Yellow dots to recognize cassette as FLFS also in buffer or stack I
Format
The FLFS Cassette is available in format 35 cm x 43 cm.


3.3 Asymmetric Cassette
Specification
The Asymmetric Cassette is dedicated for X-ray exposures where no centered
positioning of the part of the body is possible (e.g. side view of a spinal column).
Identification
A cassette for asymmetric scanning can be
identified by a red hatching covering less
than the half of the cassette side. (see
beside)
5146_reg02_004.cdr
figure 7
Formats
The ADC Asymmetric Cassette is available in:
• 21 cm x 43 cm (asymmetric partial scan of dedicated 35 cm x 43 cm cassettes)


3.4 CR Mammography Cassette

Specification
The CR Mammo Cassette is a dedicated cassette for use in combination with CR
Mammo Plates 2.00 for dedicated mammography applications. It features a narrow
hinge to allow scanning right up to the chest wall.
A distinctive feature of the CR Mammo Cassette, in comparison with general ADC

cassettes, is the narrower hinge. This means that there is a closer contact with the
skinline, offering an increased amount of information during scanning.
The CR Mammo Cassette contains a CR Mammo image plate. This type of image plate
has a special phosphor layer which results in reduced noise and increased sharpness.
The cassette is equipped with a positioning mechanism in order to ensure the chest
wall distance to the image plate.
Identification
The cassette is labeled with “Mammo” on both sides.
The cassette is pre-initialized as a Mammo Cassette, but if the identification is lost, it
can be given via the ID Station.
figure 8
1 positioning mechanism for IP (2 x, left and right cassette side)

2 passive suction cup, keeping the IP in place inside the cassette


Formats:
The CR Mammo Cassette is available in two formats:

• 18 cm x 24 cm
• 24 cm x 30 cm
3.5 CR MD 4.2 Extremities Cassette
Specification
The CR MD4.2 Extremities system is foreseen for X-ray images of the distal extremities
and adjacent joints (hands and feet) and provides a spatial scan resolution of 50 µm.
Initialization:
• Scan size: 18 x 24 or 24 x 30 cm
• Scan resolution: Very high resolution
The CR MD4.2 Extremities cassettes can only work when digitizer software C25_2007 or
higher is installed on the CR 35-X.
WARNING:
Poor image quality caused by incorrect cassette initialization.
Initialize the cassette/plate as described in the corresponding user manual.
Identification
CR MD4.2 Extremities cassettes can be recognized by the code label
“Extremities - code XX”
The light green dots are dedicated only to the CR MD4.2 Extremities cassette. This
makes it easy to distinguish the cassette from others when stored in a rack.


CAUTION:
Image quality may be inadequate when using wrong cassettes:
Only cassettes with both labels “CR MD4.2 Extremities” and “Extremities code XX” must
be used for the Extremities application
(XX depends on the plate sensitivity SAL).
Other cassettes must not be used.
a b
CR MD4.2 Extremities 2 green dots on side
1 silver dot
Extremities - code XX 1 green dot
5156_dis307.05_001.cdr
Cassette formats
2 green dots 18 x 24 cm or 24 x 30 cm
figure 9: Labeling of the CR MD4.2 Extremities cassette
Formats
New CR MD4.2 Extremities cassettes (available formats 18 x 24 cm and
24 x 30 cm) are delivered with the appropriate initialization:
• Scan size: 18 x 24 or 24 x 30 cm
• Scan resolution: Very high resolution


System Preparation
• Ensure the correct digitizer software has been installed: see Software
Requirements.
You can check this via the digitizer display.
• Ensure the additional shading calibration for Extremities (75 kV,
2 x 10 µGy, Cu filter 1.5 mm as for GenRad) has been performed with a GenRad
cassette 35 x 43 cm
(in the same digitizer sub-menu as for the other shading calibrations)
• Installation of the Extremities-testimage on the digitizer in E:/extremity
The test image is an Extremity image of a hand with wrist. The image
(30 MB) will be provided first via Service MedNet, GSO Library:
Computed Radiography / CR Digitizers / CR 25.0 / Freeware/
CR 25.0 - Software - Extremities Test Image
Later on it will additionally be available on a new CR test images CD. Further
information will be distributed.
CR QS software version 3.0.207 or higher must be installed(check via the Help menu of
the CR QS software)
Using the Extremities System
Radiographer
• Cassette should be erased before first usage after delivery
• Same handling as for normal GenRad cassettes in respect of:
o X-ray exposure technique
o Identification of cassette
o Workflow
o Erasure
o According to good radiographer practice - lead markers indicating Left/Right
should be applied
o Cassettes have to be erased if they were not used for 1 - 2 days
(e.g. over weekend)
o Cleaning of image plate with ADC - Screen cleaner, frequency as for GenRad
cassettes or on demand
• Digitizers which do not fulfill the requirements will reject the Extremities cassette
• Dose indicator (lgm value) can be 0.15 points lower than on the same image done
on a GenRad cassette. This is because the phosphor layer of the image plate is a
bit thinner.
Radiologist
• Improved sharpness of the trabecular structure of the bone because of
50 µm pixel size.


3.6 Modular Structure of the Digitizer

3.7 Overview of Modules
100
700
600
500
400
200 300
51
5 6_
re g
02
_0
01
.cd
r
100 Frame
200 Power Unit
300 cPCI Rack
400 Scan Unit
500 Erasure Unit
600 IP Transport Unit
700 Cassette Unit
figure 10


3.8 Cassette Unit
figure 11
(1) Cassette roller

(2) Clamp unit
(3) Cassette lift
(4) Cassette position detection light barrier
(5) Cassette opener 0-position light barrier
(6) RF – tag reader
(7) Finger to block Input/Output (I/O) slot
The cassette unit loads the cassette from the I/O slot, fixes and holds the cassette
during the IP is taken out and scanned. The RF-tag reader and the antenna read out
the ID- and image specific data.
After processing the IP cassette status is changed from “Identified” to “Erased”.
Cassette unit transports the cassette back to I/O slot for output.


3.9 Transport Unit
figure 12
(1) Vacuum pump

(2) Suction cups
Within the transport unit the IP is taken out of the cassette and lead to the scan unit.
After scanning, the IP is erased while it is moved upwards. The IP is put back to the
cassette in the cassette unit.


3.10 Scan Unit
figure 13
(1) Optic module

(2) Stepper motor boards
(3) Slow scan motor


5
6
5158_re
g02_00
1.cdr
figure 14
(1) Photomultiplier module

(2) Optic module
(3) Light collector
The function of the scan module is to stimulate a two dimensional, X-ray exposed
phosphor image plate with laser energy. Out of the blue light, which is emitted by the
phosphor, a digital image is generated.
The stimulation of the image plate is done pixel by pixel. Therefore the laser beam is
moved. The laser power on the focal plane is 50 mW + 5 %. The movement in the x-
axis is achieved by a rotating polygon mirror (fast scan direction) which is part of the
optical path. The movement in the y-axis is done mechanically by transporting the
image plate (slow scan direction) with two pairs of rolls.


The Scan mode 2 µs is used for 35 cm x 43 cm high resolution scanning.

A 1 µs scan mode has been established already in ADC Compact Plus for
35 x 43 cm cassettes standard resolution.
This principle has been enhanced in CR 85-X /CR 35-X to small
formats < 35 x 43 cm.
Consequently, the throughput increases because of reduced scan time.
The 1 µs scan mode option can be switched on in the key operator menu.
3.10.1 Laser Diode

The optic module contains a monochromatic anamorph scan optic where the laser
beam is modified. The light source which is stimulating the image plate is one red laser
diode, with a wavelength from 650 nm to 670 nm and a maximal output of 50 mW each
(see 2 in figure below). The increase and decrease time of the laser power is shorter
than 20 µs. The beam of the laser diode is focused to have a spot diameter of 60 µm
on the scan surface.
3
2
Fa
s ts
ca
4 nd
ire
c tio
51
n
48
_c
ha
p2
_0
02
.cd
r
figure 15
3.10.2 Polygon Mirror

The Polygon mirror has 6 facets, each with a mirror (see 1 in figure 11). It is turned by
a DC motor which is clock pulsed from the scanning hardware. Pixel times between 2.5
and 0.6 µs can be reached, but for scanning are two times used, 1 and 2 µs.


3.10.3 Photomultiplier with acrylic Light Collection Module
5148_02_007.cdr
figure 16
The detector module consists of an acrylic light collection module, an optical filter and a
photomultiplier module (PMM).
The acrylic light collection module, the optical filter and the PMM are cemented
together in order to obtain the maximum available light
collection efficiency.
The acrylic light collection unit consists of an acrylic light guide, a collection mirror and
a mechanical mount supporting simple exchange of the detector module.
The aim of this development is to provide high image quality for EUREF compliance
with a detector that can be integrated in a digitizer with maximum similarity to the CR
75.0 digitizer. The image quality is increased by improved light collection efficiency with
an acrylic light guide.
3.10.4 Optic Module Housing

The housing is made of cast aluminum witch is electrical isolated to the ground plate.
The cover is made of conductive material to achieve electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC). The housing of the optic module stays closed in the field and no service needs
to be done inside.


3.11 Erasure Unit
3
2
figure 17
(1) Halogen lamps, 100 Watt

(2) Erasure unit fan (part of the frame)
(3) KG2 filter for heat protection
(4) Front glass (UV filter with sensitive gelatin layer)
The lamps are controlled by the erasure control board. They are controlled during work
in pairs and also the power supply of 12 V is generated via 5 single transformer. For
erasing the image plate a power input of in total 1000 Watt with 230 V / 50 Hz is
present.
The erasure unit fan (placed in the Frame) is switched on during erasing the image
plate for cooling down the unit. The speed the IP is transported past the erasure unit
depends on speed class and format (Erasure energy per time is determined by means
of the demographic data).


3.12 cPCI-Rack
7
6
5
4
3 2
figure 18
1 cPCI Rack Fan 4 Scan Master Board

2 cPCI Power Supply 5 Backplane
3 CPU Oberon 6 Hard disk
7 Floppy drive
The cPCI-Rack (compact Peripheral Component Interconnect) consists of the

processing unit CPU, the Scan Master Board, the Power Supply of the cPCI-Rack, a
floppy drive and a hard disk. On top of the rack the fan for cooling the cPCI-Rack is
mounted and on the back the backplane with all the connectors is placed.

3.12.1 CPU-OBERON
The CPU (Central Processing Unit) is a Power PC and is working with an operating
system called Oberon. The interfaces to the service and the Ethernet are placed on the
front plane.
Connector (female) to Service:

Service Interface Serial debug port connector,
(RS232) SuperIO and DUART
Fast Ethernet Controller:

RJ45 connector, Fast Ethernet with
Connector to Fast
10 to 100 Mbit/s
Ethernet
LED (3 green, 2 yellow, Software controllable with Portex

1 red) Software control tool
2
3
LED (FPGA NOT Conf. Hardware related signaling:

Green, TRAFFIC
Ethernet Traffic – yellow LED
yellow, Ethernet LINK
red) Hardware control Ethernet linked – red LED
FPGA not configured – green LED
Halt Switch HALT: Abort action
Reset Switch RESET: Global reset
figure 19


3.12.2 Scan Master Board

The Scan Master Board controls the main functions of the digitizer which are related to
the image data acquisition. The board has to support two operating levels, low
resolution and high resolution. Therefore timing, frequency and converters need to be
controlled.
Photomultiplier Tube Control:

Controls the Photomultiplier itself, the
Connector (female)
high voltage settings and receives the
to Photomultiplier
current/voltage (I/V) converter signal.
Tube
Polygon Control:
Controls via the Polygon the deflection
Connector (female)
of the laser beam on the image plate,
to Polygon
controls the rotational speed and
detects the facets.
RF-Tag Reader Control:
Controls the transmitter and receiver
Connector (male)
signals for reading out demographic
to RF-Reader
data of the ADC Cassette.
User terminal Control:
Controls the user terminal via a 20 mA
Connector (female)
interface.
to User terminal
IO-BUS Control:
Provides the IO-BUS with power and
is connected via eight data lines and
three control lines to the IO-BUS.
Connector (female)
to IO-Bus
Laser diode Module Control:

Controls the power supply of the laser
diode of the laser module, controls the
Connector (male) power switch of the laser diode,
to Laser Diode controls Begin-of-Line Signal and
Module Laser-Power-Monitor board.
5146_reg02_013.cdr
figure 20


3.12.3 cPCI Power Supply
Legend to the LEDs

below, showing the
Output voltages
Green LEDs to
monitor power supply
5146_reg02_014.cdr
figure 21
During normal operation the LEDs monitor 5.1 V and 3.3 V voltage levels.
Effects of Interlock Switches:

The power supply of the cPCI Rack is not interrupted by the interlock switch at right
side panel. This independent supply makes it possible to update software or work out
other actions at the rack while right side panel of the digitizer is open.
The power supply of the cPCI Rack is interrupted by the interlock switch of the front
door. At the rack is no action possible while front door of the digitizer is open.


3.12.4 Hard Disk

The gray rectangle in the partition map marks the directories which are only necessary
for remote control via http access.
Partitions Directories and

Files Annotations
subdirectories
C: *.BAT
STARTUP.COM
batch
*.PPC program files

ERROR.MSG error message files
*.ESX tables
CGI-BIN *.PPC program files
PUBLIC *.html html files
DL *.zip zip files
*.GIF
IMAGES *.JPG
*.SYS system files

AOS.LOG current log file
D: ADC.CPF
*.AXX
*.CXX configuration files
*.UXX
ICN_XXXX.DAT infocounter (binary form)
C35_<S/N>.ICN infocounter (text form)
*.TBL tables
*.SHD calibration files
SHD *.TEMP
HTTP HTTPTEMP.OUT temporary files
E:
FLATFLD CONTROL.DAT
IMAGE.DAT
FLATFLD2 CONTROL.DAT
IMAGE.DAT
TESTIMG CONTROL.DAT test image

(Collection of diagnostic images)
IMAGE.DAT
TSHEET CONTROL.DAT testsheet of the optimum

IMAGE.DAT image quality
FLD00001 CONTROL.DAT image control file + demographic data

IMAGE.DAT image data
STATUS
TAGFILE change of status
STATUS only when emergency mode is activated

STATUS only when emergency mode is activated
LOG *.SES session files
temporary directory
SCCTMP BOLIMAGE.DAT
BOLIMAGE.INF
MFAIMAGE.DAT
MFAIMAGE.INF
SHDIMAGE.DAT
SHDIMAGE.INF
SNAPSHOT *.LOG uncompressed logfiles

*.TXT (without quickcheck and
machine state)
5158_reg02_32.cdr
figure 22


3.13 Power Unit

Function of the power unit is to supply erasure unit, VME-Rack, stepper motors and
stepper motor boards with power. Power integration board is part of the unit.
1 2 3
figure 23
(1) Main switch

(2) Interlock switch
(3) Power integration board
(4) Fuse for Power Unit (2 A, slowblow – Si 201)
(5) Fuse for Stepper motor transformer (2 A, slowblow – Si 202)


3.13.1 Power Integration Board

Main functions of power integration board are:
• Recognition and control of the required periphery

• Vacuum pump
• Magnetic valve
• Erasure unit fan
• Power unit fan
• Check of the following units directly via hard- or software

• Magnetic valve
• Interlock for SM-voltage
• Stepper motor voltage of the transformer
• Erasure unit fan
• Vacuum pump (indirectly via current of the pump motor)
• LED's for error analysis
ST2 ST4
BU5 BU6 BU7 BU4 5158_reg02_015.cdr
figure 24
NOTE:
Only the LEDs marked with a star are lighting in a machine that is in proper
condition.
ST2 Voltage supply for stepper motor boards in cassette unit (+ 40 V)

BU5 Voltage supply for stepper motor boards in scan unit (+ 40 V)


4 Cycle of a Cassette in the Digitizer

4.1 Cassette Unit
4.1.1 Starting Machine Cycle by inserting a Cassette
An ADC Cassette with an exposed Image

Plate (IP) inside is set in correct orientation
into the I/O slot.
The light barrier (1) GS732/734 recognizes
the cassette and starts the mechanical
1
process of the digitizer.
2
The transport roller (2), moved by motor
M701, brings the cassette into the cassette
unit.
figure 25
4.1.2 Identification of the Cassette

A plastic bolt, activated by the rear slider of
the cassette, interrupts the cassette position
detection light barrier GS726 (1).
As only ADC Cassette have that certain
slider, it is made sure that the right cassette
in the correct position is inserted.
figure 26


4.1.3 Lowering and Clamping the Cassette and reading the ID Data
The cassette is lowered (1) by lift motor

M703 when a signal of light barrier GS718
comes in.
In the lowered position the light barrier 2
GS724 , for starting the clamp mechanism, 1
detects the cassette. The clamp motion is
run by motor M705.
While the cassette unit is moved to the right
side (2) the R/F-Tag antenna (3) GS738 and
the corresponding R/F-Tag reader GS736
read out the ID-Data from the chip on the
cassette. 2
The cassette unit is roughly positioned
corresponding to the size of the cassette.
figure 27
4.1.4 Opening the Cassette
In the clamped position the light barrier

GS716 detects the start for the opening
mechanism.
1
The cassette lid is opened by motor M702
with a certain number of steps.
51
55
_re
g0
2_
02
0.c
dr
figure 28


4.2 Transport Unit

4.2.1 Sucking the IP
The transport robot of the IP transport unit

(2), run by motor M601, moves up quickly
(see arrow).
The suction cups (3) are moved to the right
position on the IP. IP transport 0-position is 1
detected by GS604.
2
The vacuum pump GS608 starts (1) to build
up low pressure. By opening the solenoid
valve GS606 the vacuum is transferred to
the suction cups and the IP is sucked.
3
figure 29
4.2.2 Taking IP out of the Cassette and transporting IP to the Scan Unit
The IP is taken out of the cassette and

moved down (see arrow) by the transport
robot (1) to the scan unit, driven by motor
M601.
By passing the light barrier GS446 the scan
rollers open (2), driven by motor M401.
1
Vacuum is reduced and suction cups release
IP.
2
figure 30


4.3 Scan Unit

4.3.1 Positioning the IP relative to Scan Unit
The IP alignment finger (1) positions the IP

(2) relative to scan unit by means of long
distance light barrier (3) GS442/444 . 2
IP is moved by alignment finger, until long

distance light barrier (3) is interrupted.
Afterwards the IP alignment finger moves 3
back until long distance light barrier is no
longer interrupted.
IP
figure 31
The scan rollers close (1) and clamp the IP

between.
Scan rollers start to roll and move the IP
down until its edge reaches the PIN diodes
(2).
figure 32


4.3.2 Stimulation and Scanning the IP (Optical Path)
The IP is moved through the scanner by

M402.
The scan process is split into a fast and a
slow scan direction.
The laser power of the laser diode is lead
to the IP via optical lenses and a polygon. Fast s
The light emitted from the IP is transferred c an
by two acrylic light guides to the photo
multiplier.
5156_reg02_003.cdr
figure 33
4.4 Erasure Unit

4.4.1 Unloading IP from Scan Unit and transport to Erasure Unit
As scan process is finished, scan rollers stop 1

to transport the IP in slow scan direction.
Erasure lamps (1) switch on.
For unloading IP of scan unit the scan rollers
turn direction and move IP upwards (see
arrow).
Suction cups of transport unit are positioned
again on the surface of IP and vacuum pump
starts.
As the IP is sucked the scan rollers (2) move
apart and the IP is moved by transport robot
to erasure unit.
The IP passes the erasure lamps in a certain 2
speed. The speed depends on the format of
the cassette and on the examination type.
This information was given by the chip on
the cassette, read out at the begin of the
cycle.
figure 34


There are different speeds to vary

homogeneity and intensity of the erasure
effect on the IP.
As the complete IP passed the erasure unit,
lamps are switched off.
The image information on the IP is erased
and the blank IP can be used for another X-
ray exposure.
4.5 Cassette Unit

4.5.1 Putting IP back into Cassette
For putting IP back into cassette the cassette

unit has to be positioned relative to IP.
Cassette unit moves to IP until light barrier
GS730 is interrupted (1). Light
barrier
IP
Afterwards cassette unit moves back until 1
light barrier is no longer interrupted (2). Light

barrier
IP
Transport robot puts IP back into cassette. 2
Vacuum is switched off and suction cups

release IP.
Transport robot moves down to home
position while cassette is closed.
figure 35


4.5.2 Putting Cassette out of Digitizer
Cassette unit moves to the left while the RF- 1

Tag (1) changes status of cassette chip to
“erased”.
Cassette is released by clamping
mechanism and lifted. 2
I/O slot of digitizer is unlocked.

The transport belt, turned by motor M704 ,
and transport roller (3) move cassette out of
the I/O slot.
After removal of the cassette the cassette
unit moves to home position.
figure 36


5 Software Architecture
5.1 Available Software
The checks help to find defective or misadjusted parts in the digitizer.
Checks available in Service Program of the Digitizer:

System check Rough check of complete system
creates a file in d:\ snapshot.txt
Send flatfield 1 Calibration pattern
2 Banding pattern
5.2 Web Pages

The Software of the digitizer allows access from the Internet to the service level of the
machine. The access via a graphic User Interface (ADC web pages) is part of the
service concept. The web pages follow the structure of the well-known User Terminal.
Access via web pages guarantees a convenient and fast service by making use of
standard tools. The usage of different ports for these ways allows working
simultaneously with FTP, HTTP, and TelNet.
Further information, see chapter 3.2.
5.3 Hardware Modification Floppy of Spare Part

Spare parts which are sent with a floppy, need to be included in the system via
software. The floppy e.g. of the optic module contains specific settings of production
calibration and data of the spare part. This information need to be installed after the
spare part is mounted in the digitizer. For other spare parts sent with a floppy only the
information for the info counter is included.
The floppy is put into the floppy drive of the cPCI-Rack and the installation starts
automatically. The information concerning the spare part is integrated in the system.


6 Signal and Data Flow

6.1 Signal Flow
Lowpass Filter
Demographic
Raw Data (to
I/V converter
Proc. Station)
Image Data
Data
Legend:
Image Data
tension
High
diodes
Laser
Polygon
Optic Module
RAM
IO-Bus
10
cPCI Backplane
Calculation
settings
of scan
Oberon
CPU
Demographic Data
cPCI Unit
Cassette Unit
Harddisk
Raw Data 12 bit
Service PC
100 Mbit
Ethernet
Partition C:
Partition D:
Partition E:
figure 37


6.2 Data Flow
IP data
Cassette data Conversion of
Exposure emitted light
Destination into current
Patient
R/F Tag on the cassette Photomultiplier
Conversion from current to voltage

in the I/V - converter
Calculation of: Signal compression for grey scale

Scanspeed coordination (square rooted)
Voltage for high tension of PMT
Antialiasing-filter-frequence
Signalfiltering to avoid aliasing

Revolutions per minute of Polygon
Conversion from analog to

Voltage adaptation for high tension of PMT digital (14bit)
Start of scan with slow scan

speed = constant
Scan Master board
Raw image data and

demographic data via network to Raw image data in RAM
processing station
5146_reg02_056.cdr
figure 38


6.3 FLD<XXXXX> Directories
CONTROL.DAT (Image control file):
There are six possible status set in an image control file:
queued Waiting for transmission

sending Transmission in progress
sent Transmission completed, waiting for response
transmitted Positive response from workstation
warning* Positive response, but file cannot be handled from workstation at
the moment Æ new transmission
error* Faulty file, transmission cancelled
NOTE:
Only images being in a status marked with a "*" can be deleted from the queue
management.
STATUS
A status file will only be created when the operator pushes the emergency button.
TAGFILE
File date and time when the status is changed.


7 Calibration Principle
There are two different calibrations to work out with the Digitizer in the field. The IP
Center Calibration, which is necessary after replacement of the optic module or a
change on the mechanical adjustment of the begin of scan sensor, and the shading
calibration which is responsible for the image quality and follows always after an IP
Center Calibration.
7.1 IP Center Calibration (BOL/BOS Adjustment)

The IP center calibration adjusts two different scan signal settings in one process, the
begin of line (BOL) signal for the fast scan direction and the begin of scan (BOS)
signal for slow scan direction. Both signals in combination are responsible for the area
which is scanned and where pixels are created.
7.1.1 BOL Sensor

The BOL sensor is a pin diode placed in the optic module. It controls the switching off
and on of the laser. The sensor is beside the IP, therefore the laser beam hits the
sensor before the IP. Out of the defined distance between the sensor and the border of
the IP the moment of reading out the pixel lines on the IP is set.
7.1.2 BOS Sensor

The BOS sensor is a long distance light barrier which is placed at the bottom part of the
scan unit. The light barrier gives the signal to start the scan process in slow scan
direction. When the IP reaches the sensor it is detected and then passes a fixed
distance to the begin of scan line, then the scan process starts.
7.1.3 Calibration Procedure

The IP center calibration is
worked out with an IP format
smaller than 35 x 43 cm. In BOS
reference to this biggest format BOL BOL
the borders around the scanned
IP are detected. IP
e.g. 24 x 30 cm
The distance corresponding to the format
BOS signal is measured from the
geometrical reference to the
border where the scanning of the Area covered by
IP starts. The ideal distance is a 35 x 43 cm IP
(reference)
defined with 5 mm.
The both distances measured to
adjust the BOL signal must be 5146_reg02_059.cdr
equal, means the IP is scanned in
centered position. figure 39


7.2 Shading Calibration
Inhomogeneities of the light collector (acrylic light guide) and the photomultiplier require
a position dependent calibration of the scan line. This pixel wise line calibration evens
out differences in the transmission behavior of the acrylic light guide by calculation.
Each scanned pixel in a line is corrected arithmetically by its corresponding correction

value (shading correction). This is done for each of the three speed classes 600, 200,
and 75.
A number of lines of a flat field image are averaged and scaled to the maximum pixel
value. All the lines need to be in a certain range to make the calibration successful, if
not the error is displayed at the user terminal.
The calibration curves

can be viewed by using
a web browser.
(see chapter 3.2)
Three curves for each

format are displayed in
figure 40
one image and
distinguished by three
different colors.
The y-axis of the coordinate system shows the Scan Average Level (SAL) which is the
digital value (gray scale) of a pixel and is one of the criteria for a successful calibration.
The x-axis shows the number of pixels.


Chapter 3.1
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document describes safety guidelines and general repair instructions. It also
contains all product specific safety notes used in this Service Manual.

Revision Date
• Updated type label, see section 3.2, page 13.
Document Title
DD+DIS407.06E


eq_03-1_safety-repair_e_template_v02
Repair and Service
DD+DIS219.06E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instruction
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 Chapter 3.1 / 2

Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 PRODUCT SPECIFIC SAFETY DIRECTIONS ........................................................................4

1.1 General .....................................................................................................................................4
1.2 Safety Directions for the Installation .........................................................................................4
1.3 To be considered upon Repairs on the CR 35-X......................................................................5
1.4 To be considered with mechanical Tests of Stepper Motor controlled Drive Units .................6
1.5 Safety Switches of CR35-X Digitizer ........................................................................................6
1.6 Safety Directions for the Optic Module .....................................................................................7
1.7 Safety Directions for the Photomuliplier Module (PMM) ...........................................................9
1.8 Safety Directions for the Erasure Unit ......................................................................................9
2 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CASSETTES AND IMAGE PLATES........................................10

3 LABELS ..................................................................................................................................11
3.1 Markings and Labels...............................................................................................................11
3.2 Position of the Type Label ......................................................................................................13


Repair and Service
1 Product specific Safety Directions
1.1 General
With every repair work check the following points visually:

• Condition of the insulation of the mains plug / mains cable.
• Effects of the strain relief for the mains cable.
• Efficiency of the protective earth on metal panel parts (protective earth
connected and spring contacts OK).
• Correct condition of the protection covers.
1.2 Safety Directions for the Installation
CAUTION:
Transportation parts can damage the product.
Remove all transportation parts prior to first operation.
CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the digitizer by wrong voltage selection.
Prior to first operation check voltage selector at rear side of digitizer.
If the voltage adaption is not correct, take a screw driver and turn the switch to
correct position.


Repair and Service
1.3 To be considered upon Repairs on the CR 35-X
The machine must be protected against accidental activation during repair work. For
this purpose we recommend to attach the following sign on the main switch while
repairing the machine.
Do not
activate! Repairs in progress!
Location:......................
Repairs in
progress. Sign must only be removed by:
..................
figure 1
WARNING:
Risk of electric shock!
Switch off the digitizer and disconnect from the mains before performing any service
interventions at the digitizer.
CAUTION:
Danger of cutting!
Due to changed production methods, all parts of metal frame can be sharp-edged.
Take special care when servicing the interior of the digitizer
Wear safety shoes while removing scan unit.


Repair and Service
1.4 To be considered with mechanical Tests of

Stepper Motor controlled Drive Units
If a stepper motor driven shaft must be turned for checking a mechanical function,
make sure to disconnect the stepper motor first on the corresponding control board
(This is to avoid destruction of the stepper motor control board by induction).
If this is not possible, turn the stepper motor only slowly.
1.5 Safety Switches of CR35-X Digitizer
There are safety

switches at the front
door (A) and at the
right side panel (B). A
The safety switches

interrupt the mains B
voltage supply when the
front door is opened or
the right side panel is
removed.
figure 2: Positions of safety switches
WARNING:
If the safety switch is overridden with a service key there are risks of injuries.
Keep your hair, hands and garments away from the device.
Remove service key before the device is handed over to the customer.
Laser beam! Risk of serious eye damage!
Avoid direct and indirect eye contact with the laser beam.
Do not hold any tools in the laser beam - risk of reflection.
Consider that the service key must be removed again before the doors are closed.
After use of the service key, the function of the safety switch has to be checked.


Repair and Service
1.6 Safety Directions for the Optic Module
The CR 35-X is a Class 1 Laser Product.

It uses internally a laser diode, classification class IIIb. Under normal operating
conditions - device with all covers - there can be no laser radiation outside the DX-S.
WARNING:
Laser beam! - Risk of serious eye damage!
Do not expose to laser beam directly. .
Do not hold any tools into the laser beam (risk of reflection).
During any service intervention concerning the scan unit, the
digitizer must be switched off
CAUTION:
Risk of injury when removing the scan unit!
To remove the scan unit safely, use the digitizer ramp.
Check that both adjustable feet are touching the ground before removal of the scan
unit.


Repair and Service
Observe the Caution instructions on the Optical module label:
The positions of labels referring to laser radiation are placed here:
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASERKLASSE 1
dr
2 .c
00
3 . 1_
g0
_re
56
51
figure 3: Warning labels referring to laser radiation


Repair and Service
1.7 Safety Directions for the Photomuliplier Module (PMM)
CAUTION:
Risk of damage!
Photomultiplier and light collector are glued and must be treated as one component.
1.8 Safety Directions for the Erasure Unit
WARNING:
The erasure unit is hot - up to 200 °C:
Risk of burns.
Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit.
Observe the relevant sticker on the
Erasure Unit, see figure 4.
200 c
figure 4: Warning labels at erasure unit


Repair and Service
2 Safety Directions for Cassettes and Image Plates
CAUTION:
Wrong screen cleaner may damage the Image plate.
Do not use the AGFA CR phosphor plate cleaner to clean the CR MM3.0 Mammo
image plates. Use PROSAT wipers instead.
CAUTION:
Image quality may be inadequate when using wrong cassettes:
Only cassettes with both labels “CR MD4.2 Extremities” and “Extremities code XX” must
be used for the Extremities application
(XX depends on the plate sensitivity SAL).
Other cassettes must not be used.
WARNING:
Poor image quality caused by incorrect cassette initialization.
Initialize the cassette/plate as described in the corresponding user manual.


Repair and Service
3 Labels
3.1 Markings and Labels
Always take into account the markings and labels provided on the inside and outside of
the machine. A brief overview of these markings and labels and their meaning is given
below.
WARNING:
Risk of electric shock.
Shocks can cause severe injuries.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove any covers
WARNING:
The erasure unit is hot - up to 200 °C: Risk of burns.
Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit.
Observe the relevant sticker on the Erasure Unit.
Type B equipment:
Indicates that the CR 35-X complies with the limits for type B equipment.
Supplementary protective earth connector:
Provides a connection between the CR 35-X and the potential equalization busbar of
the electrical system as found in medical environments. This plug should never be
unplugged before the power is turned off and the power plug has been removed.
Intergrounding connector:
Provides a connection between the Digitizer and other equipment which might exhibit
minor ground potential differences. These differences may degrade the quality of
communication between different equipment. Never remove connections to this
terminal.


Repair and Service
Protective earth (ground):
0 Provides a connection between the Digitizer and the protective earth of the mains. Do
not remove this connection, because this will have a negative influence on the
leakage current.
Power on
Power off:
Note that the power cord has to be disconnected from the wall outlet in order to
disconnect the unit entirely from the mains.
CAUTION:
Precautions for use in USA only:
Make sure that the circuit is single-phase center-tapped, if the Digitizer is connected
to a 240 V / 60 Hz source instead of a 120 V / 60 Hz source.
CAUTION:
Risk of injury during cassette insertion: Fingers if they are
caught between the cassetteand the edge of the input slot
may become trapped.
Insert the cassette in the input buffer as described in the User
Manual.
At all times, keep your fingers clear of the input slot.
As soon as the digitizer takes in the cassette, release it.
Note warning label at the Input buffer of the digitizer.


Repair and Service
3.2 Position of the Type Label
figure 5: Position of the type label


Chapter 3.2
Imaging Services
Tools and auxiliary Means
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 100 / 105

This document describes tools and auxiliary means.

Revision Date compared to previous version 2.0:
2.1 11-2012  Completely revised
 Integration of the CR 25.0 Type 5156/100
(up to SN < 6000) in this Service Documentation
Document Title
DD+DIS219.06E Chapter 3.6 - Adjustments and Calibration


eq_03-2_tools-aux_e_template_v02
Repair and Service
DD+DIS219.06E Tools and auxiliary Means
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
Agfa and the Agfa rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert N.V., Belgium,
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(see Agfa HealthCare Library > General Info > Agfa HealthCare > Publications >
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
The installation and service of the product(s) described herein is to be performed
by qualified personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates
or who are otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide
such services.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of a chapter of the Service Manual refer to the “Checklist for
Completeness” in the Agfa HealthCare Library.

Edition 2, Revision 1 CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 Chapter 3.2 / Page 2 of 70

11-2012 CR 25.0 - Type 5156 / 100 / 105 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 MACHINE SPECIFIC TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT .........................................................5

2 SERVICE PC (STANDARD).....................................................................................................6
3 SERVICE PROGRAM OF THE DIGITIZER .............................................................................7
3.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................7
3.2 Working with the Operation Terminal .......................................................................................9
3.2.1 Service Menu with Password Protection ..................................................................................9
3.2.2 General Information ................................................................................................................12
3.3 Active Keys / Allowed Functions .............................................................................................12
3.4 Screen Layout .........................................................................................................................14
4 SERVICE MENUS ..................................................................................................................15

4.1 Service Menu: INFO ...............................................................................................................15
4.1.1 Device Info ..............................................................................................................................15
4.1.2 Network Info ............................................................................................................................16
4.2 Service Menu: MAINTENANCE..............................................................................................16
4.2.1 SAL Inspection ........................................................................................................................17
4.2.2 Calibration ...............................................................................................................................18
4.2.3 Test and adjust Cycle .............................................................................................................22
4.2.4 Confirm Maintenance..............................................................................................................27
4.2.5 Confirm Repair ........................................................................................................................28
4.2.6 Clear Infocounter ....................................................................................................................29
4.2.7 Confirm Modification ...............................................................................................................30
4.2.8 Confirm Installation .................................................................................................................31
4.3 Service Menu: SAVE data ......................................................................................................32
4.3.1 Infocounter File .......................................................................................................................32
4.3.2 Machine specific Data.............................................................................................................33
4.3.3 Service Report ........................................................................................................................35
4.3.4 Snapshot Log ..........................................................................................................................36
4.3.5 Session Files...........................................................................................................................38
4.3.6 CPF File ..................................................................................................................................39
4.3.7 Alert Log File ...........................................................................................................................40


Repair and Service
4.4 Service Menu: SHOW Error....................................................................................................41
4.4.1 Explain Error Code..................................................................................................................41
4.4.2 Error Hit List ............................................................................................................................42
4.5 Service Menu: INSTALL Data.................................................................................................43
4.5.1 Software ..................................................................................................................................43
4.5.2 Machine-specific Data.............................................................................................................46
4.5.3 PMT Settings (mfa/mfb) ..........................................................................................................47
4.5.4 Optic Parameters ....................................................................................................................48
4.5.5 Scanner Parameters ...............................................................................................................49
4.5.6 CPF-File ..................................................................................................................................51
4.5.7 Language Files .......................................................................................................................53
4.5.8 HW Modification ID .................................................................................................................55
4.6 Service Menu: CONFIGURE ..................................................................................................56
4.6.1 Local Network ID.....................................................................................................................56
4.6.2 User Terminal Language ........................................................................................................57
4.6.3 Active Alert System.................................................................................................................58
4.6.4 Direct ID ..................................................................................................................................61
4.6.5 Add-on Applications ................................................................................................................62
4.6.6 Service Protection...................................................................................................................63
4.6.7 Maintenance Notification.........................................................................................................66
4.7 Service Menu: CHECKS .........................................................................................................68
4.7.1 System Check .........................................................................................................................69
4.7.2 Send Image.............................................................................................................................70


Repair and Service
1 Machine specific Tools and Test Equipment
Tool Part Number* Purpose

Service PC Commercially available, Refer to section 2
requirements see
section 2
Interface cable RS232, CM+9 5120 9030 0 To transfer data between the
9 pin / 25 pins SUB D Service PC and Digitizer.
Test images CD ROM CM+9 5145 3055 0 To check image quality.
Network Cable Commercially available, To transfer data between the
acquire locally Digitizer and the Service PC
in case that web interface is
used.
Service key CM+9 0426 6309 0 To override the safety
switch.
Copper Filter 1.5 mm CM+9 5155 1015 2 Exposure of test images:
Part of delivery of the
CR 35-X
AL Filter 2.0 mm CM+9 5148 1090 0 Exposure of test images:
Part of delivery of the
CR 35-X
USB Flash Drive with CM+9 5158 8810 3 Transfer data between the
Digitizer Software Service PC and digitizer and
c25_3206 install software.
Magnifying glass 8x CM+9 9579 9904 0 To check image quality of
films at the lightbox.
Anti-static wrist strap CM+9 9999 0830 0 To avoid static discharges
on electronic components.
CR Phosphor Plate 10+9 9999 1197 0 To clean the Image Plates.
Cleaner (2 bottles)
Prosat wipes 10+9 9999 1219 0 To clean the Mammography
Image Plates.
Isoflex Topas NB52 (50 ml) CM+9 9999 9247 0 To grease the affected
mechanics.
Vacuum Cleaner Commercially available or To clean the digitizer during

(220 / 240V, 50 – 60 Hz) CM+9 9999 0895 0 maintenance.
Dirt bags for vacuum CM+9 9999 0896 0 To clean the digitizer during
cleaner (10 x) maintenance. Fits to
Vacuum Cleaner
CM+9 9999 0895 0
Lint free cloth Commercially available, To clean the digitizer during
acquire locally maintenance.


Repair and Service
Tool Part Number* Purpose

Flash light Commercially available, To check the digitizer -
acquire locally outside and inside.
Cutter Commercially available, To shorten cables.
acquire locally
Multimeter (Ohmmeter) Commercially available, To check resistance.
acquire locally
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
2 Service PC (standard)
The service PC is required to:

 Create or edit the adc.cpf file.
 Prepare the USB flash drive for e.g. software installation.
 Do service via terminal emulation.
 Run the show error program.
A commercially available laptop can be used as service PC with the following specific
requirements:
 USB port
The following additional equipment is required:
 External Floppy disk drive
 External USB serial port adapter for Serial port RS232
for the RS232 interface on the Digitizer


Repair and Service
3 Service Program of the Digitizer
3.1 Overview
For a detailed description of the service menus refer to section 4.
Service Level 1 Service Level 2 Service Level 3

1 INFO 1 Device info
2 Network info
2 MAINTENANCE 1 SAL inspection
2 Calibration 1 IP center calibration
2 Shading calibration
3 Test and adjust cycle 1 Scan with transmission
2 Scan cycle – no image
3 Scan – no era, no img
4 Handling cycle
5 Adjustment cycle
4 Confirm maintenance
5 Confirm repair
6 Clear infocounter
7 Confirm modification
8 Confirm installation
3 SAVE data 1 Info counter file
2 Machine specific data
3 Service report
4 Snapshot log
5 Session files
6 CPF-File
7 Alert log file
4 SHOW error 1 Explain error code
2 Error hit list


Repair and Service
Service Level 1 Service Level 2 Service Level 3

5 INSTALL data 1 Software
2 Machine specific data
3 PMT settings (mfa/mfb)
4 Optic parameters
5 Scanner parameters
6 CPF-File
7 Language files
8 HW modification ID
6 CONFIGURE 1 Local network-ID
2 User terminal language
3 Active Alert System 1 Alert system status
2 Alert destination
3 Send test alert
4 Direct ID
5 Add-on applications 1 Mammography (50µm)
3 Full Leg Full Spine
6 Service protection
7 Maint. notification
7 CHECKS 1 System check
2 Send image 1 Test image (mosaic)
2 Flatfield calibration
3 Flatfield banding
4 Test Sheet (jitter)
5 Blue LED test image
6 Mammo test image 1
7 Mammo test image 2
8 Extremity test image


Repair and Service
3.2 Working with the Operation Terminal
5155_reg01_002.cdr
Figure 1
3.2.1 Service Menu with Password Protection
Starts or finishes Service Menu
The service level is protected and only accessible via password entry.
When the protection mechanism is disabled, the service menu is only protected
through standard service password from Agfa.
When the protection mechanism is enabled the service menu is protected with access
code, license code and deactivation code for the individual device. The codes are
available from the Local Agfa Service Organization. For details how to enable/disable
the service protection tool refer to section 4.6.6.
After pressing the <SERVICE> key the user is asked to enter the service password.


Repair and Service
If the service protection is deactivated:
PASSWORD ?
Figure 2
(1) Enter the standard service password from Agfa (provided during classroom
training).
 This standard password cannot be changed.
 The entry of the standard service password does not change the display.
 No confirmation is required after standard service password entry.
Wrong A wrong entered code results in a long beep and <WRONG PASSWORD> message
code see Figure 5.
If service protection mechanism is activated and access is not expired:
Access code: 1____

change digit:   :ok
change position:  
Enter new license: press <Service> key
Figure 3
(1) Enter the access code (for details refer to section 4.6.6).
Wrong A not valid entered access code results in a long beep and <WRONG PASSWORD>
code message (see Figure 5) for about 5 seconds. Afterwards the program returns to the
operator level.
If the access code is expired, the screen <Renew service access> appears
(see Figure 4).


Repair and Service
If service protection mechanism is activated and access is expired or the serial number
encoded in the access code does not match with the device serial number:
Renew service access !

Please enter:
License code: 1____-_____-_____
_____-_____
Access code: 1____
change position:  
Figure 4
(1) Enter the license code and the access code (for details refer to section 4.6.6).
Wrong A not valid entered code results in a long beep and <WRONG PASSWORD> message
code (see Figure 5) for about 5 seconds. Afterwards the program returns to the operator
level.
WRONG PASSWORD
Figure 5


Repair and Service
3.2.2 General Information
After each intervention where machine specific data, network settings or language
settings are changed, a message appears: <Parameters have changed,
refresh your backup>.
As long as the installation of the Digitizer has not been confirmed, the operator is asked
after each startup if he wants to confirm the current date as date of installation (see
Figure 6). This reminder screen can be skipped by pressing the <> key until next
startup.
If the installation is confirmed, the reminder screen would not pop up again.
Installation
Installation not yet Confirmation
confirmed!

Press  to confirm now :cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 6
3.3 Active Keys / Allowed Functions
ok - starts the highlighted function
cancel - cancels the function and returns to the next higher menu
level
forward or backward scrolling
tag - possibility to select several items out of a list
returns immediately to the operator level, exits the service level
All other keys are inactive and cause a long beep when pressed.
The menus in the service mode can be classified in four different modes:
1) Selection mode
2) Instruction mode
3) Information mode
4) Decision mode


Repair and Service
1) Selection mode:
 The currently selected item appears highlighted (inverse display).
 When you enter a new menu, always the first item of the list is selected by
default.
 A new item can be selected by using the up and down keys <>.
 Multiple selections (tags) can be done using <> keys
(known as toggles/selections).
 Press <> to confirm your selection or to enter the highlighted
sub-menu.
 Press <> to exit the current menu and to return to the next higher level.
2) Instruction mode:
 In this mode, read the given instructions carefully and follow them
step by step.
3) Information mode:
 In this mode, information can be read on the display. No interactions are
possible.
4) Decision mode:
 In this mode, you will be prompted to confirm or cancel the proposed action.
 In case a decision is required a double beep comes up every 10 seconds.
 Press <> to confirm the action, return to the higher level or to enter the next
screen.


Repair and Service
3.4 Screen Layout
The same screen layout is used for all service menus. The screen is subdivided into
four windows:
Service menu
2
: cancel
1
3
: ok
4
Service XXXX
515562ee.cdr
Figure 7
the action window  displays selection lists, instructions, information, questions

orientation window  displays the current service menu level
key help window  explains the meaning of the involved keypad buttons
service message displays service messages
window 
is displayed if scroll functionality is requested, e.g. if a list

and cannot be shown in total
is displayed if selection functionality is requested, e.g. if
and several items have to be marked in a list


Repair and Service
4 Service Menus
4.1 Service Menu: INFO
This menu provides general information about the Digitizer and its network settings.
1 INFO Service menu

2 MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW
3 SAVE data
4 SHOW error 
5 INSTALL data :cancel
6 CONFIGURE :ok
7 CHECKS 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 8
4.1.1 Device Info
This menu item displays information about the Digitizer.
1 Device info Service menu

2 Network info Info

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 9
Station: <stationname> Service menu

S/N: 1024 Info
AE-title: <aetitle> Device info
Software: c25 3206 
Total cycles: 34567
Next PM: 60424 :ok
Last rep.: 01-Jan-2010 
02-Mar-2011 14:24:58 SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 10
<Station:> shows the station name of the Digitizer, which is not the host name.
<S/N:> shows the 4 digit serial number of the Digitizer


Repair and Service
4.1.2 Network Info
This menu displays information about the network settings of the Digitizer.
1 Device info Service menu

2 Network info Info
Network info

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 11
Hostname: <hostname> Service menu

INFO
IP-addr: 192.9.200.201 Network info
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 
D-Router: 192.9.200.254
Mail-Host:192.9.200.210 :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 12
4.2 Service Menu: MAINTENANCE
This service menu provides features for maintenance functions.
1 INFO Service menu

3 SAVE data
6 CONFIGURE :ok
7 CHECKS 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 13


Repair and Service
4.2.1 SAL Inspection
Procedure to measure the average scan level of an image plate as a result of a certain
stimulation energy. This information can be used in two ways. Either to decide whether
the IP needs to be erased or to find out the correct exposure parameters for a given
X-ray device.
The measured value (scan average level) is displayed on the LCD. Additionally the
corresponding scan line is displayed on the LCD.
1 SAL inspection Service menu

2 Calibration Maintenance
3 Test and adjust cycle
4 Confirm maintenance 
5 Confirm repair :cancel
6 Clear infocounter :ok
7 Confirm modification 
8 Confirm installation SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 14
Service menu
Maintenance
Please select the speed SAL inspection
class for SAL inspection 
:cancel
200 :ok

...select with  or  SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 15
Default speed class = 200
Service menu
Place cassette for Maintenance
inspection into the SAL inspection
cassette entry slot 
:cancel

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 16
Service menu
Maintenance
SAL inspection pending. SAL inspection
Wait for result... 

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 17


Repair and Service
Service menu
Maintenance
SAL inspection
 
Cassette ID: XXXXX :cancel
SAL: 264 :ok

...press  to continue SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 18
The scanned line is displayed on the LCD, the screen appears with a double beep.
(1) Press  to confirm the SAL-Inspection for that IP. If available, the next IP in the
row is inspected.
(2) Press  to cancel the function and returns to the next higher level.
4.2.2 Calibration
This service menu provides features to perform an IP Center Calibration and a Shading
Calibration
For details about how to perform the calibrations refer to Chapter 3.6 - Adjustments
and Calibrations.

Figure 19
NOTE:
If an identified cassette (regular identification via ID station, status exposed, to be
erased) is detected, a message is displayed:
 Cassette is identified with patient data, see Figure 20
 Cassette is identified to be erased, see Figure 21
The user has to confirm the calibration function:
 - starts the calibration procedure,
 - the cassette is treated according to its identification status (to be erased, exposed)


Repair and Service
Service menu
Maintenance
Cassette is identified Calibration
with patient data. 
Press  to calibrate :cancel
or  to scan. :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 20
Service menu
Maintenance
Cassette is identified Calibration
To be erased. 
Press  to calibrate :cancel
or  to erase. :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 21
4.2.2.1 IP Center Calibration
This service menu provides features to perform an IP Center Calibration.

The required work steps for IP Center Calibration are described in detail in
Chapter 3.6 - Adjustments and Calibrations.
1 IP Center Calibration Service menu

2 Shading Calibration Maintenance
Calibration

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 22
Exposure parameters: Service menu

Filter: 1.5 mm Cu Calibration
2 exposures a 10 microGy IP Center
turn 180 degree 
(Approx. FFDist. 1.3 m, :cancel
12 mAs, 75 kVp)
Insert cassette 24x30cm 
or smaller. SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 23


Repair and Service
If a format 10 x 8", 24 x 18 cm, 24 x 30 cm is detected, the calibration procedure starts

immediately.
Service menu
Calibration
IP Center Calibration IP Center
pending... 

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 24
Service menu
Calibration
IP Center Calibration IP Center
successful. 
:ok
Run a Shading Calib. now 
(Recommended). SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 25
In case IP Center Calibration adjustment was successful:

(1) Press <> to return to the calibration screen.
For a detailed description of possible reasons for a failed IP Center Calibration refer to


Repair and Service
4.2.2.2 Shading Calibration
This service menu provides features to perform a shading calibration.

Shading correction factors for all image plate formats are determined. The resulting
scan line is displayed on the LCD. Additional information about cassette formats,
calibration results, possible fail reasons and detected SAL is given.
The required work steps for the shading calibration are described in detail in
1 IP Center Calibration Service menu

2 Shading Calibration Maintenance
Calibration

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 26
Which application Service menu

shall be calibrated? Calibration
Shading
1 GenRad fast ok 
2 GenRad slow ok :cancel
3 Mammo :ok
4 Extremity 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 27
(1) Press <> to return to the calibration screen.

(2) Press <> to enter next screen.
For <Mammo>:
Two possible exposure types can be chosen. The action starts as soon as a cassette
is inserted.
Select exposure type Service menu

Calibration
1 GenRad Shading
2 Mammo 
:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 28


Repair and Service
For GenRad exposures:

Filter: 1.5 mm Cu Calibration
2 exposures a 10 microGy Shading
turn 180 degree 
(Approx. FFDist. 1.3 m, :cancel
12 mAs, 75 kVp)
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 29
For Mammo exposures:

Filter: 2 mm Al Calibration
Exp. technique: Mo/Mo Shading
200 mAs, 28 kVp 
No compression paddle :cancel
SERVICE XXXXX
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 30
If the shading calibration has been successful the message <Calibration

successful> pops up.
(1) Press <> to confirm and return to the shading calibration menu.
For a detailed description of possible reasons for failed shading calibration refer to
4.2.3 Test and adjust Cycle
This service menu provides different endurance run cycles to check the proper function
of the cassette and IP transport.

Figure 31


Repair and Service
4.2.3.1 Scan with Transmission
This endurance run cycle:

 requires identified cassette
 cycles cassette and IP
 scans the IP
 erases IP
 transmits image as identified
 informs about the current cycle number
The scan runs until the selected number of cycles is reached. The scan can be
aborted with <>.
1 Scan with transmission Service menu

2 Scan cycle – no image Maintenance
3 Scan – no era, no img Test cycle
4 Handling cycle 
5 Adjustment cycle :cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 32
Selection of number of cycles:
Service menu
Use  and  to Maintenance
select no of cycles: Test cycle

XXXX :cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 33
Information about the status:
Service menu
No of cycles selected: Maintenance
150 Test cycle

Current run: :cancel
64

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 34


Repair and Service
4.2.3.2 Scan Cycle - No Image

 scans the IP
 erases IP
 does not transmit the image
The scan runs until the selected number of cycles is reached. The scan can be aborted
with <>.

:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 35
For selection of number of cycles and Information about the status: see Figure 33 and
Figure 34.
4.2.3.3 Scan - no era, no img

 scans IP
 does not erase
The scan runs until the selected number of cycles is reached. The scan can be
aborted with <>.


Repair and Service

:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 36
Figure 34.
4.2.3.4 Handling Cycle

 cycles regardless if cassette is identified or not
 cycles IP
 does not scan IP
 does not erase
The scan runs until the selected number of cycles is reached. The scan can be aborted
with <>.

:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 37
Figure 34.


Repair and Service
4.2.3.5 Adjustment Cycle
This service menu allows performing an automated adjustment of the pick up position
to take the image plate out of the cassette.
 Asks the user to insert cassette of the format 24x30 or 18x24.
 Prompt the user to perform an automated adjustment, where a software routine
repeats approaching the image plate, until it finds the optimal position for the
suction cups to take the image plate out of the cassette.
 Displays the result of the adjustment with the values before and after the
adjustment.
 In case of a not successful adjustment, possible remedies are displayed.
 Guides the user to initiate a backup after successful adjustment of the pick up
position.

:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 38
Adjustment of pick up IP Service menu

out of the cassette Maintenance
Adjust cycle
Please insert GenRad 
cassette of any format :cancel
to start adjustment

To abort press  SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 39
Adjusting the pick up IP Service menu

out of the cassette Maintenance
Adjust cycle

Please wait ...

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 40


Repair and Service
Adjustment completed Service menu

successfully. Maintenance
Value before adjustment: Adjust cycle
xxxx 
Value after adjustment:
xxxx :ok
Remove cassette and 
press  to continue SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 41
Problem detected! Service menu

Maintenance
Please examine: Adjust cycle
- Check IP in cassette 
- Check vacuum system
- Check mechanics :ok

Press  to confirm SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 42
Service menu
Parameters have changed. CONFIGURE
You should refresh your
backup now. 
Please insert the backup :cancel
medium and press  :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 43
4.2.4 Confirm Maintenance
This service menu provides a feature to confirm a performed preventive maintenance

and log this event in the infocounter file with the current date and time.
After pressing <confirm>, the operator is asked to clear the relative counters in the
infocounter file. The reset of the relative counters is linked to the event “Maintenance”.

3 Test cycle
Figure 44


Repair and Service
Service menu
To confirm this Maintenance
maintenance press  Confirm PM

:cancel
Meter reading: xxxxxx :ok
Date: <dd-mmm-yyyy> 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 45
(1) Press <> to return to the “maintenance” screen.

(2) Press <> to enter the next screen.
Service menu
Maintenance
Do you want me to clear Confirm PM
the info counters? 
(recommended) :cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 46

(2) Press <> to clear the relative info counter entries.
4.2.5 Confirm Repair
This service menu provides a feature to confirm successful repair with a date stamp.
This event is logged in the infocounter file with the current date and time.
infocounter file. The reset of the relevant counters is linked to the event “Repair”.

3 Test cycle
Figure 47


Repair and Service
Service menu
To confirm a successful Maintenance
repair press  Confirm repair

:cancel
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 48

Service menu
Maintenance
Do you want me to clear Confirm repair
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 49

4.2.6 Clear Infocounter
This service menu provides an option to clear the relevant info counter entries without
a link to a special service intervention.
The reset is linked in the infocounter file to the dummy event ”Test”. Date and counter
stamp is added.

3 Test cycle
Figure 50


Repair and Service
4.2.7 Confirm Modification
This service menu provides a feature to confirm modifications and to log this event in
the infocounter file with the current date and time.
infocounter file. The reset of the relevant counters is linked to the event “Repair”.

3 Test cycle
Figure 51
Service menu
To confirm a successful Maintenance
modification press  Confirm modif.

:cancel
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 52

Service menu
Maintenance
Do you want me to clear Confirm modif
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 53



Repair and Service
4.2.8 Confirm Installation
This service menu provides a feature to confirm the successful installation of the
Digitizer. The current date and time is than logged in the infocounter file as date of
installation. The installation can only be confirmed once.
As long as the installation of the Digitizer is not confirmed, a reminder message will pop
up after each startup and asks to confirm the current date as date of installation (see
Figure 6).

3 Test cycle
Figure 54

Service menu
Maintenance
Install date
To confirm this 
installation press  :cancel
:ok
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 55



Repair and Service
4.3 Service Menu: SAVE data
This service menu provides a feature to save relevant data, which are stored on the
internal hard disk of the Digitizer on an external storage medium.
Depending on the Digitizer hardware this external storage medium can either be an
USB flash drive (via USB port on the Revive board) or floppy disks (via floppy disk
drive).
1 INFO Service menu

3 SAVE data
6 CONFIGURE :ok
7 CHECKS 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 56
4.3.1 Infocounter File
This service menu provides a feature to save the infocounter file on the storage
medium:
 The infocounter file named C25<serial#><A-Z>.ICN is saved in the root of
the removable storage medium.
Example: A:\C252034A.ICN
 If an infocounter file is already available on the storage medium, the file name of
the new infocounter file will be adapted (last digit of the file name is increased in
alphabetic order) to prevent overwriting.
 Info counters (relative counters) can be cleared by means of maintenance or
repair confirmation or manually by selecting menu <Clear infocounter>
(refer to section 4.2.6).
 Exceptions (e.g. error handling, messages in case of no floppy available, write
protection, full floppy, etc.) are displayed, e.g. ”Floppy is write protected”.
1 Info counter file Service menu

2 Machine specific data SAVE
3 Service report
4 Snapshot log
5 Session files 
6 CPF-File :cancel
7 Alert log file :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 57

Repair and Service
Service menu
SAVE
Please insert the Info counter
storage medium 
and press  :cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 58
Service menu
SAVE
copying... Info counter
D:<file name> 
to
A:<file name>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 59
Service menu
SAVE
Please remove the Info counter
and press 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 60
4.3.2 Machine specific Data
This service menu provides a feature to create a backup of machine specific data on a
removable storage medium:

3 Service report
4 Snapshot log 
5 Session files :cancel
6 CPF-File :ok
7 Alert log file 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 61


Repair and Service
(1) Click <ok>.

A zipped file named C25_<serial#>.zip, which contains all relevant
machine specific data, is created in a first step on the hard disk of the Digitizer.
Service menu
SAVE
Please insert the Machine data
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 62
(2) Insert the storage medium and click <ok>:

 The storage medium (e.g. floppy) gets a volume label
C25_<serial#>BAC
(<serial#> represents the 4 digit serial number of the device).
 The zip file is copied in a next step to the removable storage medium in a
folder named C25_<serial#>.BAC.
Example: C25_2304BAC:\C25_2304.BAC\C25_2304.zip
 If the removable storage medium contains already a folder with a backup
this folder will be renamed to C25_<serial#>.BCO.
 The zip file in an already existing C25_<serial#>.BCO folder will be
overwritten.
Service menu
SAVE
copying... Machine data
D:\C25_<serial#>.zip 
To
A:<path><file name>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 63
An instruction screen is displayed.

(3) Label the storage medium as described.
Label the storage medium Service menu

SAVE
Backup CR25.0 Machine data
S/N: <serial#> 
Date: <date>
SW-version: c25_3206 :ok
Please remove the medium 
and press  SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 64


Repair and Service
4.3.3 Service Report
This service menu provides a feature to save the service report, created during a
service session, on a removable storage medium:
 A service session starts when the service mode is entered
 All activities are logged with date and time stamp
 Ring buffer principle with 20 sessions
 Saves the service report file on a storage medium
 The service report file named C25_<serial#>.RPT is saved in the root of the
removable storage medium.
Example: A:\C25_2046.RPT
 If the removable storage medium contains already a file with a service report this
file will be renamed to C25_<serial#>.RPO.
Example: A:\C25_2046.RPO
 An already existing C25_<serial#>.RPO file will be overwritten.

3 Service report
6 CPF-File :ok
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 65
Service menu
SAVE
Please insert the Service report
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 66
Service menu
SAVE
copying... Service report
to
A:<file name>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 67


Repair and Service
Service menu
SAVE
Please remove the Service report
and press 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 68
4.3.4 Snapshot Log
This service menu provides a feature to copy a Snapshot log (compressed) on a

storage medium:
 The zip file named C25_<serial#>_<error code#><incrementing
id>.zip is saved in the root of the removable storage medium.
Example: A:\C25_2046_2060B_2.zip
 One, several or all snapshot log can be selected (tagged) by means of the
<> - keys.
 Tagged files are marked with <*>.
 If there are more files in the list than can be displayed: <> symbolize the
scroll option.
 If there is not enough disk space another storage medium is asked for.
 If there is no tag set the current selected item is operated.

3 Service report
6 CPF-File :ok
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 69
(1) Press <> to return to the “save data” screen.



Repair and Service
All Snapshot logs  Service menu

2060B 04-Feb-2004 11:26* Save
2060B 01-Feb-2004 10:43* Snapshot log
247B0 23-Jan-2004 17:08 
:cancel
:ok :tag

 SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 70
Service menu
SAVE
copying... Snapshot log
to
A:<file name>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 71
Service menu
SAVE
Storage medium is full. Snapshot log
Please insert another 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 72
Service menu
SAVE
Please remove the Snapshot log
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 73


Repair and Service
4.3.5 Session Files
This service menu provides a feature to copy session files on a storage medium:
 The session file named #.ses is saved in a folder C25_<serial#> on the
Example: A:\C25_2046\143.ses
 Leading zeros will be suppressed, e.g. 005.ses  5.ses
 One, several or all session files can be selected (tagged) by means of the
<> - keys.
 Tagged files are marked with <*>.
 If there are more files in the list than can be displayed: <> symbolize the
scroll option.
 If there is not enough disk space another storage medium is asked for.
 If there is no tag set the current selected item is operated

3 Service report
6 CPF-File :ok
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 74
All session files  Service menu

1.ses * SAVE
2.ses * Session file
3.ses 
4.ses :cancel
5.ses :ok :tag

 SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 75
Service menu
SAVE
copying... Session file
to
A:<file name>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 76


Repair and Service
Service menu
SAVE
Storage medium is full. Session file
Please insert another 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 77
4.3.6 CPF File
This service menu provides a feature to copy the customer parameter file (CPF) from
hard disk to a storage medium.
 The customer parameter file named ADC.CPF is saved in the root of the
Example: A:\ADC.CPF

3 Service report
6 CPF-File :ok
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 78
Service menu
SAVE
Please insert the CPF File
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 79
Service menu
SAVE
copying... CPF File
to
A:<file name>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 80


Repair and Service
Service menu
SAVE
Please remove the CPF File
and press 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 81
4.3.7 Alert Log File
This service menu provides a feature to copy the alert log file from hard disk to a
storage medium:
 The alert log file named C25_<serial#>.ALR is saved in the root of the
Example: A:\C25_2046.ALR
 The file contains 50 entries
 Service report format
 The content of the sent e-mail is logged

3 Service report
6 CPF-File :ok
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 82


Repair and Service
4.4 Service Menu: SHOW Error
This service menu provides a feature to display:

 Error codes in plain text
 Error hit list
 Explanations of errors and warnings
1 INFO Service menu

3 SAVE data
6 CONFIGURE :ok
7 CHECKS 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 83
4.4.1 Explain Error Code
This service menu provides a feature to explain the highlighted error (warning) code.
Date and time of occurrence are displayed.
1 Explain error code Service menu

2 Error hit list SHOW error

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 84
(1) Select the code using the < > keys.

The current device error or warning status is highlighted.
Code Occurred last Service menu

SHOW error
XXXXX 04-Feb-97 11:26 Explain code
XXXXX 26-Jan-97 14:58 
XXXXX 12-Jan-97 09:34 :cancel
XXXXX :ok
XXXXX 
XXXXX SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 85


Repair and Service
(2) Select <> to display the explanation.
XXXXX Service menu

Text... Show error
Explain code

:cancel
:scroll

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 86
4.4.2 Error Hit List
This service menu provides a feature to display a list of the five most frequent errors.
1 Explain error code Service menu

2 Error hit list SHOW error

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 87
Code: Frequency: Service menu

absolute relative SHOW error
Hit list
00342 27 6 
00541 23 4 :cancel
95462 9 4 :ok
12124 4 3 :scroll
99999 1 1 SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 88
(1) Select a code using the < > keys and confirm with  to display the
explanation (see Figure 86).
(2) Go back to error hit list with <>.


Repair and Service
4.5 Service Menu: INSTALL Data
This service menu provides a feature to copy selected files from a storage medium
(e.g. floppy or USB flash drive) to hard disk and initializes the data if applicable.
1 INFO Service menu

3 SAVE data
6 CONFIGURE :ok
7 CHECKS 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 89
4.5.1 Software
This service menu provides a feature to copy the device software from a storage
(floppy disk or USB flash drive) medium to hard disk and initializes the new software:
 All concerning file names are displayed during the copy process.
 After software installation the user is prompted to create a new backup floppy.
 An entry is made in the infocounter under SW modification history, date, meter
reading.
1 Software Service menu

2 Machine specific data INSTALL
4 Optic parameters 
5 Scanner parameters :cancel
6 CPF-file :ok
7 Language files 
8 HW modification ID SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 90
Service menu
Please insert the INSTALL
storage medium or the Software
first floppy C250105_1_3 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 91


Repair and Service
Service menu
Checking INSTALL
the volume label... Software

Volume is
<label>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 92
If the volume label is not correct, a message <Wrong or missing volume label>
pops up (long beep).
Service menu
INSTALL
copying... Software
A:<file name> 
to :cancel
E:\temp\<file>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 93
If the software is installed from floppy disks, the second floppy and analogue more
floppies are requested to insert:
Service menu
Please insert the INSTALL
floppy C252007_2_3 Software
And press  
:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 94
Service menu
INSTALL
please wait ... Software

Extracting files from
E:\temp

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 95


Repair and Service
Service menu
INSTALL
Installation done. Software
Please remove the 
storage medium
and press  :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 96
Service menu
To initialize the new SW INSTALL
a reset is necessary Software

Press  to reset now
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 97
(1) Press <> to initialize new software.

(2) After the first start-up of the new software, press <> and insert a backup
medium to create a new backup.
Service menu
New software detected. INSTALL
You should refresh your Software

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 98
(3) Press <> to go to <Save machine specific data>.


Repair and Service
4.5.2 Machine-specific Data
This service menu provides a feature to restore machine specific data (machine
backup) from the storage medium (floppy disk or USB flash drive) to the hard disk:
 The volume label is checked.
 The concerning file name C25_<serial#>.ZIP is displayed during the copy
process.
 The zip file is automatically unzipped.

6 CPF-file :ok
Figure 99
Service menu
INSTALL
Please insert the backup Machine data
medium and press  
:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 100
Service menu
Please wait... INSTALL
Machine data
Extracting backup files 

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 101
Service menu
INSTALL
Please remove the Machine data
Storage medium 
and press 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 102


Repair and Service
4.5.3 PMT Settings (mfa/mfb)
This service menu provides a feature to copy specific parameters (e.g. mfa/mfb values)
of the PMT module, which are on the storage medium (floppy disk or USB flash drive)
attached to the spare part, to the hard disk:
 Overwrites existing files.
 The concerning file name is displayed during the copy process.
 Request to save changes on service exit.

6 CPF-file :ok
Figure 103
After Service menu

Photo multiplier change: INSTALL
Mfa/mfb
Please insert the medium 
with PMT data :cancel

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 104
(1) Verify if the serial number of the label is the same as the serial number of the
new part.
 The serial number is displayed on the screen.
 The serial number is automatically stored in the infocounter under
<hardware replacement> history.
Service menu
INSTALL
copying <file name> ... Mfa/mfb


SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 105


Repair and Service
Service menu
INSTALL
Please remove the Mfa/mfb
and press 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 106
(2) Refresh the backup when exiting the service menu.
4.5.4 Optic Parameters
This service menu provides a feature to copy specific parameters of the optic module,
which are on the storage medium (floppy disk or USB flash drive) attached to the spare
part, to the hard disk.

6 CPF-file :ok
Figure 107
After laser change: Service menu

INSTALL
Please insert the medium Laser factor
with optics module data 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 108
new part.


Repair and Service
Service menu
INSTALL
copying <file name> ... Laser factor


SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 109
Service menu
INSTALL
Please remove the Laser factor
and press 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 110
You introduced a new Service menu

component in the optical INSTALL
Path Laser factor
A new calibration is 
necessary
:ok
Press  to calibrate... 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 111
(2) Press <> to go to < calibration> menu.
4.5.5 Scanner Parameters
This service menu provides a feature to copy specific parameters of the scanner
module, which are on the storage medium (floppy disk or USB flash drive) attached to
the spare part, to the hard disk.

6 CPF-file :ok
Figure 112


Repair and Service
After scanner Service menu

replacement: INSTALL
Scanner
Please insert the medium 
with scanner data :cancel

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 113
new part.
Service menu
INSTALL
copying <file name>... Scanner


SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 114
Service menu
INSTALL
Please remove the Scanner
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 115
You introduced a new Service menu

component in the optical INSTALL
path. Scanner
A new calibration is 
necessary.
:ok
Press  to calibrate... 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 116
(2) Press <> to go to < calibration> menu.


Repair and Service
4.5.6 CPF-File
This service menu provides a feature to copy the CPF-file from a storage medium to
the hard disk:
 Overwrites the existing file.
 The file name is displayed during the copy process.
 Refers to the "configure local network ID" screen.
 Request to save changes when exiting service.

6 CPF-file :ok
Figure 117
Service menu
Please insert medium INSTALL
with the CPF file CPF-file
and press  
:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 118
Service menu
INSTALL
copying <file name>... CPF-file


SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 119
Service menu
COPY
Please remove the CPF-file
and press 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 120


Repair and Service
(1) Press <> to check if image queue is empty.
If the image queue is not empty:
Image queue not empty! Service menu

INSTALL
Check the queue then CPF-file
restart ”CONFIGURE - 
Local network-ID” :cancel
:ok
Press  to continue... 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 121
If the image queue is empty:

 the highlighted name e.g. CR250xxxxxxx1 is the AE-title of the Digitizer
 the current valid network ID is also highlighted
Confirm ID or select new Service menu

CR250xxxxxxx1 .....201 CONFIGURE
CR250xxxxxxx2 .....202 Local net ID
CR250xxxxxxx3 .....203 
CR250xxxxxxx4 .....204 :cancel
CR250xxxxxxx5 .....205 :ok :more
CR250xxxxxxx6 .....206 
CR250xxxxxxx7 .....207 SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 122
(2) Press <> to initialize the new settings.
If the CPF file is corrupt, it is rejected by the digitizer and following message appears:
Service menu
CPF-File is corrupted. CONFIGURE
Local net ID
Repeat with a correct 
one.
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 123
(3) Press <> to go back to the menu <installation>.


Repair and Service
After activation of the new CPF a new backup is requested:
Service menu
Backup now. 

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 124
(4) Press <> to go to menu <Save machine specific data>.
4.5.7 Language Files
This service menu provides a feature to install new language files for the operator
screens on the local display of the Digitizer. After successful installation of the
language files the requested language can be selected.

6 CPF-file :ok
Figure 125
Service menu
INSTALL
Please insert the medium Language files
with language data 
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 126
It is checked whether the language floppy is compatible with the current software
version. If the language floppy does not fit, a warning is displayed.


Repair and Service
Service menu
INSTALL
copying... Language files
A:<file name> 
to
C:<file name>

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 127
Service menu
INSTALL
Please remove the Language files
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 128
Service menu
INSTALL
Do you want me to change Language files
my user terminal 
language? :cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 129
(1) Press <> to go to menu <Configure user terminal language>.


Repair and Service
4.5.8 HW Modification ID
This service menu provides a feature to record a hardware modification of the device.
The modification ID (service part number), which is on the storage medium (floppy disk
or USB flash drive) attached to the modification kit, is copied to the hard disk.

6 CPF-file :ok
Figure 130
(1) Verify if the modification ID of the storage medium label is the same as the
modification ID of the new part:
 The hardware modification ID with its description is displayed on the
screen.
 The modification ID is automatically stored in the infocounter under
 One storage medium can contain several modification IDs.
Example:
Did you mount...? Service menu
CM+9 5155 xxxx 2 INSTALL
IP transport HW modific.

:cancel
Press  to confirm :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 131
(2) Save changes when exiting the menu.


Repair and Service
4.6 Service Menu: CONFIGURE
This service menu provides a feature to configure device specific settings and
parameter.
1 INFO Service menu

3 SAVE data
6 CONFIGURE :ok
7 CHECKS 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 132
4.6.1 Local Network ID
This service menu provides a feature to define the network settings of this Digitizer by
selecting the Digitizer AE title out of a list of possible names (out of the CPF).
1 Local network ID Service menu

2 User terminal language CONFIGURE
3 Active Alert System
4 Direct ID 
5 Add-on applications :cancel
6 Service protection :ok
7 Maint. notification 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 133
(1) Select desired name using <>-keys. The name CR250xxxxxxx1 is the
AE-title of the Digitizer.
(2) Press <> to initialize the new name.
Select from list Service menu

CR250xxxxxxx1 .....201 CONFIGURE
CR250xxxxxxx2 .....202 Local net ID
CR250xxxxxxx3 .....203 
CR250xxxxxxx4 .....204 :cancel
CR250xxxxxxx5 .....205 :ok :more
CR250xxxxxxx6 .....206 
CR250xxxxxxx7 .....207 SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 134


Repair and Service
(4) Press <> to go back to the menu <configure>.

(5) Press <> to save settings and go back to the menu <configure>.
(6) After confirmation with <OK> the screen to refresh the backup appears.
Service menu

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 135
(7) Press <> and go to menu <Save machine specific data>.
4.6.2 User Terminal Language
This service menu provides a feature to configure the language for the operator
screens on the local display of the Digitizer.

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 136
(1) Select desired language using <>-keys. Only language files, which are stored
on the hard disk of the Digitizer can be selected, see also section 4.5.7
(2) Press <> to initialize the new language.
Select from list: Service menu

Dutch CONFIGURE
English (default) Language
French 
German :cancel
Italian :ok :more
Dutch 
Spanish SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 137


Repair and Service
(4) Press <> to go back to the menu <configure>.

(5) Press <> to save settings and go back to the menu <configure>.
(6) After confirmation with OK the screen to refresh the backup appears.
Service menu
floppy and press  :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 138
(7) Press <> and go to menu <Save machine specific data>.
NOTE:
Only the main language is displayed:
No distinction between regional language differences, e.g. German for Austria, English
for Australia is made.
4.6.3 Active Alert System
This service menu provides a feature to configure an alert mailing system.

The alert system is able to monitor the status of the device. If certain thresholds are
reached a message (e-mail) is sent to a specified destination. The alert system is used
for preventive maintenance.
This menu provides features to switch on/off the alert mechanism and to configure the
destination.

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 139


Repair and Service
4.6.3.1 Alert System Status
This service menu provides a feature to enable/disable the alert mailing mechanism.
1 Alert system status Service menu

2 Alert destination CONFIGURE
3 Send test alert Alert System

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 140
Alert system status Service menu

CONFIGURE
disable Alert System
Change status with : 
:cancel
Alert destination: :ok 
10.6.5.152 
Alert sent: 0 SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 141
4.6.3.2 Alert Destination
This service menu provides a feature to set the alert mail destination (IP address).

2 Alert destination CONFIGURE
3 Send test alert Alert System

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 142


Repair and Service
NOTE:
The IP address of the alert destination (mail host) can be entered manually with the
arrow keys.
Only valid addresses (< 255) are accepted.
Current alert Service menu

destination: CONFIGURE
010.006.005.152 Alert System

change digit:   :cancel
change position:   :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 143
4.6.3.3 Send Test Alert
The function sends a predefined test e-mail to the configured alert mail destination.

2 Alert destination Configure
3 Send test alert Alert system

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 144
A successful delivery is confirmed with a message and a double beep:
Sending test alert to Service menu

Configure
Alert system
192.9.200.250 
Email successfully sent :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 145


Repair and Service
In case the destination is not reachable the following message appears with a long
beep:
Sending test alert to Service menu

Configure
Alert system
192.9.200.250 
Email delivery failure :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 146
4.6.4 Direct ID
This service menu provides a feature to select from a list either <direct ID off> or
the ID-viewer you want to be connected to.

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 147

<direct ID off> Configure
ID-viewer1-192.9.200.202
ID-viewer2-192.9.200.203 
ID-viewer3-192.9.200.204 :cancel
:ok :more

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 148


Repair and Service
4.6.5 Add-on Applications
This service menu provides a feature to enable/disable add-on applications for the
Digitizer.
A list of possible add-on applications will be offered.

2 User terminal language Configure
3 Alert system
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 149
(1) Select the desired add-on application using the <>-keys.

(2) Press <> to initialize the add-on application.
(3) Press <> to jump back to the prior screen without saving.

1 Mammography (50µm) CONFIGURE
3 FLFS Application

:cancel
:ok | :more

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 150
The second line displays the selected Add-on application.

(4) Enable/disable mentioned add-application with the <> keys.
Status of Service menu

Selected application Configure
Application
enabled 
Change status with : :cancel
:ok | 

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 151
(5) Press <> to save changes and exit menu.

(6) Press <> to jump back to the prior screen without saving.


Repair and Service
4.6.6 Service Protection
This service menu provides a feature to activate/deactivate a protection mechanism of

the service program.
The protection mechanism is implemented to prevent access by unauthorized service
providers. The protection can be activated with an access plus license code. When this
protection mechanism is activated, access to the service program is only possible with
the access code.
The protection mechanism is switched off by default (factory setting). Hence it first
needs to be activated before it can be utilized.
through standard service password from Agfa (refer to section 3.2.1).

3 Alert system
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 152
NOTE:
Obtain the access code, license code (and deactivation code if required) for your
individual device from the Local Agfa Service Organization:
 Access code and license code have an expiration date configured by Local Agfa
Service Organization.
 Once the protection mechanism is activated, enter access code only to get
access to the service menu.
 When entered the service menu, you will not be asked for login to the service
menu for the next 16 hours.
 If the expiration date is reached, it is possible to login one last time and get
access for the next 16 hours. After that time the device will block itself asking for
new access and license code.


Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
The first activation of Service Protection on a device will fail. The web interface will
display the message:
"The size of the serial number is wrong ( == 0) || ( > 20)".
At the local digitizer display no error message is displayed.
(1) Access the menu <Service protection> at the LCD terminal and press
<ok>.
Entering a valid license code is not needed.
(2) Restart the system.
From now on the service protection can be activated or deactivated without
problems.
Activating the Service Protection:

(1) Enter the license code and the access code by means of the <>-keys to
select the position
and using the <>-keys to select the character out of a list (alphabet in capital
letters, numbers 1…9).
(2) Press the <> key to confirm the entered code.
To enable service Service menu

protection please enter: CONFIGURE
Protection
License code: 1____- 
_____-_____-_____-_____ :cancel
Access code: ____ :ok
change digit:   
change position:   SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 153
NOTE:
In case the entered codes are not valid the user is asked to re-enter the respective
codes. After three failed attempts a timeout of 3 minutes is forced before the user gets
access for another try.
Entered code not valid! Service menu

Please re-enter code: CONFIGURE
Protection
License code: 1____- 
_____-_____-_____-_____ :cancel
Access code: 1____ :ok
Figure 154


Repair and Service
The status of the service protection (activated) will be displayed:
The service protection Service menu

is activated. CONFIGURE
This license is valid Protection
till: DD-MMM-YYYY 
Type the access code :ok
<xxxxx> to enter the 
Service mode SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 155
<xxxxx> indicates the currently valid access code.
Deactivating the Service Protection:

(1) Enter the deactivation code by means of the <> keys to select the position
and using the <>-keys to select the character out of a list (alphabet in small
and capital letters, numbers 1…9).
(2) Press the <> key to confirm the entered code.
To disable service Service menu

protection please enter: CONFIGURE
Protection
Deactivation code: 
.____ :cancel
:ok
Figure 156
NOTE:
In case the entered code is not valid the user is asked to re-enter the code.
After three failed attempts a timeout of 3 minutes is forced before the user gets access
for another try.
Entered code not valid! Service menu

Please re-enter code: CONFIGURE
Protection
Deactivation code: 
1____ :cancel
:ok
Figure 157


Repair and Service
The status of the service protection (deactivated) will be displayed:
The service protection Service menu

is deactivated. CONFIGURE
Protection
Type the standard 
password to enter the
Service mode :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 158
4.6.7 Maintenance Notification
This service menu provides a feature to activate/deactivate the maintenance

notification mechanism and to define the Mean Cycle between Maintenance (MCBM)
and the Mean Time between Maintenance (MTBM).
If the Maintenance Notification is enabled, the customer will be reminded daily or when
starting the Digitizer when the following is applicable:
 This message appears 6 weeks before the defined maintenance due date or
due cycles are reached:
"Maintenance interval will expire within a short time.
Please contact service."
 This message appears, when the maintenance due date or due cycles are
expired:
"Maintenance interval expired. Please contact service."

3 Alert system
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 159


Repair and Service
(1) Depending on the current status: Enable or disable the maintenance notification
mechanism using the <>--keys.
Maintenance notification Service menu

Current status: CONFIGURE
PM Indicator
enabled 
Change status with : :cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 160
If required adapt the target values for "Operating hours" and "Cycles" according to the
local terms of the service agreement:
(2) Enter the Mean Cycle between Maintenance (MCBM)
by means of the <>-keys to select the position
and using the <>-keys to select the number out of a list (numbers 0…9).
Default: 12.000 cycles
(3) Press the <> key to confirm the entered value.
Define the Mean Cycle Service menu

Between Maintenance: CONFIGURE
(default 12.000 cycles) PM Indicator

MCBM: 20.000 :cancel
change position:   
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 161
(4) Enter the Mean Time between Maintenance (MTBM)

by means of the <>-keys to select the position
and using the <>-keys to select the number out of a list (numbers 0…9).
Default: 12 months
(5) Press the <> key to confirm the entered value.
Define the Mean Time Service menu

Between Maintenance: CONFIGURE
(default 12 months) PM Indicator

MTBM: 12 months :cancel
change position:   
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 162


Repair and Service
The status of the maintenance notification will be displayed:

is activated. CONFIGURE
PM Indicator
Next scheduled PM: 
The user is notified 6 :ok
weeks before. 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 163
or
is deactivated. CONFIGURE
PM Indicator
The user will not be 
notified for maintenance
required :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 164
4.7 Service Menu: CHECKS
This service menu provides tests to check the Digitizer hardware and the image
transmission to the processing station.
1 INFO Service menu

3 SAVE data
6 CONFIGURE :ok
7 CHECKS 
SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 165


Repair and Service
4.7.1 System Check
The system check is a non interactive test to check the relevant hardware of the
Digitizer like voltages, stepper motor connections, light barrier status, nodes etc.
The test results are listed in a file named C25_<serial#>_syscheck.txt and the
file is saved in the root of the removable storage medium.
Example: A:\C25_2046_syscheck.txt.
1 System check Service menu

2 Send image Checks

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 166
Service menu
CHECKS
To save the result, System check
insert a storage 
medium. :cancel
Press  to start check. :ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 167
(2) Press <> to go back to next higher level (service menu).

(3) Press <> to start the system check.
Service menu
CHECKS
System check running. System check
Please wait ... 

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 168


Repair and Service
4.7.2 Send Image
This service menu provides a feature to send images, stored on the harddisk of the
Digitizer to the processing station.
A list of possible test images will be offered.
1 System check Service menu

2 Send image Checks

:cancel
:ok

SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 169
(1) Press <> to go back to next higher level (service menu).

(2) Press <> to go to the selection list.
1 Test image (mosaic) Service menu

2 Flatfield calibration CHECKS
3 Flatfield banding Send image
4 Test sheet (jitter) 
5 Blue LED test image :cancel
6 Mammo test image 1 :ok
7 Mammo test image 2 
8 Extremity test image SERVICE XXXXX
Figure 170
(1) Use the <>-keys to select the required test image out of the list.
(2) Press <> to send the selected test image to the processing station.
(3) Press <> to go back to next higher level (checks).


Chapter 3.3
Imaging Services
Troubleshooting
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document describes how to locate errors and make checks by means of the
Service menu of the Digitizer.

Revision Date
Document Title
DD+DIS407.06E


eq_03-3_troubleshooting_e_template_v02
Repair and Service
DD+DIS219.06E Troubleshooting
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL PROCEDURE.........................................................................................................4
1.1 Show Error ................................................................................................................................5
1.2 Checks ......................................................................................................................................6


Repair and Service
1 General Procedure
Error occurrs
Error code is
displayed
Select
<Show Error>
Function
see 1.1
Select
<System Check>
see 1.2
Error is located
Corrective
Measures
5155_reg3.3_001.cdr
figure 1
NOTE:
Additionally check Infocounter: see Chapter 9, Maintenance, "How to evaluate the
infocounter"
Evaluate diagnostic images for deficiencies (e.g. jitter)


Repair and Service
1.1 Show Error
(1) Enter the Service menu
(2) Select
4 Show error
1 Explain error code
(3) Select in error code history Code Occurred last Service menu
corresponding entry Show error
22570 04-Feb-99 15:45
20605 09-Jan-99 11:32 : cancel
: ok
5155_reg3.3_002.cdr
figure 2
(4) Reason, meaning and cure of 22570 detected Service menu

error are listed Show error
Explain code
Reason: Cassette module
1. Power supply test of : cancel
stepper node roll
failed : scroll
Meaning: No Power supply
on stepper node
5155_reg3.3_003.cdr
figure 3
22570 detected Service menu

Show error
- Power supply not Explain code
connected : cancel
- Fuse blown
- Power supply : scroll
defective
5155_reg3.3_004.cdr
figure 4
(5) Carry out the checks listed at 22570 detected Service menu
cure. Show error
Explain code
Cure: - Check cables
and connectors : cancel
To verify that error is not - Check replace fuse
- Check replace power : scroll
sporadic, also a quick check can supply
be carried out.
5155_reg3.3_005.cdr
figure 5


Repair and Service
1.2 Checks
(1) Enter the Service menu
(2) Select Service menu

8 Checks 1 System check Checks
2 Check laser
1 System check 3 Check destinations
: cancel
4 Check disk : ok
5 Send flatfield
6 Send jitter pattern
7 Check I/O-bus
8 Send Mammo Testimage
5156_reg3.3_006.cdr
figure 6
(3) System check is starting.

All actions are executed in
same order as during normal
operation.
(4) The file Snapshot.txt is

generated on partition d:\
which informs you about the
status of the machine.
You can use e.g. notepad to
view it.
NOTE:
As an alternative, you can connect your Service PC to the serial port and enter "diag" at
the prompt to start the diagnostic tool.


Chapter 3.4
Imaging Services
Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document describes Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses and LEDs of the
Digitizer.

Revision Date
Document Title
DD+DIS407.06E


eq_03-4_codings_e_template_v02
Repair and Service
DD+DIS219.06E Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 CODING OF THE STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL BOARDS ..................................................4

2 I/O-BUS ADDRESSES OF BOARDS .......................................................................................5
3 JUMPER CONFIGURATION OF THE HARD DISK .................................................................5
3.1 SCSI Hard Disk .........................................................................................................................5
4 FUSES OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................6

5 OVERVIEW OF DIAGNOSTIC LEDS.......................................................................................6


Repair and Service
1 Coding of the Stepper Motor Control Boards

GS IOB-SIN-STEP Boards:
CM+9 9499 8140 x
GS Designation IO-Bus Switch Jumper Settings
Address
410 Scan Unit – 37H JL1 JL1
Scan rolls lift board 1 8

JLGS410.cdr
ST 10 2A 4A
ST10
ST10_2.cdr
412 Scan Unit – Slowscan board 36H JL1 JL1
1 8
JLGS412.cdr
ST 10 2A 4A
ST10
ST10_2.cdr
602 IP Transport Unit – IP 27H JL1 JL1
transport board 1 8
JLGS602.cdr
ST 10 2A 4A
ST10
ST10_4.cdr
712 Cassette Unit – IP 26H JL1 JL1
alignment board 1 8
JLGS712.cdr
ST 10 2A 4A
ST10
ST10_4.cdr
GS IOB-SIN-5Step Board:
CM+9 9499 8120 x
GS Designation IO-Bus Address Switch Jumper Settings
710 Cassette Unit – 22H JL1 JL1
1 8
5fold-stepper JLGS710_1.cdr
motor board
21H JL 2 JL2
8 1
JLGS710_2.cdr


Repair and Service
2 I/O-Bus Addresses of Boards
IO-Bus GS Board
Address
21 710 Cassette unit (JL2) – 5fold stepper motor board
22 710 Cassette unit (JL1) – 5fold stepper motor board
26 712 Cassette unit – IP alignment board
27 602 IP Transport Unit – IP transport board
36 412 Scan Unit – Slowscan board
37 410 Scan Unit – Scan rolls lift board
70 230 Power integration board
75 210 Erasure control board
85 116 Emergency-node
80 306 cPCI adapter board
3 Jumper Configuration of the Hard Disk

3.1 SCSI Hard Disk
Two equally designed SCSI hard disks are used. They only differ in the configuration of
their jumper settings.
SCSI-hard disk Quantum Atlas IV, V, 10KII Remove all jumpers
SCSI-hard disk IBM Ultrastar (DDYS-

T09170, IC35L009UWD)
figure 1
correct jumper configuration

at jumper 6 jumper block:
figure 2


Repair and Service
4 Fuses Overview
Ass. Location Fuse Quality Protection

200 Power unit SI 201 T 2.0A GS300
200 Stepper motor transformer SI202 T 2.0A TR206
200 Power integration board SI 1 T 2.5A GS410
SI 2 T 2.5A GS602
SI 3 T 2.5A GS712
SI 4 T 2.5A GS412
SI 5 T 6.25A GS710
NOTE:
All fuses are slowblow fuses.
5 Overview of Diagnostic LEDs
Ass. Location LED Indicates

200 Power integration board D9, green SI 4 is OK.
D9, yellow SI 3 is OK.
D9, red SI 5 is OK.
D10, green SI 2 is OK.
D10, yellow SI 1 is OK.
D10, red +5 V voltage is OK.
D11, green (not used)
D11, yellow (not used)
D11, red +24 V voltage is OK.
300 cPCI Rack GS306, The voltage at corresponding
voltage indicators position (see labeling) is OK.
(3 x 3 LEDs)
GS312, Indicate the signaling related
Ethernet and to software (service connector
FPGA indicators side) and hardware (RESET
(2 x 3 LEDs) switch side).


Chapter 3.5
Imaging Services
Replacements / Repair Procedures
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 100 / 105
This document describes replacements and repair procedures for the digitizer.

Revision Date compared to previous Version 2.1:
2.2 03-2013  Added information about c-Revive Board, S-Revive
Board and SATA Hard Disk
 Added reference to enclosure for spare part
“c-Revive Board”
 Added reference to enclosure for spare part
“Floppy Disk Drive”
 Added information about return procedure in section 1

eq_03-5_replacements_e_template_v06
Repair and Service
DD+DIS219.06E Replacements / Repair Procedures
Document Title
Service Bulletin CR 35-X - Service Bulletin No. 17 - c-Revive Board and
S-Revive Board available as Spare Part, DD+DIS255.12E
Enclosure Installation Instructions for c-Revive Board, DD+DIS217.12E
Enclosure Replacement instructions for Floppy Disk Drive,
DD+DIS222.09E
Service Bulletin CR 35-X - Service Bulletin No. 02 - New vacuum pumps for
installations higher than 2000m above sea level ... ,
DD+DIS276.07E
Service Bulletin Availability of First Repaired Spare Parts for Imaging
Products, Return of Defective Parts necessary,
DD+DIS050.12E


03-2013 CR 25.0 - Type 5156/100/105 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................6
1.1 Installation of machine-specific Parameters .............................................................................6
1.2 Returning defective Parts..........................................................................................................7
2 SAFETY NOTES ......................................................................................................................9

3 REMOVAL OF PANELS .........................................................................................................10
4 REPLACEMENTS AT THE TRANSPORT UNIT ....................................................................11
4.1 Removing the Transport Unit from Digitizer............................................................................11
4.2 Replacing the Vacuum Unit ....................................................................................................12
4.3 Replacing the Suction Cups....................................................................................................14
4.4 Replacing the Stepper Motor Board .......................................................................................15
4.5 Remounting the Transport Unit...............................................................................................16
5 REPLACEMENTS AT THE ERASURE UNIT.........................................................................17

5.1 Removing the Erasure Unit from the Digitizer ........................................................................17
5.2 Replacing the Erasure Lamps.................................................................................................18
5.3 Remounting Erasure Unit to Digitizer .....................................................................................19
6 REPLACEMENTS AT THE POWER UNIT.............................................................................20

6.1 Removing the Power Unit from the Digitizer...........................................................................20
6.2 Removing the Power Integration Board..................................................................................23
6.3 Installing the new Power Integration Board ............................................................................24
6.4 Removing the 24 V Power Supply ..........................................................................................26
6.5 Replacing the Erasure Control Board .....................................................................................28
7 REPLACEMENTS AT THE CASSETTE UNIT .......................................................................30

7.1 Removing the Cassette Unit from the Digitizer.......................................................................30
7.2 Replacing the 5-fold Stepper Motor Board .............................................................................34
7.3 Replacing the Stepper Motor Board .......................................................................................35
7.4 Replacing the Cassette Opener Mechanism ..........................................................................37
8 REPLACEMENTS AT THE SCAN UNIT ................................................................................42

8.1 Safety Note .............................................................................................................................42
8.2 Replacing the Optic Module....................................................................................................43


Repair and Service
8.3 Putting the new Optic Module in Operation ............................................................................46
8.4 Replacing the Photomultiplier Module (PMM) with Light Collector.........................................47
8.5 Putting the new Photomultiplier in Operation..........................................................................50
8.6 Removing the Scan Unit from the Digitizer.............................................................................51
8.7 Replacing the Pin Diode Board...............................................................................................57
9 REPLACEMENTS AT THE CPCI-RACK (UP TO CR 35-X SN < 4000; CR 25.0 SN < 6500)61
9.1 Replacing the cPCI-Rack by the Revive-Rack .......................................................................61
9.2 Replacing the SCSI Hard Disk in the Module “Storage complete” .........................................63
9.3 Replacing the Floppy Disk Drive in the Module “Storage complete” ......................................66
9.4 Replacing the Power Supply at the cPCI-Rack ......................................................................66
9.5 Replacing the Oberon Board by the c-Revive-Board .............................................................68
9.6 Replacing the SATA Hard Disk at the c-Revive-Board...........................................................69
10 REPLACEMENTS AT THE REVIVE RACK (AS OF CR 35-X SN ≥ 4000; CR 25.0 SN ≥

6500).......................................................................................................................................73
10.1 Replacing the Revive Rack.....................................................................................................73
10.2 Replacing the Revive Board or S-Revive Board.....................................................................75
10.3 Replacing the IDE Hard Disk and/or the Cables at the Revive Board....................................77
10.4 Replacing the SATA Hard Disk at the S-Revive Board ..........................................................80
10.5 Replacing the Power Supply at the Revive Rack ...................................................................84
10.6 Replacing the Fans at the Revive Rack..................................................................................85
11 REPLACEMENTS AT THE FRAME .......................................................................................87

11.1 Replacing the Display .............................................................................................................87
11.2 Replacing the Emergency Node Board ..................................................................................89
11.3 Replacing the Erasure Unit Fan..............................................................................................90
11.3.1 Removing Erasure Unit Fan....................................................................................................90
11.3.2 Installing new Erasure Unit Fan ..............................................................................................93


Repair and Service
1 Introduction
This section contains generic information for repair procedures. There is the usage of
machine-specific parameters described and also the return procedure of defective
parts.
1.1 Installation of machine-specific Parameters
CR 35-X 5158/100 and CR 25.0 Type 5156/100/105 make use of parts employing
machine-specific parameters.
These are:
 Optic module, see section 8.2
 Photomultiplier module with light collector, see section 8.4
 Scan unit complete, see section 8.6
 Pin-Diodes, see section 8.7
The corresponding spare parts kits comprise the new spare part as well as a storage
medium (e.g. floppy disks or USB Flash drive) containing module specific data. The
storage medium is assigned clearly to the spare part and cannot be mistaken. After the
new part has been installed, you have to install these parameters from the attached
storage medium via service menu of the user terminal. Finally, you are asked to renew
the backup. (See detailed description in the replacement section of this chapter.)
Together with date and counter stamp the serial number of the exchanged part is
automatically registered in the info counter file under the item “hardware modification
history”.


Repair and Service
1.2 Returning defective Parts
Some spare parts are available as new spare parts (CM+) and as repaired spare parts
(RF+). Repaired spare parts can be identified in the spare parts list by the prefix RF+.
In order to make parts available to the repair facility, defective parts have to be
returned to Agfa HealthCare after the replacement based on the current return process.
NOTE:
For detailed information refer to Service Bulletin “Availability of First Repaired Spare
Parts for Imaging Products, Return of Defective Parts necessary”, DD+DIS050.12E.
(1) Check for all parts removed from a device if they can be returned:
A defective part can be returned for repair if the packaging of the equivalent
spare part carries the label “EXCHANGE PART” or “Return part!” (see figure 1
and 2).
(2) Always return the part if a return label is attached.
Figure 1: Old red label Figure 2: New red label.


Repair and Service
(3) Fill out the return label completely.
IMPORTANT:
For correct handling of the returned
part it is necessary that all fields are
filled out completely.
Figure 3: Example for a return label
(4) Use the packaging of the new spare part to return the defective parts. All
transport locks, padding or antistatic bags must be used to avoid further damage
during transport.


Repair and Service
2 Safety Notes
Observe for all service interventions the following Safety Notes:
WARNING:
Switch off the digitizer and disconnect the machine from the mains before performing
any service interventions at the digitizer.
Safety instructions for electronical parts see Chapter 3.1 and Generic Safety Directions
for HealthCare and Imaging Products.
CAUTION:
Danger of cutting!
Due to changed production methods, all parts of metal frame can be sharp-edged.
Take special care when servicing the interior of the digitizer.
CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed.
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap (CM+9 9999 0830 0)
around the wrist and connect the other end of this strap on a grounded conducting
metal piece.


Repair and Service
3 Removal of Panels
1
2
4 3
4
Figure 4
1 Cover: Open two screws (Philips screw driver, medium size) and remove cover.
2 Left Side Panel: Open two screws (screw driver, medium size) and lift side panel
off.
3 Right side panel: Press two latches and lift side panel off.
4 Top Front Panel: Loosen six Phillips screws and lift front panel off (the cover has
to be removed before).
5 Bottom Front Panel: Press two latches to open the door.


Repair and Service
4 Replacements at the Transport Unit
4.1 Removing the Transport Unit from Digitizer
REQUIRED TOOLS:
N.a.
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 5 minutes
(1) Unplug digitizer from the mains.

(2) Remove right side panel.
(3) Disconnect plugs (1) and (2).
Figure 5
(4) Unlock the four fasteners (3).

(5) Remove complete transport unit from
digitizer and put it down.
Figure 6


Repair and Service
4.2 Replacing the Vacuum Unit
REQUIRED SPARE PARTS:

 Pump unit spare part number*: CM+9 5155 6130 4
 Only for sites, which are located on sites between 2000 m and 4000 m above
sea level:
High Altitude Pump unit spare part number*: CM+9 5158 6130 1
(for more information see DD+DIS276.07E, Service Bulletin No.02 of CR 35X)
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this
document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Socket wrench (5.5 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) To prevent from loosing screws in the

digitizer, first take out complete
transport unit from digitizer.
(2) Unplug two hoses, including plastic
angles, from suction cups (1).
(3) Unplug 4-pin and 5-pin plugs.
(4) Unscrew three screws (2) to loosen
vacuum unit
Figure 7


Repair and Service
(5) Take out complete vacuum unit.
Figure 8
(6) Check if there are dust caps on the

new spare part and remove all of
them.
Figure 9
(7) Install new vacuum unit in reverse order.

(8) Be aware of guide slot at suctions cups, to plug plastic angles in correct position.


Repair and Service
4.3 Replacing the Suction Cups

Suction cups spare part number*: CM+9 5155 9240 2
REQUIRED TOOLS:
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) To prevent from loosing screws in the

digitizer, first take out complete
transport unit from digitizer.
(2) Unplug hose, including plastic angle,
from metal bolt of suction cup.
(3) Unscrew mounting screw.
(4) Turn metal bolt of suction cup about
90° by hand and take out suction cup.
(5) Install new suction cup in reverse
order.
Figure 10


Repair and Service
4.4 Replacing the Stepper Motor Board

Stepper motor board (transport unit) spare part number*: CM+9515881500
REQUIRED TOOLS:
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) For replacing stepper motor board,

take out complete transport unit from
digitizer.
(2) Place transport unit stable and
protect against tilting.
(3) Move transport robot upwards.
(4) Unplug both cables.
(5) Remove plastic pins from metal plate
side and remove stepper motor
board.
(6) Take out plastic pins from old stepper
motor board and attach them on the
new one.
Figure 11
(7) Install new stepper motor board in reverse order.


Repair and Service
4.5 Remounting the Transport Unit
NOTE:
Before remounting transport unit in the digitizer check that cassette opener of cassette
unit is in hidden position. Otherwise a conflict with suction cups may appear.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
N.a.
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Remount transport unit.

(2) Tie the four fasteners.
(3) Plug in the two cables and check that
power supply cable cannot be
clamped with side panel.
Figure 12


Repair and Service
5 Replacements at the Erasure Unit
5.1 Removing the Erasure Unit from the Digitizer

Halogen Lamp spare part number*: CM+9 0450 6553 0
REQUIRED TOOLS:
N.a.
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 15 min
(1) Unplug the machine from the mains.

(2) Open front door.
(3) Push lock (1) downwards.
Figure 13


Repair and Service
(4) Pull out erasure unit to have easy

access to the cable.
(5) Unplug cable of erasure unit.
Figure 14
(6) Pull the erasure unit cautiously out

of the rail.
Figure 15
5.2 Replacing the Erasure Lamps
(1) Open the two latches beside the

glass.
(2) Swing up the glass covering the
lamps.
Figure 16


Repair and Service
NOTE:
 Always replace all 10 lamps at the same time!
 Pull the lamps carefully out of their sockets.
 The glass bulb of the new lamps must be clean. Use a soft cloth, do not touch
with bare fingers.
(3) Insert the new lamps carefully in their sockets.

(4) Close glass covering and the two latches.
5.3 Remounting Erasure Unit to Digitizer
(1) Put erasure unit carefully on the rail and move it into the digitizer.
(2) Connect cable of erasure unit.
NOTE:
When re-inserting erasure unit, make sure that lock engages again.


Repair and Service
6 Replacements at the Power Unit
6.1 Removing the Power Unit from the Digitizer
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Socket wrench 5,5 mm
 Socket wrench 7 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Switch off digitizer and unplug mains

cable on the rear side.
Figure 17
(2) Open the front door.

(3) Loosen two screws at the frame
(7 mm socket wrench).
Figure 18


Repair and Service
(4) Unplug two cables on right hand side.

(5) Pull out power unit maximum 2 cm
out of the digitizer.
Figure 19
(6) Remove metal plate, see circles

(5.5 mm socket wrench), where four
cable clamps are mounted.
Figure 20
(7) Mark similar cables before

disconnecting. They could be
mistaken afterwards as only length
difference could help.
(8) Disconnect all plugs.
Figure 21


Repair and Service
NOTE:
Unplug the black cable only by touching the plug.
Never pull at the cable itself!
(9) Remove power unit carefully from

digitizer.
Figure 22


Repair and Service
6.2 Removing the Power Integration Board

Power integration board spare part number*: CM+9 5156 6450 3
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Socket wrench 5,5 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Loosen three screws (socket wrench

5.5 mm) (1). 1
Figure 23


Repair and Service
(2) Unscrew (1, four screws) and unplug

(2) power supply (A) to get easy
access to plugs of the power 2
integration board.
A
1
Figure 24
(3) Pinch three plastic pins (1) and push

out of metal plate. 1
(4) Unplug five cables of the power
integration board and remove it.
Figure 25
6.3 Installing the new Power Integration Board
NOTE:
Be aware that board is very sensitive to bending.
(1) Establish which type of erasure unit fan is installed.
Note: The new fan (spare part number*: CM+9 5146 3620 0) has the type
designation "RG 125-19/14N/2" on its label.
(2) Set the jumpers on the power integration board depending on the fan type
(see Figure 26).
For the new fan, set jumpers to the upper two pins at ST7 and ST8.
For the old fan, set jumpers to the lower two pins at ST7 and ST8.


Repair and Service
Figure 26
(3) Install new power integration board in reverse order (see sections 6.2 and 6.1).
(4) Connect digitizer to the mains.
(5) Switch on the digitizer and wait for successful completion of the self test.


Repair and Service
6.4 Removing the 24 V Power Supply

Power supply 24V spare part number*: CM+9 5156 9100 0
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Small screw driver
 socket wrench (5.5 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Unplug two cables (1).
Figure 27


Repair and Service
(2) Unscrew two screws at power supply

of the power unit, one at each side
(5.5 mm socket wrench).
(3) Take out power supply.
Figure 28
(1) Install the new power supply in

reverse order.


Repair and Service
6.5 Replacing the Erasure Control Board

Erasure control board spare part number*: CM+9 5155 9110 6
REQUIRED TOOLS:
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) For replacing erasure control board

take out power unit from digitizer.
(2) Unplug connections to transformers.
Figure 29
(3) Unplug three cables at left side.
Figure 30


Repair and Service
(4) Unscrew three screws (1) at metal

plate.
Figure 31
(5) Turn board and unplug cables at right

side.
(6) If new board was delivered without
metal plate, remove this from old
board and mount it to new one.
Figure 32
(1) Install new erasure control board in

reverse order.
Be aware that board is very sensitive
to bending.


Repair and Service
7 Replacements at the Cassette Unit
NOTE:
For all actions at cassette unit, first remove transport unit (see section 4.1).
7.1 Removing the Cassette Unit from the Digitizer
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Phillips screwdriver
 Socket wrench (7 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Loosen the screws (1) on the rear

side of digitizer.
(2) Push back top cover a little.
(3) Remove both side panels.
Figure 33
(4) Open front door.
Figure 34


Repair and Service
(5) Loosen six screws 1, three at each

side, at front cover.
(6) Remove the front cover.
Figure 35
(7) Disconnect cables of cassette unit.

Two of them can only be reached
from the front.
Figure 36
(8) Loosen screw with a socket wrench

(5.5 mm) to unfasten energy chain
from frame.
Figure 37


Repair and Service
(9) Loosen three screws 1 of spindle

carriage with socket wrench (7 mm)
for about two turns.
Figure 38
(10) Turn spindle carriage off the thread.

Mind that it is a left-handed thread.
Figure 39
(11) Move up IP transport robot by

means of red handle.
Figure 40


Repair and Service
(12) Pull out cassette unit cautiously with

a straight movement, as bearings do
not guide all along. Mind position of
the hands as shown beside.
Put cassette unit down.
Figure 41
(1) Reinstall in reverse order. When reinserting, do not cant bearings and do not
push in with force.


Repair and Service
7.2 Replacing the 5-fold Stepper Motor Board

5-fold stepper motor board spare part number*: CM+9 9499 8130 1
REQUIRED TOOLS:
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Unplug all cables, if necessary

unscrew cable clamps.
(2) Push plastic clips and take board off
the pins.
Be aware that board is very sensitive
to bending.
Figure 42
(1) Install new board in reverse order.


Repair and Service
7.3 Replacing the Stepper Motor Board

Stepper motor board (cassette unit) spare part number*: CM+9 9499 8140 7
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Socket wrench (5.5 mm)
 Piers
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Unscrew energy chain to have free

access to stepper motor board.
(2) Unplug all cables.
Figure 43


Repair and Service
(3) Take board off the plastic pins, if

necessary by means of a pliers.
Figure 44
(1) Install new board in reverse order.

Be aware that board is very sensitive to bending.


Repair and Service
7.4 Replacing the Cassette Opener Mechanism
NOTE:
If the light barrier flag of the cassette
opener is broken then you need not
replace the complete cassette opener
mechanism.
The light barrier flag is a separately
available spare part. Spare part number*:
CM+9 5146 5911 0.
The light barrier flag can brake when it
touches the frame of cassette opener while
it is moved down.
Figure 45

Cassette opener mechanism spare part number*: CM+9 5156 9050 1
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Screw driver
 Socket wrench (7 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:


Repair and Service
(1) For replacing cassette opener mechanism first take out complete cassette unit
from digitizer.
(2) Remove spring washers at both

sides of shaft.
Pay attention that shaft is not
scratched during replacement as it
touches IP directly in normal
operation.
Figure 46
(3) Remove deflector plate by

unscrewing three screws by a
socket wrench (7 mm).
Figure 47
Figure 48


Repair and Service
(4) Remove I/O slot opener by

unscrewing two screws by a
socket wrench (7 mm).
Figure 49
(5) Remove light barrier mount by

unscrewing two adjoining screws by
a socket wrench (7 mm).
Figure 50
(6) Remove black plastic frame of

opener by unscrewing four screws,
two on both sides, by a socket
wrench (7 mm).
Figure 51


Repair and Service
(7) Remove spring washer at right side

of shaft.
(8) Push black plastic crank carefully to
right side. It can be moved by red
handle to loosen contact to shaft.
Figure 52
(9) Remove alignment plate by means

of a Phillips screwdriver.
Figure 53
(10) Turn complete cassette unit and swing up 5fold stepper motor board to have
access to the rear side.
(11) Unplug connector to cassette detection switch (ST 8) at 5fold stepper motor board
of cassette unit.
(12) Unscrew two nuts at rear side which
mount cassette opener.
Figure 54


Repair and Service
(13) Take out toothed belt and remove

cassette opener.
Figure 55
(1) Install new cassette opener in reverse order.


Repair and Service
8 Replacements at the Scan Unit
8.1 Safety Note
WARNING:
Make sure that the digitizer is switched off, before you remove the optic module.
There are no serviceable parts inside the

optical module.
Do not open sealed parts of the optical

module.
Figure 56
Wear safety shoes while removing scan unit.


Repair and Service
8.2 Replacing the Optic Module

Optic module spare part number*: CM+9 5148 2700 3
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Allen key (4 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Remove left side panel.
(2) Unplug activation plug of the optic

module
(Sub-D plug, 25 pins).
5158_reg3.5_001.cdr
Figure 57


Repair and Service
(3) Undo the shielding clamp (A),

(5.5 mm socket wrench).
Unplug the polygon plug (B) (the
connection is unmistakable).
A
5158_reg3.5_002.cdr
Figure 58
(4) For easier handling, unplug flat cable

on left side of PMM.
5158_reg3.5_006.cdr
Figure 59
(5) Loosen four Allen screws (4 mm).
5158_reg3.5_003.cdr
Figure 60


Repair and Service
(6) Pull out optic module cautiously by

using the T-handle and one hand
down left.
The rails guide the optic module and

avoid that the PMM is being
damaged.
However, take care to pull out the
optic module straightforward.
5158_reg3.5_004.cdr
Figure 61
(1) Install the new optic module in reverse order.


Repair and Service
8.3 Putting the new Optic Module in Operation

(2) Install the optic module specific data from the enclosed floppy disk via the
Service Menu at the user terminal.
NOTE:
In case that a digitizer with Revive-Rack and USB is used (CR 35-X SN ≥ 4000;
CR 25.0 SN ≥ 6500), copy the floppy disk to a USB memory stick.
(3) Select <5 INSTALL data>*

<4 Optics parameters>.
The system requests:

a. to compare the S/N on the optic module and the S/N stored on the
floppy disk. After confirmation the parameters are loaded.
The serial number of the exchange part is automatically entered in the
info counter file under "HW Replacement history" together with date and
counter stamp
b. to update the backup
(4) Perform an IP center calibration (see chapter 3.6 of the service documentation).
(5) Perform a shading calibration of all formats (see chapter 3.6 of the service
documentation).
(6) Update the backup to save the calibration data.
(7) Select <3 SAVE data>*
<2 Machine specific data>
(8) Follow the online instructions.
(9) Enter the serial number of the digitizer on the label of the optic modul floppy disk.
(10) Check the image quality with flatfield exposures (if available, also with test
sheet), see chapter 3.6 of the service documentation.
* Labelling of menu entries depends on the software version of the digitizer.

In software versions older than ACP_5007 the term "data" is called "floppy".


Repair and Service
8.4 Replacing the Photomultiplier Module (PMM) with Light Collector
CAUTION:
Risk of damage!
Photomultiplier and light collector are glued and must be treated as one component.

Photomultiplier with light collector spare part number*: CM+9 5148 3080 0
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Allen key, 3 mm
 Socket wrench, 7 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Remove the optic module as

described in section 0
(2) Undo the Allen screw (3 mm) at the
light well (right hand side).
(3) Lift up the light well.
5158_reg3.5_005.cdr
Figure 62


Repair and Service
(4) Unplug cable on left side of the

PMM.
5158_reg3.5_006.cdr
Figure 63
(5) Loosen the two knurled screws by

pressing the blue foam.
5158_reg3.5_007.cdr
Figure 64
(6) Loosen the four Allen screws at the

light collector (7 mm socket wrench)
5158_reg3.5_008.cdr
Figure 65


Repair and Service
(7) Move the black aluminum plate at the

far end of the light collector gently to
and fro; this eases the removal
(8) Tip over and pull out the PMM
carefully.
5158_reg3.5_009.cdr
Figure 66
NOTE:
Hold one hand to the PMM and the other to
the light collector to avoid tearing apart the
module.
5158_reg3.5_010.cdr
Figure 67
(9) Put down the PMM carefully.
(1) Install in reverse order.
NOTE:
Check the functionality of the dust brush after the installation of the PMM!


Repair and Service
8.5 Putting the new Photomultiplier in Operation
(1) Switch off the digitizer.

(2) Install the mfa / mfb parameters from the enclosed floppy disk via the Service
Menu at the user terminal.
NOTE:
In case that a digitizer with Revive Rack and USB is used (CR 35-X SN ≥ 4000; CR
25.0 SN ≥ 6500), copy the floppy disk to a USB memory stick.
(3) Select <5 INSTALL data>*

<3 PMT settings (mfa/mfb)>
The system requests:

a. to compare the serial number on the photomultiplier module and the
serial number stored on the floppy disk. After confirmation the
parameters are loaded.
The serial number of the exchange part is automatically entered in the
info counter file under "HW Replacement history" together with date
and counter stamp
b. to update the backup
(4) Make an IP center calibration, see chapter 3.6.

(5) Make a shading calibration of all formats, see chapter 3.6.
(6) Update the backup to save the calibration data.
(7) Select <3 SAVE data>*
<2 Machine specific data>
(8) Follow the on-line instructions.
(9) Enter the serial number of the digitizer on the label of the
photomultiplier floppy disk.
(10) Check the image quality with flatfield exposures (if available, also with test
sheet), see chapter 3.6.
* Labelling of menu entries depends on the software version of the digitizer.

In software versions older than ACP_5007 the term "data" is called "floppy".


Repair and Service
8.6 Removing the Scan Unit from the Digitizer
The following preparations have to be carried out:

 Disconnect mains cable.
 Open front door.
 Remove both side panels as described in section 3.
 Remove IP-transport Unit as described in section 4.1.
 Remove Erasure Unit as described in section 5.1.
 Remove Optical Modul as descriebed in section 8.2.
 Remove the Photomultiplier with light collector 8.4.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Phillips screwdriver
 Allen key (5 mm)
 Open-end wrench (13 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:


Repair and Service
(1) Tilt the rack forwards.
Figure 68: Example cPCI-Rack
(2) Loosen Allen screw (5 mm); there

may be perceptible resistance due
to Locktite saved connection.
Figure 69
(3) Unscrew two screws (A) (open-end

wrench 13 mm) to loosen scan unit
from frame.
5158_reg3.5_011.cdr
Figure 70


Repair and Service
(4) Pull out scan unit a little.
Figure 71
(5) Remove grounding clamp (socket

wrench 5.5 mm) at the right side of
the boards.
Figure 72
(6) Mark cables before disconnecting.

They could be mistaken.
(7) Disconnect all plugs (1) at both
sides from boards.
Figure 73


Repair and Service
(8) Loosen screw (socket wrench

5.5 mm) and unplug flat cable on
left side of scan unit.
Figure 74
(9) Remove metal plate, see circles

(socket wrench 5.5 mm), where
four cable clamps are mounted.
Figure 75
(10) Mark similar cables before

disconnecting. They could be
mistaken afterwards as only length
difference could help.
(11) Disconnect all plugs.
Figure 76


Repair and Service
NOTE:
Unplug the black cable only by touching the plug.
Never pull at the cable itself!
(12) Put cables over the front door to

have easy access to the scan unit.
Figure 77
(13) Push slightly to left side to avoid

getting caught.
(14) Pull out the scan unit a little.
Figure 78


Repair and Service
(15) Push slightly to right side to avoid

canting of the rubber pad in the rail.
Figure 79
(16) To pull out the scan unit completely

use hand hold on the left side.
Figure 80
(17) Bring scan unit on a safe place and

take care that it can not tilt.
(1) Install new scan unit in reverse order.


Repair and Service
8.7 Replacing the Pin Diode Board

Pin Diode board spare part number*: CM+9 5155 9090 2
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Open-end wrench (7 mm, 10 mm)
 Screw driver
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Unplug cables at pin diode board.
(2) Mark position (1) of motor. The

mark is necessary to reproduce
belt tension afterwards.
(3) Unscrew two screws (2) by socket
wrench (5.5 mm), positioned under
toothed belt.
Figure 81
(4) Loosen two screws open-end

wrench 10 mm, for moving motor.
Figure 82


Repair and Service
(5) Move motor from right to left and

take away toothed belt. Afterwards
take out complete metal angle with
motor.
Figure 83
(6) Remove spring washers on both

sides of gear.
Figure 84
(7) Unscrew two nuts at upper

mounting open-end wrench 7 mm.
Figure 85


Repair and Service
(8) Move two bearings away from each

other by means of a small screw
driver.
Figure 86
(9) Unscrew c-clips protection at scan roller and remove scan roller carefully.
(10) Take out springs at aluminum

bracket and bracket itself.
Figure 87
(11) Remove worm wheel.

(12) Remove spring washers at both
sides of drive shaft and take out
drive shaft itself by moving
backwards.
Figure 88
(13) Unplug connection to diode.


Repair and Service
(14) Unscrew two screws (socket

wrench 5.5 mm), to dismount metal
bracket.
Figure 89
(15) Move board to left side until it stops.

(16) To take out the board you have to pass two screws on the right side.
Therefore bend board very carefully, turn it into a horizontal position and take it
out.
(1) After reinserting the new pin diode board, make sure that board engages
properly.
(2) Push the board to the very right side, hold it in place and mount the metal
bracket. Check that the board cannot move.
(3) Connect plugs. Only plug for motor is connected later.
(4) Insert drive shaft. Make sure that its ends engage in correct position and that
light barrier flag is in functional position.
(5) Mount aluminum angle and springs.
(6) Mount motor and toothed belt.
(7) Screw loose-fitting two 5.5 mm screws under belt.
(8) Mount motor by two screws with

open-end wrench 10 mm, at
position marked before.
(9) Check and resp. adjust tension of
toothed belt by pressing moderate
with two fingers. Distance should
be approx. 1.5 cm (0.6 inch).
(10) Fix screws under belt.
Figure 90
(11) Wind cable around feed line of motor and connect plug of light barrier to motor.


Repair and Service
9 Replacements at the cPCI-Rack

(up to CR 35-X SN < 4000; CR 25.0 SN < 6500)
9.1 Replacing the cPCI-Rack by the Revive-Rack

 Revive Rack (including fan) spare part number*: CM+9 5158 1710 0
When the cPCI-Rack is replaced by the Revive-Rack, the following spare part is
additionally required:
 S-Revive Board spare part number*: CM+9 5148 1800 2
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Screwdriver
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 15 min.
(1) Before installation perform a digitizer A

backup (because a virgin hard disk
will be installed).
(2) Open the side panel on the right side.
The cPCI-Rack is placed at the
bottom of the digitizer.
(3) Tilt the cPCI-Rack forwards.
(4) Diconnect the grey cable on the left
side of the rack (A).
(5) Disconnect all cables at the boards.
(6) Pull the cPCI-Rack carefully out of
the tilt mechnism.
(7) Unmount the power supply (see Figure 91
section 9.4).
It will be re-used in the Revive Rack.


Repair and Service
(1) Mount the power supply into the

Revive Rack as described in section
10.5.
(2) Mount the new S-Revive Board as
described in section 10.2.
(3) Insert the Revive Rack (with fan,
power supply, and S-Revive Board)
into the tilt mechanism.
(4) Connect the grey cable to the
external right side of the Revive Rack
(see Figure 91).
(5) Connect all cables at the S-Revive Figure 92
Board.
(6) Close the the side panel.
NOTE:
For installation instructions of the software on a virgin hard disk refer to the enclosure
delivered with the software. The software can be downloaded from:
Agfa HealthCare Library > Computed Radiography > CR Digitizer >
CR 35-X > Software
Software version must be at least c25_3206 to support the S-Revive Board.
(7) Install the latest digitizer software.

(8) Restore the machine specifc data.
Verification Switch on the digitizer. Self test must be performed successfully.


Repair and Service
9.2 Replacing the SCSI Hard Disk in the Module “Storage complete”
NOTE:
 In order to avoid any damage at the storage board, replace the hard disk very
cautiously.
 Always use the Antistatic wrist strap when working inside the digitizer.

SCSI Hard Disk spare part number*: CM+9 0486 1354 0
NOTE:
For availability of Spare Parts refer to:
CR 35-X - Service Bulletin No. 17 - c-Revive Board and S-Revive Board available as
Spare Part, DD+DIS255.12E
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Phillips screwdriver, medium size
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Before installation of the hard disk

perform a digitizer backup
(because a virgin hard disk will be
installed).
(2) Open the right side panel.
The cPCI-Rack with the module
“Storage complete” is placed at the
Figure 93


Repair and Service
(4) Disconnect the white connector of

the power supply from the storage
board (A).
(5) Loosen the two terminal rails (B).
(6) Disconnect the ribbon cables (C) B
and (D) from floppy disk drive and
C
hard disk.
B
D
Figure 94
(7) Figure 95 shows the storage board

with the inserted hard disk.
Figure 95
(8) Loosen four round-head screws at

the rear of the storage board to
separate the hard disk from the
storage board.
Figure 96


Repair and Service
(9) Disconnect the connector of the

power supply (circle) from the hard
disk.
(10) Remove the hard disk from the
storage board.
Figure 97
(1) Install the new hard disk in reverse order.
NOTE:
CR 35-X > Software
Software version must be at least c25_3007.


Repair and Service
9.3 Replacing the Floppy Disk Drive in the Module “Storage complete”
The replacement instructions DD+DIS222.09E for the Floppy Disk Drive, are enclosed
to the spare part.

Floppy Disk Drive spare part kit spare part number*: CM+9 0486 1365 1
9.4 Replacing the Power Supply at the cPCI-Rack

Power supply spare part number*: CM+9 5148 1850 1
The power supply is used for the cPCI-Rack and for the Revive Rack.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Allen Screwdriver
REQUIRED TIME:
Removal:
(1) Open the right side panel. A
The cPCI-Rack with power supply
(A) is placed at the bottom of the
digitizer.
Figure 98


Repair and Service
(3) Loosen the 4 screws (see red circles).
NOTE:
The 4 Allen screws delivered with the spare
Figure 99: Example
part power supply can be used alternatively
(4) Pull out the power supply cautiously.
(1) Insert the new power supply.

(2) Fasten the 4 screws.
(3) Close the right side panel.
Verification: Switch on the digitizer. Self test must be performed successfully.


Repair and Service
9.5 Replacing the Oberon Board by the c-Revive-Board
The replacement instructions

DD+DIS217.12E for the c-Revive-Board
are enclosed to the spare part.

c-Revive-Board (including SATA Hard
Disk) spare part number*:
CM+6062840
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the
spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part
is delivered.
Figure 100: c-Revive Board (front and side view)
NOTE:
CR 35-X - Service Bulletin No. 17 -
c-Revive Board and S-Revive Board available as Spare Part, DD+DIS255.12E
NOTE:
The module “Storage complete”, which includes the floppy disk drive and the
SCSI hard disk can remain in the cPCI-Rack when installing the c-Revive Board.


Repair and Service
9.6 Replacing the SATA Hard Disk at the c-Revive-Board

SATA Hard Disk spare part number*:
CM+6062850
is delivered.
Figure 101: SATA Hard Disk
NOTE:
REQUIRED TOOLS:
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 20 minutes (including software installation)
NOTE:
 In order to avoid any damage at the board, replace the hard disk very cautiously.

perform a digitizer backup
(because a virgin hard disk will be
installed).
The cPCI-Rack with the c-Revive-
Board is placed at the bottom of
the digitizer.
Figure 102
(4) Unplug all cables at the c-Revive-
Board.


Repair and Service
(5) Loosen the screws at the 2 clips.

(6) Pull out the c-Revive-Board very
carefully.
Figure 103
(7) Disconnect the 2 cables (Power-

and SATA-cable, see yellow circle
in Figure 104).
NOTE:
Do not pull the cable itself. Always
pull the plug.
Figure 104
(8) Loosen the 4 screws at the holder

(see red circles in Figure 105).
(9) Pull the defective hard disk
carefully out of the holder.
(1) Insert the new hard disk

carefully into the holder.
(2) Fasten the hard disk with the
4 screws.
(3) Connect the 2 cables (Power- and
SATA-cable, see Figure 104).
Figure 105


Repair and Service
CAUTION:
Risk of damaging digitizer components!
When installing the c-Revive-Board, make sure it is not canted or mounted in
wrong way.
Otherwise damage to the components on the rear side of the c-Revive-Board
can occur.
(4) Insert the c-Revive-Board carefully

into the guide rail in the middle (see
Figure 106).
and
observe that the connectors are
positioned exactly as shown
in Figure 107.
Figure 106
(5) Slide the c-Revive-Board into the

slot.
(6) Tighten the screws at the 2 clips.
Figure 107


Repair and Service
(7) Connect the cables.

It is recommended to connect the cables in the following order:
a. Laser Diode Module cable
b. IO-Bus cable
f b
SPEED LINK SERVICE d c IO BUS
h g e a
RF-READER RJ45 100Mb POLYGON USB LCD LD-MODULE
PMT
Polygon LCD
Figure 108
CAUTION:
Incorrect plug in of connectors may result in damage of pins.
Insert the connectors c and d with the flattened part as shown in
Figure 108:
c. User terminal (LCD) cable

d. Polygon cable
e. RF-Reader cable
f. Service Interface (RS232) cable
g. Ethernet cable
h. Photomultiplier Tube cable
NOTE:
CR 35-X > Software
Software version must be at least c25_3206 to support the SATA hard disk.


Repair and Service
10 Replacements at the Revive Rack

(as of CR 35-X SN ≥ 4000; CR 25.0 SN ≥ 6500)
NOTE:
The Revive Rack is installed ex factory:
 CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 as of ≥ 6500
 CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 as of SN ≥ 4000
10.1 Replacing the Revive Rack

Revive Rack (including fan) spare part number*: CM+9 5158 1710 0
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Allen Screwdriver
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Open the right side panel. A

The Revive Rack is placed at the
(2) Tilt the Revive Rack forwards.
(3) Diconnect the grey cable on the left
external side of the Revive Rack (A).
(4) Disconnect all cables at the Revive
Board/S-Revive Board.
(5) Pull the Revive Rack carefully out of
the tilt mechanism.
Figure 109


Repair and Service
(6) Remove the power supply (see

section 10.5). It will be re-used.
(7) Remove the Revive Board/S-Revive
Board (see section 10.2).
It will be re-used.
(1) Remount the power supply in the

new Revive Rack as described in
section 10.5.
(2) Remount the Revive Board/S-Revive
Board in the new Revive Rack as
described in section 10.2.
(3) Insert the new Revive Rack (with
power supply and Revive Board/S-
Revive Board) into the tilt
mechanism.
(4) Connect the grey cable to the
external right side of the new Revive Figure 110
Rack (see Figure 109).
(5) Connect all cables.


Repair and Service
10.2 Replacing the Revive Board or S-Revive Board

S-Revive Board (including SATA Hard
Disk) spare part number*:
CM+9 5148 1800 2
is delivered.
Figure 111: S-Revive Board (front and side view)
NOTE:
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Allen screwdriver
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:


Repair and Service

perform a digitizer backup (because
a virgin hard disk will be installed). A

The Revive Rack with the Revive
Board/S-Revive Board (A) is placed
at the bottom of the digitizer.
(4) Unplug all cables at the Revive Figure 112

Board.
(5) Loose the 4 screws (see red circles in
Figure 112).
NOTE:
It is sufficient to loosen the screws. It is not necessary to remove them completely.
(6) Pull out the defective Revive Board/S-Revive Board cautiously.
(1) Plug the new S-Revive Board into the rack of the digitizer.
(2) Fasten the 4 screws (see red circles in Figure 112).
NOTE:
CR 35-X > Software
Software version must be at least c25_3206 to support the new S-Revive Board.



Repair and Service
10.3 Replacing the IDE Hard Disk and/or the Cables at the Revive Board

 IDE Hard Disk spare part number*:
CM+9 0486 1428 0
 Cable set spare part number*:
CM+9 5148 1490 0
(only if cable defective)
is delivered.
Figure 113: IDE Hard Disk
NOTE:
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Screwdriver
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
(1) Before installation of the hard disk perform a digitizer backup (because a virgin
hard disk will be installed).
(2) Unmount the Revive Board as described in section 10.2.


Repair and Service
(3) Disconnect the 2 cables (Power- and

IDE-cable, see circles in Figure 114).
NOTE:
Do not pull the cable itself. Always pull the
plug.
(4) Loose the 4 screws (see red circles in Figure 114

Figure 115).
(5) Pull the defective hard disk carefully
out of the rack.
NOTE:
Pull the hard disk in opposite direction of
the board connections. Be carefull with the
cables, they should not get stuck on the
revive board.
Figure 115
(6) Disconnect the Power- and the IDE-

cable (see circles in Figure 116) from
the defective hard disk.
Figure 116
(1) Replace a defective cable if applicable.

(2) Connect the Power-cable and the IDE-cable at the new hard disk.
(3) Insert the new IDE hard disk into the Revive Board.
NOTE:
Push it in opposite direction of the board connections. Be carefull with the cables, they
should not get stuck on the revive board.


Repair and Service
(4) Connect Power- and IDE-cable of the hard disk with the Revive Board
(see Figure 116 ).
(5) Fix the hard disk by fastening the 4 screws (see Figure 115).
(6) Mount the Revive Board as described in section 10.2.
NOTE:
CR 35-X > Software
Software version must be at least c25_3007.



Repair and Service
10.4 Replacing the SATA Hard Disk at the S-Revive Board

SATA Hard Disk spare part number*:
CM+6062850
(including cable set)
is delivered.
Figure 117: SATA Hard Disk
NOTE:
REQUIRED TOOLS:
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 20 minutes (including installation)
NOTE:
(1) Before installation of the hard disk perform a digitizer backup (because a virgin
hard disk will be installed).
(2) Unmount the S-Revive Board as described in section 10.2.


Repair and Service
(3) Disconnect the Power-cable and

SATA-cable at the SATA hard disk.
NOTE:
Do not pull the cable itself. Always pull the
plug.
Figure 118
(4) Loosen the 4 screws (see red circles

in Figure 119)
and prevent the the hard disk from
falling down by supporting it with one
hand.
NOTE:
The SATA hard disk is mounted in a holder
and needs to be turned 90 degrees inside
the S-Revive-Board before it can be
removed from the S-Revive-Board.
Figure 119
(5) It is recommended to flip the

complete S-Revive-Board carefully,
still supporting the hard disk with one
hand.
The hard disk with the holder (B) is
now lying on the cover plate.
(6) Turn the holder with the hard disk B
90 degrees.
Figure 120


Repair and Service
(7) Pull the the holder with the hard disk

carefully out of the board.
Figure 121
(8) Loosen the 4 screws at the holder.

(9) Remove the defective SATA hard
disk.
(1) Insert the new SATA hard disk in the

holder.
CAUTION:
Risk of Damage!
Re-use the 4 holder screws. Longer screws
Figure 122
may damage the hard disk.
(2) Fix the SATA hard disk with the

4 screws in the holder.
(3) Insert the holder with new SATA

hard disk completely into the
S-Revive Board.
Figure 123


Repair and Service
(4) Turn the holder with the hard disk

90 degrees
Figure 124
(5) Flip the complete S-Revive-Board

carefully, by supporting the hard disk
with one hand.
(6) Press the hard disk upward
manually to the cover plate of the
S-Revive Board.
Figure 125
(7) Fix the hard disk holder by fastening the 4 screws (see Figure 119).
(8) Connect the Power- and the SATA-cable at the new hard disk (see Figure 118).
(9) Plug the S-Revive Board into the Revive Rack of the digitizer.
(10) Mount the S-Revive Board as described in section 10.2.
NOTE:
CR 35-X > Software
Software version must be at least c25_3206 to support the SATA hard disk.



Repair and Service
10.5 Replacing the Power Supply at the Revive Rack

Power supply spare part number*: CM+9 5148 1850 1
The power supply is used for the cPCI-Rack and for the Revive Rack.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Allen Screwdriver
REQUIRED TIME:

The Revive Rack with power supply
(A) is placed at the bottom of the A
digitizer.
Figure 126
(3) Loosen the 4 screws (see red

circles).
NOTE:
Figure 127: Example
The 4 Allen screws delivered with the spare
part power supply can be used
alternatively.
(4) Pull out the power supply cautiously.


Repair and Service
(1) Mount the new power supply.

(2) Fasten the 4 screws.
Verification: Switch on the digitizer. Self test must be performed successfully.
10.6 Replacing the Fans at the Revive Rack

Fan bracket (two fans mounted on
bracket) spare part number*:
CM+9 5148 1760 0
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates
the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare
part is delivered.
Figure 128
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Allen Screwdriver
REQUIRED TIME:

The Revive Rack with the fans (A) is
placed at the bottom of the digitizer.
A
Figure 129


Repair and Service
(3) Disconnect the power cable of the

fan by pressing the connector (B)
together.
B
(4) Loose the 2 screws of
the bracket (C). The screws must not
be removed completly.
(5) Take the bracket with fans out of the
digitizer.
Figure 130
(1) Mount the new bracket with fans.

(2) Fasten the 2 screws of the bracket.
(3) Connect the power cable.
Verification Switch on the digitizer. The fan must rotate easily.


Repair and Service
11 Replacements at the Frame
11.1 Replacing the Display

Display spare part number*: CM+9 5155 1620 1
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Philips screw driver
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Remove cover.

(2) Remove top front panel.
(3) Unscrew four screws
(5.5 mm).
Figure 131


Repair and Service
(4) Loosen screw (5.5 mm) at the right

side of the display.
(5) Unplug cable on the board.
Figure 132
(1) Install the new display in reverse order.


Repair and Service
11.2 Replacing the Emergency Node Board

Emergency Node board spare part number*: CM+9 5155 4820 0
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Pliers
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Remove cover.

(2) Remove top front panel.
(3) Take board off the four plastic pins
(1), if necessary by means of pliers.
(4) Unplug flat cable (2).
Figure 133
(1) Install the new emergency node board in reverse order.


Repair and Service
11.3 Replacing the Erasure Unit Fan

Erasure Unit Fan spare part number*: CM+9 5146 3620 0
REQUIRED TOOLS:
 Allen screw driver (5 mm)
REQUIRED TIME:
11.3.1 Removing Erasure Unit Fan
(1) Switch off digitizer and disconnect mains plug.

(2) Open lower front door and remove both side panels.
(3) Remove transport unit from digitizer (see section 4.1).
Figure 134: Example cPCI-Rack


Repair and Service
(5) Loosen Allen (5 mm) screw at front

side; there may be perceptible
resistance due to Locktite-saved
connection.
figure 135
(6) Unscrew two Allen screws (5 mm)

(1, see Figure 136) at left side to
loosen scan unit from frame.
(7) Pull out scan unit by about 10 cm.
Figure 136
(8) Remove screw (1, see Figure 137)

which fixes fan assembly (A) at right
side.
(9) Unplug fan assembly at left side.
A
Figure 137


Repair and Service
(10) Slide fan assembly (A) out of holder

(1, see Figure 138) and remove from
device. A
Figure 138
(11) Unscrew 4 Allen screws (1) and

unmount plug (2) to release fan. 2
1
Figure 139


Repair and Service
11.3.2 Installing new Erasure Unit Fan
NOTE:
This erasure unit fan can only be used in combination with the power integration board
with jumpers (Spare part number*: CM+9 5156 6450 3).
(1) Check if the power integration board with jumpers (Spare part number*:
CM+9 5156 6450 3) is installed.
(For the removal of the board from the digitizer, see section 6.2).
NOTE:
The jumpers (see Figure 140) must be set to the upper pins.
Figure 140
(2) Check the jumper settings on the power integration board.

(3) Proceed in reverse order to install new fan.
See section 11.3.
(4) Connect digitizer to the mains.
(5) Switch on and wait for the successful completion of the self test.


Chapter 3.6
Imaging Services
Adjustments and Calibrations
CR 35-X
Type 5158/100
CR 25.0
Type 5156/105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document describes adjustments and calibration procedures for the digitizer.

Revision Date compared to previous version 2.0
2.1 08-2008 • Updated information on the IP-center calibration and
the shading calibration.
Details see section 2.2 and section 2.3.
• Added calibration with mammography X-ray source.
Details see section 2.2 and section 2.3.
Document Title
DD+DIS171.08E CR 35-X Service Bulletin # 06: “Announcement of Digitizer
Software C25_3007”

eq_03-6_adjustments_e_template_v06
Repair and Service
DD+DIS219.06E Adjustments and Calibrations
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
Copyright © 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications
=> Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance
task on the equipment.
on the product.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type ‘Order List’ in the GSO library.

Edition 2, Revision 1 CR 35-X - Type 5158/100 Chapter 3.6 / 2

08-2008 CR 25.0 - Type 5156/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000) Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT OF THE SCANNER POSITION ..............................................4

1.1 Adjustment Procedure of the Scanner Position ........................................................................5
1.2 Verification for the Adjustment of the Scanner Position ...........................................................8
2 CALIBRATIONS .......................................................................................................................9
2.1 Possible Reasons for a Calibration...........................................................................................9
2.2 IP-Center Calibration ..............................................................................................................10
2.2.1 Erase the Cassette .................................................................................................................11
2.2.2 Expose the Cassette...............................................................................................................12
2.2.3 Start the IP-Center Calibration................................................................................................16
2.2.4 Failed IP-Center Calibration....................................................................................................17
2.3 Shading Calibration.................................................................................................................20
2.3.1 Erase the Cassette .................................................................................................................21
2.3.2 Expose the Cassette...............................................................................................................21
2.3.3 Start the Shading Calibration ..................................................................................................23
2.3.4 Failed Shading Calibration......................................................................................................30
2.4 Verification of the Calibration ..................................................................................................35
3 BACKUP .................................................................................................................................38


Repair and Service
1 Mechanical Adjustment of the Scanner Position
REQUIRED TIME:
IMPORTANT:
This adjustment is critical!
Perform it only if you are familiar with the adjustment procedure.
When? Perform this adjustment if:

• Geometric or material properties of the clamping elements in general have
been changed.
• The scanner has been exchanged.
• Frequent IP jams are present after the transport from the scan unit.
NOTE:
Carry out this adjustment only with digitizers showing the above described
problems frequently!
PREREQUISITES/REQUIRED TOOLS:
• Open-end socket wrench, 13 mm
• Floppy for storing the machine specific data


Repair and Service
1.1 Adjustment Procedure of the Scanner Position
(1) Get a 15 x 30 cm cassette or a 18 x 24 cm cassette.
(2) Remove both side panels and bridge the interlock switch with a service key.
(3) For adjusting the scanner, the

fastening at the left side of the digitizer
has to be modified
(see circle in figure 1).
Mark the fastening nut and the

fastening plate with a permanent
marker or a scriber.
The mark makes it easier to count the

turns of the nut.
figure 1
(4) Turn the marked nut one complete turn counterclockwise, with the open-end
socket wrench.
The scanner tilts to the left side, with view from the input slot.
(5) Tighten the nut behind the fastening plate, mounted on the thread of
the clamper.
(7) Enter the service menu.
(8) Select <2 MAINTENANCE>

<3 Test cycle>
<4 Handling cycle>.
(9) Set number of cycles to 2 and start test cycle with the prepared cassette
(see step (1)).


Repair and Service
(11) Repeat steps (4) to (10) until the image plate (IP) is no more or only partly
sucked or transported into the cassette.
(12) Loosen the nut behind the fastening plate.
(13) Turn the marked nut one complete turn clockwise.
(14) Tighten the nut behind the fastening plate.
(15) Remove the IP by hand.

If the IP is clamped turn the lift motor (M401) by hand counterclockwise to get
the IP released.

<3 Test cycle>
<4 Handling cycle>.
(see step (1)).
(22) Turn the marked nut one complete turn counterclockwise.
(24) Remove the IP by hand.

If the IP is clamped turn the lift motor (M401) by hand counter-clockwise to get
the IP released.


Repair and Service

<3 Test cycle>
<4 Handling cycle>.
(see step (1)).
(30) Repeat steps (21) to (29) until the IP is sucked and transported into the
cassette correctly.
(33) Turn the marked nut one complete turn counter-clockwise.
(36) Perform the verification (see section 1.2).


Repair and Service
1.2 Verification for the Adjustment of the Scanner Position
NOTE:
Avoid that direct sun light shines into the digitizer.
(1) Properly observe, while performing a test cycle with a small cassette
(18 x 24 cm or 15 x 30 cm), if:
• The IP performs a constant movement.
• The IP is not jerking.
(2) Perform more test cycles with the small cassette, if necessary.
(3) Adjust the scanner position, if the IP is not sucked and transported correctly.
Therefore proceed with step (4) of section 1.1.
(4) Remove the service key at the interlock switch.
(5) Mount both side panels.
Result The adjustment has been successful, if the IP is sucked and transported correctly.


Repair and Service
2 Calibrations
NOTE:
Make sure that the used IPs are dry, clean and do not have artifacts such as
scratches or contamination.
2.1 Possible Reasons for a Calibration
IMPORTANT:
If an IP-center calibration is necessary, always perform a shading calibration
afterwards.
Details
Calibration When
see
IP-Center Calibration • The optic module has been 2.2 Approx.

exchanged. 30 min.
• The pin diode board (GS440) and/or
the light barrier IR Receiver (GS446)
have been replaced.
• White borders on the Mammo
diagnostic images are present.*
Shading Calibration • IP-Center Calibration has been 2.3 Approx.

performed. 1 h.
• The optic module has been
exchanged.
• The LISA module (photomultiplier
with light collector) has been
exchanged.
• The scan unit has been replaced.
• Unacceptable line artifacts (stripes)
in slow scan direction are still visible
on the diagnostic image after
cleaning the scan area.
* only on 24 x 30 cm and 18 x 24 cm cassette formats. The white border is present only on one side of the image.


Repair and Service
2.2 IP-Center Calibration
REQUIRED TIME:
PREREQUISITES / REQUIRED TOOLS:

• X-ray source (GenRad recommended)
If a GenRad X-ray source is available, this should be used for all applications:
the GenRad, Mammo and Extremity.
For a pure Mammo site use a Mammography X-ray source with the
largest available bucky.
• Cassette:
o GenRad (24 x 30 cm or smaller),
o Mammo (18 x 24 cm):
Always expose the smallest cassette format used in the hospital.
If the cassette format 18 x 24 cm is not available, the calibration can also be
performed with a 24 x 30 cm cassette.
• For a GenRad X-ray source:
Cu-filter which has the spare part number*: CM+9 5155 1015 2
• For a Mammography X-ray source:
Al-filter which has the spare part number*: CM+9 5148 1090 0
NOTE:
The GenRad X-ray source and the Mammography X-ray source require
different prerequisites.
Do not use GenRad X-ray source with Al-filter or Mammography X-ray source
with Cu-filter!
NOTE:
For Mammography X-ray source, in order to fix the Al-filter below the collimation
window, a reliable adhesive tape is necessary. Depending on the adhesive tape,
a solvent may be required for the cleaning of the X-ray source. Make sure the tape
is not getting in the optical path of the X-rays.


Repair and Service
The IP-center calibration procedure consists of the following steps:
How? Procedure Details see
Erase cassette 2.2.1
Expose cassette 2.2.2
Start IP center calibration 2.2.3
Verification 2.4
2.2.1 Erase the Cassette
(1) Press the Erase key on the BUSY

ERASURE
local keypad of the digitizer and WARNING
the following screen appears: The next cassette(s) will be erased
Enter number of cassettes to erase: 1
Put cassette in input buffer or
press X to quit
CR85B
5148_Chap03.6_039.cdr
figure 2
(2) Place the cassette in the input buffer of the digitizer.
(3) Wait for the erased cassette at the output buffer.


Repair and Service
2.2.2 Expose the Cassette
2.2.2.1 Exposure of the Cassette for a GenRad X-ray source
(1) Place the cassette in length direction to Rotating

Anode x-ray tube
the X-ray tube as shown Cathode
in figure 3.
51
48
_3
. 6.c
dr
O.K. Not O.K.

figure 3
(2) Ensure that the entire image plate is

fully exposed! The collimated field must
be larger than the image plate!
figure 4
(3) Place the Cu-filter below the collimation window.
(4) Select the following exposure parameters to obtain a dose of 10 µGy:

- 12 mAs,
- 75 kV,
- 1.3 m (51,2”) distance,
- Large focus.
NOTE:
Best use a dosimeter to measure the dose!
(5) Expose the cassette.

(6) Turn the cassette 180°.


Repair and Service
(7) Expose the cassette again.

After the second exposure the cassette has been exposed in total
with a dose of 20 µGy.
(8) Remove the Cu-filter.
2.2.2.2 Exposure of the Cassette for a Mammography X-ray source
NOTE:
The exposure of the Mammo cassette with a Mammography X-ray source is only
applicable for the Mammography IP-center calibration.
Goal Expose at least the half of the cassette (tube side up), which lies opposite to the
chestwall side, see figure 5.
Exposed area
(= 1/2 of cassette)
cassette
(with tube side up)
(chestwall side)
figure 5
(1) Remove the compression paddle.
(2) Check that the appropriate window is selected according to the bucky size.
If both, the 18 x 24 cm and the 24 x 30 cm, buckies are available, the smallest cassette
format (18 x 24 cm) has to be used with the largest bucky size (24 x 30 cm). For this
purpose refer to column 1 of the following table.
If only one bucky size is available (cassette format is then identical to the bucky size)
refer to column 2 of the following table.


Repair and Service
Column 1: Column 2:
(3) Select the following exposure Select the following exposure
parameters: parameters:
- 20 mAs - 2 x 10 mAs
- 28 kV - 28 kV
- Molybdenium source / Molybdenium - Molybdenium source / Molybdenium
filter (Mo/Mo) filter (Mo/Mo)
- Large focus - Large focus
(4) Insert a dummy Mammography Insert a dummy Mammography

cassette in the bucky to activate the cassette in the bucky to activate the
X-ray modality. X-ray modality.
(5) Place the cassette on the bucky: Place the cassette on the bucky:
- With tube side up - With tube side up
- Horizontally centered - With a slight offset in horizontal
direction.
Move the cassette vertically towards
the bucky chestwall, so that the rear Move the cassette vertically towards
half (opening side) of the cassette is bucky chestwall, so that the rear half
in the middle of the collimation (opening side) of the cassette is in
window. the collimation window.
The marked area

in figure 7 must be within the
collimation window.
bucky
cassette 18 x 24 cm collimation window

collimation window
cassette
bucky 24 x 30 cm
(chestwall) (chestwall)
figure 7
figure 6
(6) Fix the Al-filter below the collimation Fix the Al-filter below the collimation
window and make sure the tape is window and make sure the tape is
not getting in the optical path of the not getting in the optical path of the
X-rays. X-rays.
(7) Expose the cassette. Expose the cassette.
Perform one single exposure!
Rotation of cassette is not required.
(8) n.a. Remove the Al-filter.


Repair and Service
Column 1: Column 2:
(9) n.a. Leave the cassette on the bucky with
tube side up.
Move the cassette horizontally to the
other side of the bucky and vertically
towards bucky chestwall, so that the
rear half (opening side) of the cassette
is in the collimation window.
The marked area
in figure 8 must be within the
collimation window.
bucky
collimation window
cassette
(chestwall)
figure 8
(10) n.a. Fix the Al-filter below the collimation

window and make sure the tape is
not getting in the optical path of the
X-rays.
(11) n.a. Expose the cassette.
(12) Remove the Al-filter. Remove the Al-filter.
(13) Clean the X-ray source with a solvent. Clean the X-ray source with a solvent.


Repair and Service
2.2.3 Start the IP-Center Calibration
NOTE:
Close the doors of the digitizer during calibration.
(1) Enter the Service menu.

<2 Calibration>
<1 IP center calibration>.
After the application has been Exposure parameters: Service menu

chosen the exposure parameters Filter: 1.5 mm Cu Maintenance
for the cassette are shown on 2 exposures a 10 microGy Calibration
turn 180 degree
the display. (Approx. FFEDist 1.3 m, X :cancel
12 mAs, 75 kVp)
These parameters are only valid Insert cassette 24x30 cm
for a GenRad X-ray source. If a or smaller
5148_Chap03.6_008.cdr
Mammography X-ray source is
used, refer to the exposure figure 9
parameters in step (3) of section
2.2.2.2.
(3) Insert the exposed cassette in the digitizer.
(4) In case the cassette has been Service menu

identified by mistake the following Maintenance
screen will be displayed: Cassette is identified Calibration
with patient data.
- Press the escape key , if you Press to calibrate X :cancel
want to scan the cassette: the or X to scan. :ok
name of the patient will be
shown. 5148_Chap03.6_030.cdr
- Press the confirm key , if you figure 10

want to start the calibration.
(5) If the right format is detected the calibration starts automatically and you
can skip step (6).
(6) If the wrong format is detected a warning message will be displayed.

- Press the confirm key to start the calibration with the wrong format, or
- Press the escape key to stop calibration.
Remove the cassette and press confirm key .
The calibration main screen will be displayed.


Repair and Service
(7) The IP-center calibration has been Service menu

successful, if the message Maintenance
Calibration successful pops up. Calibration
Calibration successful
If the calibration has not been ...press to continue :ok
successful, continue with section
2.2.4. 5148_Chap03.6_038.cdr
figure 11
(8) Press confirm key .
(9) Perform a shading calibration (see section 2.3) and finally a verification
(see section 2.4).
2.2.4 Failed IP-Center Calibration

Find the possible results of a failed IP-center calibration below:
Information on Details
Reason
the Display see
Check • Flatfield was not used.

collimation and • A defective IP was used (with scratches in slow-
optics 2.2.4.1
scan direction).
Underexposed • The exposure conditions were wrong

(e.g. the dose was too low).
• The filter was not positioned correctly.
• The photomultiplier floppy was not installed properly 2.2.4.2
after a photomultiplier (PMT) replacement.
• The backup floppy was not installed properly after a
software installation including hard disk formatting.
Overexposed • The exposure conditions were wrong

(e.g. the dose was too high).
after a PMT replacement.


Repair and Service
NOTE:
The Scan Average Level (SAL) is the digital 12 bit value (gray scale) of a pixel and is
one of the criteria for a successful calibration. The SAL values during a calibration
must be in a range of approximately 730 to 4095.
2.2.4.1 Check collimation and optics (dynamic range bigger than 1:2)
(1) A failure message pops up with Service menu

a long beep. Maintenance
Calibration
Check coll. and optics
X :cancel
...press to repeat :ok
5148_Chap03.6_035.cdr
figure 12
(2) Press the confirm key .

Make sure that the IP was exposed without collimation.
Check the IP for scratches in slow scan direction.
Redo calibration.
(3) Otherwise, press the escape key to cancel the calibration.
(4) Redo calibration.
2.2.4.2 Underexposed (SAL < 730)
(1) A failure message pops up.

Increase the exposure dose.
Check the exposure conditions and the filter alignment.
Redo the calibration.
(3) If the failure message pops up again, press the escape key .
Check if the the photomultiplier floppy was installed properly after a PMT
replacement.
Check if the backup floppy was installed properly after a software installation
including hard disk formatting.
Install the corresponding floppy if necessary.


Repair and Service
2.2.4.3 Overexposed (SAL > 4095)
(1) A failure message pops up.

Decrease the exposure dose.
replacement.


Repair and Service
2.3 Shading Calibration
REQUIRED TIME:
PREREQUISITES / REQUIRED TOOLS:

• X-ray source (GenRad recommended)
If a GenRad X-ray source is available, this should be used for all applications:
the GenRad, Mammo and Extremity.
For a pure Mammo site use a Mammography X-ray source with the
largest available bucky.
• Cassette format (GenRad: 35 x 43 cm or Mammo:24 x 30 cm):
Always expose the largest cassette format used in the hospital.
If the cassette format 18 x 24 cm is used, the calibration is not valid for
24 x 30 cm cassette formats or higher!
• For a GenRad X-ray source:
Cu-filter which has the spare part number*: CM+9 5155 1015 2
• For a Mammography X-ray source:
- Al-filter which has the spare part number*: CM+9 5148 1090 0
- CR Mammography calibration kit which has the spare part number*:
10+7 9820 0424 0
NOTE:
The GenRad X-ray source and the Mammography X-ray source require
different prerequisites.
Do not use GenRad X-ray source with Al-filter or Mammography X-ray source
with Cu-filter!
NOTE:
For Mammography X-ray source, in order to fix the Al-filter below the collimation
window, a reliable adhesive tape is necessary. Depending on the adhesive tape, a
solvent may be required for the cleaning of the X-ray source. Make sure the tape is not
getting in the optical path of the X-rays.


Repair and Service
The shading calibration procedure consists of the following steps:
How? Procedure Details see
Erase cassette 2.3.1

Expose cassette 2.3.2
Start shading calibration 2.3.3
Verification 2.4
2.3.1 Erase the Cassette
(1) Press the Erase key BUSY

ERASURE
on the local keypad of the WARNING
digitizer and the following The next cassette(s) will be erased
screen appears Enter number of cassettes to erase: 1
(see figure 13). Put cassette in input buffer or
press X to quit
CR85B
5148_Chap03.6_039.cdr
figure 13
(2) Place the cassette in the input buffer of the digitizer.
(3) Wait for erased cassette at the output buffer.
2.3.2 Expose the Cassette
NOTE:
The GenRad X-ray source can be used for both, the GenRad and the Mammo,
calibration procedure.


Repair and Service
2.3.2.1 Exposure of the Cassette for a GenRad X-ray source
(1) Place the largest cassette in length Rotating

Anode x-ray tube
direction to the X-ray tube as shown in Cathode
figure 14.
51
48
_3
. 6.c
dr
O.K. Not O.K.

figure 14
(2) Ensure that the entire image plate is

fully exposed! The collimated field
must be larger than the image plate!
figure 15
(4) Place the Cu-filter below the collimation window.
(5) Select the following exposure parameters to obtain a dose of 10 µGy:

- 12 mAs,
- 75 kV,
- 1.3 m (51,2”) distance,
- Large focus.
NOTE:
(7) Turn the cassette 180°.
(8) Expose the cassette again.

After the second exposure the cassette has been exposed in total with a dose
of 20 µGy.
(9) Remove the Cu-filter.


Repair and Service
2.3.2.2 Exposure of the “CR Mammo Calibration Kit” Cassette for a Mammography
X-ray source
NOTE:
The exposure of the “CR Mammo Calibration Kit” cassette with a Mammography
X-ray source is only applicable for the Mammography shading calibration.
(1) Remove the compression paddle.
(2) Fix the Al-filter below the collimation window and check that the appropriate
window is selected according to the bucky size.
Make sure the tape is not getting in the optical path of the X-rays.
(3) Select the following exposure parameters:

- 200 mAs,
- 28 kV,
- Molybdenium source / Molybdenium filter (Mo/Mo),
- large focus.
(4) Put the cassette in the bucky.
NOTE:
Perform one single exposure!
Rotation of cassette is not required.
(6) Remove the Al-filter.
(7) Clean the X-ray source with a solvent.
2.3.3 Start the Shading Calibration
NOTE:
Close the doors of the digitizer during calibration.


Repair and Service
(1) Enter the Service menu.

<2 Calibration>.
<2 Shading Calibration>.
Which application Service menu
(3) Choose one of 4 possible applications shall be calibrated? Calibration
for shading calibration (details see Shading
table below). 1 GenRad fast o.k.
2 GenRad slow X :cancel
3 Mammo :ok
When an application has been 4 Extremity
calibrated successfully, the remark 5148_Chap03.6_001.c
“o.k.” will be shown next to the

figure 16
application on the display (see
figure 16).
Selection
Exposure
on the Details
Application Type Remarks
User see
(X-ray source)
Interface
GenRad 1 GenRad GenRad - Use the biggest GenRad 2.3.3.1

fast* (default cassette available (35x43 cm)
selection) - Use Cu-filter
2 GenRad
slow
Mammo 3 Mammo GenRad - Use the biggest GenRad 2.3.3.2
(recommended cassette available (35x43 cm)
if available) - Use Cu-filter.
Mammo - Choose a X-ray source with

the smallest heel effect.**
- Use the biggest Mammo
cassette available (24x30 cm)
- Use Al-filter.
Extremity 4 Extremity GenRad - Use the biggest GenRad 2.3.3.1

(default cassette available (35x43 cm)
selection) - Use Cu-filter.
* The GenRad formats 35 x 35 cm and 35 x 43 cm are always scanned in Fast Scan Mode.
** In general modalities of Siemens are known to have a low heel effect.
NOTE:
If the Mammo application is not activated:
- A Mammo shading calibration with a GenRad cassette can be performed, anyway.
- A Mammo shading calibration with a Mammo Cassette can not be performed.


Repair and Service
2.3.3.1 Application “GenRad“ or “Extremity”
After the application has been chosen Exposure parameters: Service menu
the exposure parameters for the Filter: 1.5 mm Cu Calibration
cassette are shown on the display. 2 exposures a 10 microGy Shading
turn 180 degree
(Approx. FFDist. 1.3 m, X :cancel
12 mAs, 75 kVp)
Insert cassette 35x43cm
5148_Chap03.6_009.cdr
figure 17
(1) Insert the exposed cassette.

with patient data.

can skip step (4).
(4) If the wrong format is detected a Format is smaller than Service menu
warning message will be recommended! Calibration
displayed. Shading
Shading calibration will
- Press the confirm key to only be valid for X :cancel
start the calibration with the calibrated format and :ok
wrong format, or smaller ones.
5148_Chap01_027.cdr
figure 19
- Press the escape key to
stop calibration.
Remove the cassette and
press confirm key .
The calibration main screen will

be displayed. Continue with
section 2.3.2.


Repair and Service
(5) If the shading calibration has Service menu

been successful the message Calibration
Calibration successful pops up Shading
(e. g. “GenRad fast”). GenRad fast
Calibration successful :ok
If the calibration has not been SAL: 2356, Dose okay
successful, continue with section ...press to continue
5148_Chap03.6_037.cdr
2.3.4.
figure 20
(7) Redo the calibration for the next application, shown on the display. Continue with
section 2.3.2.
When an application has been calibrated successfully, the remark “o.k.” will be
shown next to the application on the display (see figure 16)
When all 3 applications (GenRad fast, GenRad slow and Extremity) have been
performed continue with the Mammo application (see section 2.3.3.2).
(8) Perform verification (see section 2.4), after all applications have
been calibrated.
2.3.3.2 Application “Mammo“
Two possible exposure types can be chosen:

• GenRad, if a GenRad X-ray source is available,
• Mammo , if only a Mammography X-ray source is available.
(1) Choose one of the 2 possible Select exposure type. Service menu
exposure types. Calibration
1 GenRad Shading
2 Mammo
X :cancel
:ok
5148_Chap03.6_025.cdr
figure 21


Repair and Service
Exposure Type ”GenRad” chosen
the exposure parameters for the Filter: 1.5 mm Cu Calibration
cassette are shown on the display. 2 exposures a 10 microGy Shading
turn 180 degree
(Approx. FFDist. 1.3 m, X :cancel
12 mAs, 75 kVp)
5148_Chap03.6_009.cdr
figure 22

with patient data.

can skip step (4).
displayed. Shading
5148_Chap01_027.cdr
figure 24
stop calibration.
Remove the cassette and
press confirm key .

section 2.3.2.


Repair and Service

(e. g. “Mammo”). Mammo
5148_Chap03.6_007.cdr
2.3.4.
figure 25
(7) Perform verification (see section2.4), after all applications have

been calibrated.
Exposure Type “Mammo” chosen
IMPORTANT:
Ensure that the "CR Mammography calibration kit" cassette is used for
the following steps!
the exposure parameters for the Filter: 2 mm Al Calibration
cassette are shown on the display. Exp. Technique: Mo/Mo Shading
200mAs, 28 kVp
No compression paddle X :cancel

5148_Chap03.6_026.cdr
figure 26

with patient data.



Repair and Service
can skip step (4).
displayed. Shading
5148_Chap01_027.cdr
figure 28
stop calibration.
Remove the cassette and press
the confirm key .

section 2.3.2.

(e. g. “Mammo”). Mammo
5148_Chap03.6_007.cdr
2.3.4.
figure 29
(7) Perform verification (see section 2.4), after all applications have
been calibrated.


Repair and Service
2.3.4 Failed Shading Calibration
Find the possible reasons for a failed shading calibration below:
Information on Details
Reason
the Display see
Underexposed • The exposure conditions were wrong

(e.g. the dose was too low).
after a photomultiplier (PMT) replacement.
Overexposed • The exposure conditions were wrong

(e.g. the dose was too high).
after a PMT replacement.
Dust detected • Dust is present on the IP.

2.3.4.3
• Flatfield was not used.
Check coll. and • Flatfield was not used.

optics • Collimation was used.
2.3.4.4
• A defective IP was used (with scratches in slow-
scan direction).
Modality is • GenRad:
vignetting - Flatfield was not used.
- A defective IP was used.
- The collimation was used. 2.3.4.5
(Warning • Mammography:
message only) - Flatfield was not used.
- A defective IP was used.
NOTE:
The Scan Average Level (SAL) is the digital 12 bit value (gray scale) of a pixel and is
one of the criteria for a successful calibration. The SAL values during a calibration
must be in a range of approximately 730 to 4095.


Repair and Service
2.3.4.1 Underexposed (SAL < 730)
(1) A failure message pops up. Service menu

Calibration
Shading
GenRad fast
Failure - underexposed! :ok
SAL: 1648, try 2x mAs
...press to repeat
5148_Chap03.6_006.cdr
figure 30

Increase the exposure dose.
replacement.
2.3.4.2 Overexposed (SAL > 4095)
(1) A failure message pops up. Service menu

Calibration
Shading
GenRad fast
Failure - overexposed! :ok
SAL: 4096, try half mAs
...press to repeat
5148_Chap03.6_004.cdr
figure 31

Decrease the exposure dose.
IMPORTANT:
For Mammography X-ray source, even if the dose has to be
decreased due to overexposure, the settings must not fall below
50 mAs and 0.5 s.


Repair and Service
replacement.
2.3.4.3 Dust detected
(1) A failure message pops up with a long beep.
(3) Check if the exposure parameters have been the same as shown on the display.
(4) Clean the optics with the built-in brush.
(5) Check on the IP the presence of scratches in slow scan direction and of dust.
Look for another IP which is dry, clean and immaculate.
2.3.4.4 Check collimation and optics (dynamic range bigger than 1:2)
(1) A failure message pops up (e. g. Service menu

“GenRad fast”) with a long beep. Calibration
Shading
GenRad fast
Calibration failed! :ok
Check coll. and optics
...press to repeat
5148_Chap03.6_003.cdr
figure 32


Repair and Service

Make sure that the IP was exposed without collimation and with the exposure
parameters shown on the display.
Check the IP for scratches in slow scan direction.
Redo calibration.
In case the Mammo exposure type was selected and the above actions do not
show success:
- Look for the Mammography X-ray source with the smallest heel effect.
- Redo the calibration with this X-ray source and use the same bucky size
as for the first exposure.
(3) Otherwise, press the escape key to cancel the calibration.
2.3.4.5 Modality is vignetting (warning message only)
(1) A Calibration successful screen Service menu

(e. g. “Mammo”) pops up. Calibration
Shading
Mammo
SAL: 2356, Dose okay
...press to continue
5148_Chap03.6_007.cdr
figure 33
(3) A warning message pops up if the Warning: Service menu

signal dropped below the Calibration
Modality is vignetting. Shading
acceptable limit within a range of Please inform customer.
3 mm at the left or right border.
Calibration is accepted. :ok
5148_Chap03.6_002.cdr
figure 34


Repair and Service
(5) Check if:

- The exposure parameters have been the same as shown on the display.
- The collimation was used properly (if the exposure type is GenRad).
- The IP has no scratches in slow scan direction or has no dust.
- The photomultiplier floppy was properly installed after a PMT replacement.
- The backup floppy was properly installed after a software installation including
hard disk formatting.
(6) Redo the calibration.
(7) If the above actions do not show success and in case the Mammo exposure type
was selected:
- Look for the Mammography X-ray source with the smallest heel effect.
- Redo the calibration with this X-ray source and use the same bucky size
as for the first exposure.
(8) If the warning message still pops up, and still in case the Mammo exposure type
was selected, the following workaround is possible:
- Take a flatfield as evidence that the collimation area of the X-ray source does
not fit with the IP position in the bucky.
- Explain the problem to the customer and ask him to call the X-ray supplier for
a service intervention.
- Carry out a final calibration after the service intervention on the X-ray source.
NOTE:
In this workaround the left and the right 3 mm of the image are not shading
calibrated. It is the customer’s responsibility to use this workaround and to handle
the mismatch of cassette position and beam collimation.


Repair and Service
2.4 Verification of the Calibration
NOTE:
The calibration verification is always taking place after the shading calibration was
performed. There is no sense to perform the IP-center calibration verification before
the shading calibration procedure is done.
(1) Expose a cassette with a regular flatfield, to check the image quality of each used
application as described in the following table:
Application Required Cassette Procedure
GenRad fast GenRad 2.3.2.1

35 x 43 cm
GenRad slow (1) any GenRad cassette beside 2.3.2.1
35 x 43 cm and 35 x 35 cm
Mammography largest format available 2.3.3.2 (2)
Extremity Extremity 2.3.2.1

35 x 43 cm (3)
(1)
Only if digitizer is in slow mode.
(2)
If a Mammo X-ray modality is used, select 40 mAs instead 200 mAs for the Flatfield exposure.
(3)
You can also temporarily re-initialize a GenRad 35 x 43 cm cassette.


Repair and Service
(2) Identify the cassette as follows:
For GenRad application:
On CR QS Processing Station:
- Select Study type:

<System Diagnosis>.
- Select Substudy: <Flatfield>.
- Confirm Exposure class: <200>.
figure 35
- Select Exam Group:

<System Diagnosis>.
- Select Exposure Type: <FlatField>.
- Confirm Detector Sensitivity: <200>.
figure 36


Repair and Service
For Mammo application:
On CR QS Processing Station:
- Select Study type:

<System Diagnosis>.
- Select Substudy:
<Flat field Mammo>.
- Confirm Exposure class: <50>.
figure 37
- Select Exam Group:

<System Diagnosis>.
- Select Exposure Type:
<FlatField Mammo>.
- Confirm Detector Sensitivity: <50>.
figure 38
(3) Insert the cassette into the Digitizer.
(4) Print the image with a window setting of 1.2 (level setting leaves unchanged).
(5) Check the image quality of the flatfield for absence of any stripes and large area
inhomogenities (shading calibration) and for absence of lateral borders (IP-center
calibration).
(6) Start the backup to save the new calibration parameters (see section 3).


Repair and Service
3 Backup
(1) Update the backup storage media to save the new machine specific data
(calibration, PD-factor).
(2) Enter the Service Menu.
(3) Select <3 Save data>

<2 Machine specific data>.
(4) Follow the on-line instructions.


Chapter 3.7
Imaging Services
Software Menus, Settings
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
Chapter 3.7 is intentionally left blank.


eq_03-7_menus-setting_e_template_v02
Chapter 3.8
Imaging Services Software Releases and Patches
CR 35-X
Type 5158/100
CR 25.0
Type 5156/100/105
This document describes all customer released software versions*.
* Previously supplied software versions (prior to version C25_3007) are no more listed in this document.

Revision Date compared to previous version 1.0:
1.1 12-2012 Added information about software version c25_3206 and
c25_3013B
Document Title
DD+DIS219.06E Chapter 3.2, Tools and auxiliary Means
DD+DIS052.09E Service Bulletin No. 8, Distinction between Status Indication and
Error Message: ''DIGITIZER LASER NOT READY Please wait''

eq_standard_e_template_v07
DD+DIS206.10E Repair and Service
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 1 CR 35-X - Type 5158/100 Chapter 3.8 / Page 2 of 13

LIST OF CONTENTS
1 RELEASE INFO FOR DIGITIZER SOFTWARE C25_3206 .....................................................4

1.1 New Features of Digitizer Software C25_3206 since Software Version C25_3103B ..............4
1.2 Changes in Service Functionality since Software Version C25_3103B ...................................4
1.2.1 Installation Done Message........................................................................................................4
1.2.2 Protection of Service Tools .......................................................................................................5
1.2.3 Maintenance Notification...........................................................................................................6
1.3 Changes in Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_3103B................................6
1.3.1 Maintenance Indicator Messages .............................................................................................6
1.4 Solved Bugs with Software Version C25_3206 ........................................................................7
2 RELEASE INFO FOR DIGITIZER SOFTWARE C25_3103B...................................................8

2.1 New Features of Digitizer Software C25_3103B since Software Version C25_3103 ..............8
2.2 Changes in Service and Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_3103 ..............8
2.3 Solved Bugs with Software Version C25_3103B......................................................................8
3 RELEASE INFO FOR DIGITIZER SOFTWARE C25_3103 .....................................................9

3.1 New Features of Digitizer Software C25_3103 since Software Version C25_3102.................9
3.2 Changes in Service and Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_3102 ..............9
3.3 Solved Bugs with Software Version C25_3103 ........................................................................9
4 RELEASE INFO FOR DIGITIZER SOFTWARE C25_3102 ...................................................10

4.1 New Features of Digitizer Software C25_3102 since Software Version C25_3007...............10
4.2 Changes in Service Functionality since Software Version C25_3007....................................11
4.3 Changes in Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_3007 ................................11
4.4 Solved Bugs with Software Version C25_3102 ......................................................................11
5 RELEASE INFO FOR DIGITIZER SOFTWARE C25_3007 ...................................................12

5.1 New Features of Digitizer Software C25_3007 since Software Version C25_2007...............12
5.2 Changes in Service Functionality since Software Version C25_2007....................................13
5.3 Changes in Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_2007 ................................13
5.4 Solved Bugs with Software Version C25_3007 ......................................................................13


1 Release Info for Digitizer Software C25_3206
Type of new Software Software Upgrade

Release Date 09-2012
Digitizer SNs  Software is installed ex factory on:
CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 as of SN 8716
 CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 and 5156 / 100 are already
out of production.
Availability The latest version of the Digitizer software is available for
download in the Agfa HealthCare Library:
 Computed Radiography > CR Digitizers >
CR 35-X > Software
CR 25.0 > Software
Prerequisites The new Software is upgradeable from every previous
version of C25_XXXX Software.
1.1 New Features of Digitizer Software C25_3206 since Software Version

C25_3103B
No changes in this version.
1.2 Changes in Service Functionality since Software Version C25_3103B
1.2.1 Installation Done Message
After software installation from USB flash drive the message "installation done" is
displayed to indicate, that the software was successfully uploaded to the Digitizer.


1.2.2 Protection of Service Tools
New service menu available: 6 CONFIGURE > 6 Service protection

This service menu provides a feature to activate/deactivate a protection mechanism of
the service program.
The protection mechanism is implemented to prevent access by unauthorized service
providers. The protection can be activated with an access plus license code. When this
protection mechanism is activated, access to the service program is only possible with
the access code.
The protection mechanism is switched off by default (factory setting). Hence it first
needs to be activated before it can be utilized.
through standard service password from Agfa.
For details refer to Chapter 3.2, Tools and auxiliary Means.
IMPORTANT:
The first activation of Service Protection on a device will fail. The web interface will
display the message:
"The size of the serial number is wrong ( == 0) || ( > 20)".
At the local digitizer display no error message is displayed.
(1) Access the menu <Service protection> at the LCD terminal and press
<ok>.
Entering a valid license code is not needed.
(2) Restart the system.
From now on the service protection can be activated or deactivated without
problems.


1.2.3 Maintenance Notification
New service menu available: 6 CONFIGURE > 7 Maint. notification

This service menu provides a feature to set a maintenance interval in terms of time and
cassette cycles. The user will be notified six weeks before.
The service menu allows to activate or de-activate the maintenance notification
mechanism and to define the Mean Cycle between Maintenance (MCBM) and the
Mean Time between Maintenance (MTBM).
For details refer to Chapter 3.2, Tools and auxiliary Means.
1.3 Changes in Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_3103B
1.3.1 Maintenance Indicator Messages
If the Maintenance Notification is enabled (refer to section 1.2.3), the customer will be
reminded daily or when starting the Digitizer when the following is applicable:
 This message appears 6 weeks before the defined maintenance due date or due
cycles are reached:
"Maintenance interval will expire within a short time.
Please contact service."
 This messages appears, when the maintenance due date or due cycles are
expired:
"Maintenance interval expired. Please contact service."


1.4 Solved Bugs with Software Version C25_3206
 New version (release 2011.02_Patch9) of the operating system “Portex” has

been introduced. Following items have been improved in this version:
o Support of the new c-Revive and S-Revive boards
o Support of a broader range of different USB flash drives
o Resolves a problem with cluster errors at floppy disk drives
The new operating system is automatically flashed to the CPU Board at the first
startup of the Digitizer after upload of the software.
 Solution for the complaint HQ_0902060003 (adapt description in the infocounter

file)
Reason: Previous information about target values, given in the infocounter, may
not be applicable for each PMT or optic module and caused unnecessary part
replacements.
Therefore the following text (indicated in bold) is removed in the infocounter file:
o “Photomultiplier Sensitivity Monitoring”
Target SAL: 1800+/- 100, target Peak-to-Peak: < 200
If frequently out of range, check image quality
o "Polygon Jitter Monitoring”
300 millipixels: ok
frequently > 300 millipixels: check image quality for jitter


2 Release Info for Digitizer Software C25_3103B

Digitizer SNs  Software is installed ex factory on:
CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 as of SN 7897
out of production.
download in the Agfa HealthCare Library:
CR 35-X > Software
CR 25.0 > Software
2.1 New Features of Digitizer Software C25_3103B since Software Version

C25_3103
2.2 Changes in Service and Customer Functionality since Software Version

C25_3103
2.3 Solved Bugs with Software Version C25_3103B
The maximum limit for the amplifier voltage of the photomultiplier was changed in the
software from 900 V to 1000 V.



Digitizer SNs  CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 as of SN 5582
out of production.
download under the following MedNet GSO Library path:
 <Computed Radiography => CR Digitizers =>
CR 35-X => Freeware>
CR 25.0 => Freeware>

C25_3102
 Software change to support new Hamamatsu photomultiplier.

 The software C25_3103 supports the use of the new Hamamatsu Photomultiplier
as well as the existing Photonis Photomultiplier.
3.2 Changes in Service and Customer Functionality since Software Version

C25_3102
Software was adapted in order to avoid issues during the sensitivity adjustment done
in the production line.



Digitizer SNs  CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 as of SN 4778
 CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 is already out of production.

C25_3007
 Automatic adjustment has been implemented to find the best position to pickup
the image plate out from the cassette.
 Error “Medium I/O Error” is now more detailed in case of Read/Write problems
of the storage medium.
 The code message “Code 20507” will not be displayed anymore, if the digitizer
is more than 24 hours in operation.
For more information refer to: DD+DIS052.09E, Service Bulletin No. 8 of CR 35-X
 More detailed error messages:
o Error message “20E0D” split up into messages: “20E0D", "20E2E" and
"20E2F”
o Error message “20E04” split up into messages: “20E0D", "20E30" and
"20E31”


4.2 Changes in Service Functionality since Software Version C25_3007
New adjustment cycle in the Service Menu:

<2 Maintenance  3 Test and Adjust Cycle>
4.3 Changes in Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_3007
 Due to tolerances the image plate in the cassette could not always be well
gathered by the suction cups. A new adjustment wizard for the positioning
of the suction cups will solve this issue.
 In the screen which is displayed after a shading calibration failed, was no option
to skip this menu. Now the <Cancel> bottom is available to skip this screen.


Type of new Software Software Release

Digitizer SNs  CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 as of SN 6500
 CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 as of SN 4000

C25_2007
 Support of the new revive-racks for CR 35-X with USB interface instead of
floppy disk drive.
 HQ_0511110001, Improved handling of RF-Tags: The software will not write
anymore data in protected sectors of the RF-Tag
 Software improvement for “High-Altitude Vacuum Pump” modules for
proper work.
 Setting for the mammography-option is no more changed when installing
a CPF-File (Customer Parameter File).
 Adaptation of the web interface: The correct device-type will be shown
from now on
 New screens of the shading calibration are translated in the different languages
(Version C25L2104 of the language floppy).
 New version of operating system “portex 2006.02”


5.2 Changes in Service Functionality since Software Version C25_2007
 Support of the new revive-racks for CR 35-X with USB interface instead of
floppy disk drive.
 Modified user interface (Service Menu):
o New version of language files
o Specific terms like “floppy” are replaced by e.g. “storage medium” or “data”.
 Modified calibration procedure:
o IP-Center and Shading calibration is also possible with cassettes exposed on
mammography X-ray modalities.
5.3 Changes in Customer Functionality since Software Version C25_2007
 Language file version check corrected.

 Modified user interface:
o New version of language files
o Specific terms like “floppy” are replaced by e.g. “storage medium” or “data”.
 Improved network connectivity: If the network connection is lost, the image

will be sent once the network is connected again.
 Improved detection of jitter in the info counter file: If the jitter is above the
threshold, the warning code 20C9B will be written to the info counter file.
 Improved error message for defect erasure lamps:
If all erasure lamps are blown, now the message appears:
"All ERASURE LAMPS BLOWN IP is not erased, Press v"
 If only a single erasure lamp is blown, new message appears:
"ERASURE LAMP x DEFECTIVE. Press v to complete, IP is not erased".
 System Check skips all light barrier connection tests, because the HW cannot
check the light barrier connection correctly if the 24 V power is missing.


Imaging Services Reference and Circuit Diagrams
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 100 / 105

This document contains:
 Reference diagrams for identification and location of assemblies inside the
machine including an alphanumeric reference list
 Block diagrams and overall diagrams
 Circuit diagrams of printed circuit boards, if necessary

Revision Date compared to previous Edition 2.0:
2.1 01-2013  Added information about c-Revive Board, S-Revive
Rack and S-Revive Board
Document Title
DD+DIS255.12E CR 35-X - Service Bulletin No. 17 - c-Revive Board and
S-Revive Board available as Spare Part


eq_04_diagrams_e_template_v02
DD+DIS219.06E Reference and Circuit Diagrams
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 1 CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 Chapter 4 / Page 2 of 37

Spare Parts List
Document No: DD+DIS268.08M

CR35-X
Type 5158/100
CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000)
Type 5156/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)
CR 35-X CR 25.0
Type 5158/100 Type 5156/100/105
Edition 2, Revision 4 Document Node ID: 12403365

11-2014 Printed in Germany spare_parts_e_template_v11
DD+DIS268.08M Spare Parts List
Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
Copyright © 2014 Agfa HealthCare N.V.

AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V., Belgium,
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper

operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of
compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or
www.agfa.com.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of a chapter of the Service Manuals refer to the
"List of Service Documents" in the Agfa HealthCare Library.

Edition 2, Revision 4 CR25.0 / CR35-X Chapter 5 / Page 2 of 72

11-2014 Type 5156/100/105, 5158/100 Agfa Company Confidential
Document History
Edition, Release Changes compared to previous Version 2.3
Revision Date
2.4 11-2014 Index of Spare Parts Numbers updated. Repaired Parts
(Prefix RF+) added.
DISCLAIMER:
Actual delivered spare parts may differ (in appearance) from the images shown and/or
ordered spare parts.
The codes of the ordered spare parts can vary from the code of the delivered spare parts.
Agfa HealthCare warrants that the delivered spare parts have at least the same functionalities.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to deliver compatible or alternative spare parts.
Prices may differ from the original order as these spare parts will be invoiced at current prices.
NOTE:
Repaired Spare Parts are indicated with Prefix RF+.
NOTE:
Recycling of the electronic and electrical waste equipment will ensure safety of the human
health and the environment.
For information about electronic and electrical waste equipment disposal, recovery and
collection points, please contact your local waste disposal service or the producer / distributor
of this equipment.
If your equipment contains removable batteries or accumulators please dispose of these
separately according to local regulations.
Contact
Spare Parts ordering Worldwide: spareparts@agfa.com
Spare Parts returns Worldwide: returnsspareparts@agfa.com


Contents




01
02* 03*
05
06*
04*
07*
5158_CHAP05_01_M.CDR
PANELING


Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Benennung
Item No. Part No. Description
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref. Denomination
1 CM+6060660 SCHNELLVERSCHLUSS
QUICK FASTENER
FERMETURE RAPIDE
2 CM+9515512704 * SEITENWAND LINKS
SIDE WALL, LHS
PAROI LATERALE A GAUCHE
3 CM+9515512501 * DECKEL
COVER
COUVERCLE
4 CM+9515612600 FRONTVERKLEIDUNG UNTEN
FRONT PANEL, BOTTOM - (TYPE 5156/100/105 ONLY)
PANNEAU AVANT, EN BAS
4 CM+9515812600 * FRONTVERKLEIDUNG UNTEN
FRONT PANEL, BOTTOM - (TYPE 5158/100 ONLY)
PANNEAU AVANT, EN BAS
5 CM+9515512631 FOLIENSCHARNIER
PLASTIC HINGE
CHARNIERE A MEMBRANE
6 CM+9515612100 * FRONTVERKLEIDUNG OBEN
FRONT PANEL, TOP
PANNEAU AVANT, EN HAUT
7 CM+9515512403 * SEITENWAND RECHTS
SIDE WALL, RHS
PAROI LATERALE A DROITE
= Assembly
* = Spare Part standardly is not kept in stock, extended delivery time is possible.
99 = Spare Part is not shown in Exploded Views.
PANELING


01*
02*
D3188
05
04*
D3188
D3188
03
FRONT PANELING, TOP


1 CM+9515612100 * FRONTVERKLEIDUNG OBEN
FRONT PANEL, TOP
PANNEAU AVANT, EN HAUT
2 CM+9515551500 * KLAPPE MONTIERT
FLAP INSTALLED
VOLET INSTALLER
3 CM+9515551480 ZUGFEDER
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
4 CM+9515551901 * VERRIEGELUNG MONTIERT
LOCK INSTALLED
VERROUILLAGE INSTALLER
5 CM+9515512171 SCHAUMSTOFFSTREIFEN
FOAM PLASTIC STRIPE
BANDES EN MOUSSE
= Assembly
FRONT PANELING, TOP


01
(GS 114)
02 11
03
12
11
04
(S101)
10
(GS 116) 05
D969 (M501)
D333
09
13 D2222
D21
D85
06
D372
07
08 D86
(M 101)
D2771
5158_CHAP05_03_M.cdr
FRAME


1 CM+9949960202 GS 8FACH IO-VERTEILER (GS114)
GS 8-FOLD IO DISTRIBUTOR (GS114)
DISTRIBUTION OCTUPLE I / O (GS114)
2 CM+9515546280 KABEL FL/RD 26POL (GS114/BU2 - BU351)
CABLE, FLAT AND ROUND 26POLE (GS114/BU2 - BU351)
CABLE PLAT ET CYLINDRIQUE (GS114/BU2 - BU351)
3 CM+9514616650 ETHERNET KABEL MIT STECKER
ETHERNET CABLE WITH CONNECTOR
CABLE ETHERNET AVEC CONNECTEUR
4 CM+9042663040 TÜR, DECKELSCHALTER (S101)
SAFETY SWITCH (S101)
PORTE, INTERRUPTEUR DE COUVERCLE (S101)
5 CM+9514636200 LÜFTER 24V VERDRAHTET (M501)
FAN 24V (M501)
VENTILATEUR 24V (M501)
6 CM+9037095110 RAD 65X12,1 (1 STCK.)
WHEEL 65X12,1 (1 PIECE)
ROUE 65X12,1 (1 PIÈCE)
7 CM+9037095090 LENKROLLEN (1 STCK.)
GUIDE ROLLER (1 PIECE)
ROUE GUIDE (1 PIÈCE)
8 CM+9515546600 LÜFTER 24V LE VERDR (M101)
FAN 24V LE (M101)
VENTILATEUR 24V LE (M101)
9 CM+9515516201 DISPLAY
DISPLAY
AFFICHEUR
9 RF+9515516201 DISPLAY
DISPLAY
AFFICHEUR
10 CM+9515548200 GS STATUS EMERGENCY NODE (GS116)
PCB STATUS EMERGENCY NODE (GS116)
CI ETAT NOEUD URGENCE (GS116)
11 CM+9047910140 ABSTANDSHALTER (10 STCK.)
SPACER (10 PIECES)
ECARTEUR (10 PIÈCES)
12 CM+9515646001 KABELBAUM GESTELL CR25.0
CABLE HARNESS FRAME CR25.0 - (TYPE 5156/100/105 ONLY)
FAISCEAU DE CABLE CHASSIS CR25.0
12 CM+9515846001 * KABELBAUM GESTELL CR35-X
CABLE HARNESS FRAME CR35-X - (TYPE 5158/100 ONLY)
FAISCEAU DE CABLE CHASSIS CR35-X
13 CM+6071300 CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - LOCAL DISPLAY
CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - LOCAL DISPLAY
= Assembly
FRAME


08
01
09*
02
03
(GS714)
04
(M704)
05 (GS718) 07
06
(GS728)
05
12
11
10 (M701)
CASSETTE UNIT PART 1


1 CM+9515550800 WINKEL
BRACKET
EQUERRE
2 CM+9038960000 ZAHNRIEMEN
TOOTHED BELT
COURROIE CRANTEE
3 CM+9515552400 KASSETTENHEBER
CASSETTE LIFT
ELEVATEUR DE CASSETTE
4 CM+9515552311 LEISTE
BAR
REGLETTE
5 CM+9514590100 LICHTSCHRANKE (GS718, GS728)
LIGHT BARRIER (GS718, GS728)
BARRIERE LUMINEUSE (GS718, GS728)
6 CM+9988905600 KABEL FL 4POL (GS710/ST2 - GS718/ST1)
FLAT CABLE 4POL (GS710/ST2 - GS718/ST1)
CABLE PLAT 4POL (GS710/ST2 - GS718/ST1)
7 CM+9037110110 KUGELBÜCHSE - 16X26X36
SPHERICAL LINER - 16X26X36
DOUILLE SPHERIQUE - 16X26X36
TOOTHED BELT
COURROIE CRANTEE
9 CM+9515550900 * RIEMENUMLENKUNG
CROSSOVER BELT
COUDAGE DE LA COURROIE
10 CM+9514551351 RÖLLCHENMOTOR (M701)
ROLLER MOTOR (M701)
MOTEUR DES GALETS (M701)
11 CM+9514591001 RÖLLCHEN
ROLLER
ROULEAU
= Assembly




1 CM+9515690501 ÖFFNER
OPENER
LOUP
2 CM+9515550424 FOLIENAUSRICHTUNG LINKS
FOIL ALIGNMENT, LHS
ALIGNEMENT A GAUCHE
3 CM+9515645181 KABEL FL CASSETTENANSCHL. 950MM (GS720/ST1 - GS710/ST8)
FLAT CABLE CASSETTE STOP 950MM (GS720/ST1 - GS710/ST8)
CABLE PLAT BUTEE CASSETTE 950MM (GS720/ST1 - GS710/ST8)
4 CM+9514659110 LICHTSCHRANKENFAHNE
LIGHT BARRIER LUG
CAVALIER DE PHOTO CELLULE
5 CM+9515670000 KASSETTENEINZUG ANSCHLAG LINKS (GS720)
CASSETTE FEED STOP, LHS (GS720)
INTRODUCTION DES CASSETTE A GAUCHE (GS720)
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
7 CM+9515550251 LICHTSCHRANKENHALTER
LIGHT SENSOR HOLDER
SUPPORT BARRIERE LUMINEUSE
8 CM+9515590100 LICHTSCHRANKE (GS730)
LIGHT BARRIER (GS730)
BARRIERE LUMINEUSE (GS730)
= Assembly


01
02 (GS736)
15
03 05
(GS738) (M702)
14 04
06
10
07 08
(GS716)
02
09
13
11
12
(GS726)


1 CM+9515590301 ANTENNENMECHANIK
ANTENNA MECHANISM
MACANISM DE L'ANTENNE
2 CM+9515552701 READER MIT ANTENNE (GS736, GS738)
READER WITH ANTENNA (GS736, GS738)
SUPPORT AVEC ANTENNE (GS736, GS738)
2 RF+9515552701 READER MIT ANTENNE (GS736, GS738)
READER WITH ANTENNA (GS736, GS738)
SUPPORT AVEC ANTENNE (GS736, GS738)
3 CM+9515645061 KABEL 20AWG28 TAGREADER
CABLE, 20AWG28 TAGREADER
CABLE, 20AWG28 TAGREADER
4 CM+9515551200 MOTORWINKEL
MOTOR BRACKET
EQUERRE DU MOTEUR
5 CM+9514575501 SCHRITTMOTOR VOLLSTÄNDIG (M702)
STEPPER MOTOR COMPLETE (M702)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPLET (M702)
6 CM+9038961230 ZAHNRIEMEN, DIN7721-6T5X245
TOOTHED BELT, DIN7721-6T5X245
COURROIE CRANTEE, DIN7721-6T5X245
7 CM+9038960010 ZAHNRIEMEN, DIN7721-6T5X185
TOOTHED BELT, DIN7721-6T5X185
COURROIE CRANTEE, DIN7721-6T5X185
9 CM+9988905850 KABEL FL 4POL
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
10 CM+9510055030 SCHENKELFEDER
LEG SPRING
RESSORT A BRANCHES
11 CM+9515555800 SCHWENKPLATTE
SWIVEL PLATE
PLAQUE PIVOTANTE
12 CM+9515590401 GS LICHTSCHRANKE (GS726)
LIGHT BARRIER BOARD (GS726)
CI BARRIERE PHOTOELECTRIQUE (GS726)
14 CM+9515545080 KABEL 6POL (GS736/BU1 - GS738/BU1)
CABLE 6POL (GS736/BU1 - GS738/BU1)
CABLE 6POL (GS736/BU1 - GS738/BU1)
15 CM+6071270 CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - RF-TAG READER
CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - RF-TAG READER
= Assembly


01
(M705)
03 (GS724)
04
05
02
17
(M703)
15 14*
16
(GS734) 07
08 (GS722)
09
13 12
06
11
(M706) (GS732)
10


1 CM+9515650003 KASSETTENEINHEIT
CASSETTE UNIT
UNITE CASSETTES
1 RF+9515650003 KASSETTENEINHEIT
CASSETTE UNIT
UNITE CASSETTES
2 CM+9515653701 UMLENKEINHEIT
GUIDE UNIT
UNITÉ DE RENVOI
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
6 CM+9515591201 LICHTSCHRANKENHALTER
LIGHT SENSOR HOLDER
SUPPORT BARRIERE LUMINEUS
9 CM+9515545100 KABEL FL 6/4/4POL (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
FLAT CABLE 6/4/4PIN (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
CABLE PLAT 6/4/4POLAIRE (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
10 CM+9515690201 SPINDELANTRIEB MIT MOTOR
SPINDLE DRIVE WITH MOTOR
COMMANDE VIS SANS FIN AVEC MOTEUR
STEPPER MOTOR COMPLETE (M706)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPLET (M706)
TOOTHED BELT
COURROIE CRANTEE
13 CM+9515650300 HALTERUNG SPINDEL
HOLDER
FIXATION
14 CM+9514551651 * ACHSE
SHAFT
AXE
TOOTHED BELT
COURROIE CRANTEE
16 CM+9514651450 MOTORWINKEL MONTIERT
MOTOR BRACKET ASSEMBLED
EQUERRE DU MOTEUR ASSEMBLE
STEPPER MOTOR ASSY (M703)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS COMPL. (M703)
= Assembly




1 CM+9949981407 GS IOB-SIN-STEP (GS712)
MOTOR CONTROLLER PCB (GS712)
CI IOB-SIN-STEP (GS712)
2 CM+9515545042 KABEL BUS 26POL (GS710/ST3 - GS712/BU1)
BUS CABLE 26POL (GS710/ST3 - GS712/BU1)
CABLE BUS 26POL (GS710/ST3 - GS712/BU1)
7 CM+9515545100 KABEL FL 6/4/4POL (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
FLAT CABLE 6/4/4PIN (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
CABLE PLAT 6/4/4POLAIRE (GS732/GS734/ST1 - GS710/ST51)
10 CM+9949981301 GS IOB-SIN-5STEP - (GS710)
5 FOLD MOTOR CONTROLLER PCB
CI IOB-SIN-5STEP
10 RF+9949981301 GS IOB-SIN-5STEP
5 FOLD MOTOR CONTROLLER PCB
CI IOB-SIN-5STEP
= Assembly


01
02 03
D631
04
14 05 (M 601)
06
D38
16 05
13
05
12
D40
15 06
11
(GS 602)
09 07
10
D631
12
08
(GS 604)
D4340
TRANSPORT UNIT


1 CM+9515560003 TRANSPORTEINHEIT
TRANSPORT UNIT
UNITE'DE TRANSPORT
1 RF+9515560003 TRANSPORTEINHEIT
TRANSPORT UNIT
UNITE'DE TRANSPORT
2 CM+9515561155 LEITBLECH
GUIDE PLATE
TOLE DE GUIDAGE
3 CM+9515561101 LEITBLECH HINTEN
GUIDE PLATE, BACK
TOLE DE GUIDAGE ARRIERE
4 CM+9515560901 SCHRITTMOTOR (M601)
STEPPER MOTOR (M601)
MOTEUR PAS A PAS (M601)
5 CM+9037170040 ROHRSCHELLE
PIPE CLAMP
AGRAFE
6 CM+9515542120 KABEL 8POL (BU122 - ST123)
CABLE 8POL (BU122 - ST123)
CABLE 8POL (BU122 - ST123)
7 CM+6060670 SCHNELLVERSCHLUSS
QUICK FASTENER
FERMETURE RAPIDE
PIPE CLAMP
AGRAFE
10 CM+9515542141 KABEL 4POL (GS602/ST4 - ST123)
CABLE 4POL (GS602/ST4 - ST123)
CABLE 4POL (GS602/ST4 - ST123)
11 CM+9515881500 SCHRITTMOTORKARTE (GS602)
MOTOR CONTROLLER PCB (GS602)
CI IOB-SIN-STEP (GS602)
13 CM+9047913100 ABSTANDSHALTER
SPACER
ECARTEUR
14 CM+9515542102 KABEL BUS FL 26AWG28 (GS602/ST1 - ST22(L))
FLAT CABLE 26AWG28 (GS602/ST1 - ST22(L))
CABLE PLAT 26AWG28 (GS602/ST1 - ST22(L))
15 CM+9515590700 ZAHNRIEMENRAD
TOOTHED BELT WHEEL
POULIE A COURROIE CRANTEE
16 CM+9038961030 ZAHNRIEMEN, DIN 7721-10T2,5X145
TOOTHED BELT, DIN 7721-10T2,5X145
COURROIE CRANTEE, DIN 7721-10T2,5X145
= Assembly
TRANSPORT UNIT


01
02
02
X
X
06 05
(L=90mm)
06
(L=27mm)
08
03 06
(L=100mm)
02
06
(L=27mm)
Detail X 06
07 (L=65mm)
04 ONLY FOR DEVICES WHICH ARE LOCATED

HIGHER THAN 2000M ABOVE SEE LEVEL
(SEE SB DD+DIS276.07E)
TRANSPORT UNIT


1 CM+9515560003 TRANSPORTEINHEIT
TRANSPORT UNIT
UNITE'DE TRANSPORT
1 RF+9515560003 TRANSPORTEINHEIT
TRANSPORT UNIT
UNITE'DE TRANSPORT
2 CM+9515592402 SAUGER KOMPLETT
SUCTION CUP COMPLETE
VENTOUSE COMPLET
3 CM+9515561304 PUMPENWINKEL
PUMP BRACKET
EQUERRE DE POMPE
4 CM+9515861301 PUMPENWINKEL (HI), VOLLSTÄNDIG ONLY FOR DEVICES WHICH ARE LOCATED
PUMP BRACKET (HI) COMPLETE HIGHER THAN 2000M ABOVE SEE LEVEL
EQUERRE DE POMPE (HI) COMPLET (SEE SB DD+DIS276.07E)
PIPE CLAMP
AGRAFE
6 CM+0000064155 SILIKONSCHLAUCH (INNENDURCHMESSER 3MM)
SILICON TUBE (INNER DIAMETER 3MM)
TUYAU SLICONE (DIAMÈTRE INTÉRIEUR 3MM)
7 CM+9515561480 DÜSE
NOZZLE
BUSE
8 CM+9036260940 FILTER MIT MIKROSIEB
FILTER WITH MICRO INSERT
FILTRE A MICRO-ORIFICES
= Assembly
TRANSPORT UNIT


01*
D221
02
03
D353
D81
D2756
08
04
07
06
05
09
ERASURE UNIT


1 CM+9515635002 * LÖSCHEINHEIT
ERASURE UNIT
UNITE D'EFFACEMENT
2 CM+9515635431 ARRETIERBLECH
RETAINING PLATE
PLAQUE DE RETENUE
3 CM+9515635600 HALTER, LAMPEN KOMPLETT
LAMP HOLDER COMPLETE
SUPPORT LAMPES COMPLET
4 CM+9514535440 KG2-FILTER
FILTER
FILTRE
5 CM+9515635851 FASSUNGSLEISTE VERKABELT
SOCKET BAR WITH CABLE
BARRETTE AVEC CABLE
6 CM+9045065740 FASSUNG 6,35 24V
SOCKET 6,35 24V
SOCLE 6,35 24V
7 CM+9045065530 HALOGENLAMPE, 12V 100W
HALOGEN LAMP, 12V 100W
LAMPE HALOGEN, 12V 100W
8 CM+9515535650 DISTANZLEISTE
SPACER RAIL
LITEAU D’ECARTEMENT
9 CM+6071310 KABELBAUM LÖSCHEINHEIT
CABLE HARNESS ERASURE UNIT
HARNAIS DE CABLE UNITE D'EFFACEMENT
= Assembly
ERASURE UNIT


SCAN UNIT PART 1


11-2014 Type 5156/105, 5158/100 Agfa Company Confidential
CR35-X
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref. Denomination Type 5158/100
CR25.0
1 CM+9515524451 BOWDENZUG Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
BOWDEN CABLE TRACTION
CABLE SOUS-GAINE
2 CM+9515824251 BÜRSTENHALTEBLECH KOMPLETT
BRUSH STRIP COMPLETE
BAGUETTE A BROSSES COMPLET
3 CM+9515526502 ANDRUCKWELLE
PRESSURE SHAFT
ARBRE DE PRESSION
4 CM+9515821000 SCAN-EINHEIT VOLLST.
SCAN UNIT COMPLETE
UNITE SCANNER COMPLETE
5 CM+9514830800 PMT DETECTOR MIT LICHTSAMMLER
PMT WITH LIGHT COLLECTOR
DETECTEUR PMT
6 CM+6071260 CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - PMT
CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - PMT
7 CM+9514827003 OPTIKBAUGRUPPE
OPTICS MODULE
ENSEMBLE OPTIQUE
8 CM+6071250 CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - OPTICS MODULE
CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - OPTICS MODULE
9 CM+6071240 CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - POLYGON
CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - POLYGON
= Assembly
SCAN UNIT PART 1


(GS 442)
02
(GS 444)
01
03
04
D707 05
CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000) 5158_chap05_13.CDR
SCAN UNIT PART 1


11-2014 Type 5156/100 Agfa Company Confidential
Item No. Part No. Description CR25.0
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref. Denomination Type 5156/100 (up to < SN 6000)
1 CM+9515621000 SCAN-EINHEIT VOLLST.
SCAN UNIT COMPLETE
UNITE SCANNER COMPLETE
2 CM+9515591402 IR 2-FACH LICHTSCHRANKENSATZ
IR 2-WAY LIGHT BARRIER SET
JEU PHOTOCELLULE DOUBLE IR
3 CM+9515691300 ABLAGEBLECH OHNE LICHTSCHRANKEN
TRAY WITHOUT LIGHT BARRIER
RECEPTACLE SANS PHOTOCELL
4 CM+9515526502 ANDRUCKWELLE
PRESSURE SHAFT
ARBRE DE PRESSION
5 CM+9515621060 FEDERBLECH
SPRING METAL SHEET
TOLE ELASTIQUE A RESSORT
= Assembly
SCAN UNIT PART 1


08 01
(GS 410) 02
07
03
04 (M 401)
08
(GS 412)
02
05
06
CR35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR25.0
Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000) 5158_CHAP05_14_M.CDR
SCAN UNIT PART 2


CR35-X
Type 5158/100 (as of SN 4000)
CR25.0
1 CM+9988905200 KABEL FL 4POL (GS440/BU1 - GS442/BU1) Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6500)
FLAT CABLE 4POL (GS440/BU1 - GS442/BU1)
CABLE PLAT 4POL (GS440/BU1 - GS442/BU1)
2 CM+9514526680 BUCHSE
BUSHING
DOUILLE
3 CM+9515526701 ANTRIEBSWELLE
DRIVE SHAFT
ARBRE D'ENTRAINEMENT
4 CM+9515526801 ABHEBEMOTOR KOMPLETT (M401)
LIFT MOTOR COMPLETE (M401)
MOTEUR DE LEVAGE COMPLET (M401)
5 CM+9515526600 SCHNECKENLAGER VOLLSTÄNDIG
WORM SHAFT BEARING COMPLETE
PALIER CONIQUE COMPLET
6 CM+9961124560 ZAHNRIEMEN 6T2.5X177.5
TOOTHED BELT 6T2.5X177.5
COURROIE CRANTEE 6T2.5X177.5
7 CM+9515544362 KABEL BUS 26POL OPTIK (GS410/BU1 - GS412/BU1)
BUS CABLE 26POL OPTIC (GS410/BU1 - GS412/BU1)
CABLE BUS 26POL OPTIQUE (GS410/BU1 - GS412/BU1)
8 CM+9515521251 SM-KARTE (GS410, GS412)
STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL BOARD (GS410, GS412)
CARTE MOTEUR PAS A PAS (GS410, GS412)
= Assembly
SCAN UNIT PART 2


10 01
(GS 450)
02
08
(GS 410) 03
09
08
(GS 412)
04
05
(M 401)
03
07
06
CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000) 5158_chap05_15_M.CDR
SCAN UNIT PART 2


CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to < SN 6000)
1 CM+9514622504 PMT-MODUL (GS450)

PMT MODULE (GS450)
MODULE PMT (GS450)
1 CM+9514622550 PMT-MODUL - ANTI-REFLEX (GS450)
PMT MODULE - ANTI-REFLEX (GS450)
MODULE PMT - ANTI-REFLEX (GS450)
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
3 CM+9514526680 BUCHSE
BUSHING
DOUILLE
4 CM+9515526701 ANTRIEBSWELLE
DRIVE SHAFT
ARBRE D'ENTRAINEMENT
5 CM+9515526801 ABHEBEMOTOR KOMPLETT (M401)
LIFT MOTOR COMPLETE (M401)
MOTEUR DE LEVAGE COMPLET (M401)
6 CM+9515526600 SCHNECKENLAGER VOLLSTÄNDIG
WORM SHAFT BEARING COMPLETE
PALIER CONIQUE COMPLET
7 CM+9961124560 ZAHNRIEMEN 6T2.5X177.5
TOOTHED BELT 6T2.5X177.5
COURROIE CRANTEE 6T2.5X177.5
8 CM+9515521251 SM-KARTE (GS410, GS412)
STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL BOARD (GS410, GS412)
CARTE MOTEUR PAS A PAS (GS410, GS412)
9 CM+9515544362 KABEL BUS 26POL OPTIK
BUS CABLE 26POL OPTIC
CABLE BUS 26POL OPTIQUE
10 CM+9514827003 OPTIKBAUGRUPPE
OPTICS MODULE
ENSEMBLE OPTIQUE
= Assembly
SCAN UNIT PART 2


01
(M402)
02
03
05 04 (GS444)
(GS 448)
06
07
(GS440) 08
CR35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR25.0
Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000) 5158_CHAP05_16_M.CDR
SCAN UNIT PART 3


Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Benennung CR35-X
Type 5158/100
CR25.0
1 CM+9514625100 SCHRITTMOTOR (M402) Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6000)
2 CM+9514525900 KUPPLUNG VOLLSTÄNDIG
CLUTCH COMPLETE
ACCOUPLEMENT COMPLET
3 CM+9514526190 FÜHRUNG
GUIDE
GUIDE
4 CM+9988905800 KABEL FL 4POL (GS410/BU2 - GS448/BU1)
FLAT CABLE 4POL (GS410/BU2 - GS448/BU1)
CABLE PLAT 4POL (GS410/BU2 - GS448/BU1)
5 CM+9949965402 GS LS-STATISCH (GS448)
LIGHT SENSOR BOARD-STATIC (GS448)
CARTE PHOTOCELLULE STATIQ (GS448)
6 CM+9515590902 PIN-DIODEN
PIN DIODES
PLOTS DIODES
7 CM+9515544341 KABEL FL 12/4/4/4POL (GS410/ST3 - GS412/ST3)
FLAT CABLE 12/4/4/4POL (GS410/ST3 - GS412/ST3)
CABLE PLAT 12/4/4/4POL (GS410/ST3 - GS412/ST3)
8 CM+9515544321 KABEL FL 10/8/4POL (GS440/BU3 - GS444/BU1 - GS446/BU1)
FLAT CABLE 10/8/4POL (GS440/BU3 - GS444/BU1 - GS446/BU1)
CABLE PLAT 10/8/4POL (GS440/BU3 - GS444/BU1 - GS446/BU1)
= Assembly
SCAN UNIT PART 3


01
(M402)
02
03
09
05 04 (GS 446)
(GS 448)
06
07
(GS 440) 08
CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000) 5158_chap05_17_M.CDR
SCAN UNIT PART 3


CR25.0
Type 5156/100 (up to < SN 6000)
1 CM+9514625100 SCHRITTMOTOR (M402)

2 CM+9514525900 KUPPLUNG VOLLSTÄNDIG
CLUTCH COMPLETE
ACCOUPLEMENT COMPLET
3 CM+9514526190 FÜHRUNG
GUIDE
GUIDE
FLAT CABLE 4POL
CABLE PLAT 4POL
5 CM+9949965402 GS LS-STATISCH (GS448)
LIGHT SENSOR BOARD-STATIC (GS448)
CARTE PHOTOCELLULE STATIQ (GS448)
6 CM+9515590902 PIN-DIODEN
PIN DIODES
PLOTS DIODES
7 CM+9515544341 KABEL FL 12/4/4/4POL
FLAT CABLE 12/4/4/4POL
CABLE PLAT 12/4/4/4POL
8 CM+9515544321 KABEL FL 10/8/4POL
FLAT CABLE 10/8/4POL
CABLE PLAT 10/8/4POL
9 CM+9515524451 BOWDENZUG
BOWDEN CABLE TRACTION
CABLE SOUS-GAINE
= Assembly
SCAN UNIT PART 3


CPCI-RACK


Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Benennung CR35-X
Type 5158/100 (up to SN < 4000)
CR25.0
1 CM+9514614250 LÜFTER VERDR. PCI-RACK 250MM (M300) Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000)
FAN WIRED, PCI-RACK 250MM (M300)
VENTILATEUR CABLE, PCI-RACK 250MM (M300)
Type 5156/105 (up to SN < 6500)
2 CM+9514614402 EINSCHUB STORAGE KOMPLETT (GS302, GS304)
PLUG-IN MODULE STORAGE COMPLETE (GS302, GS304)
TIROIR STORAGE COMPLET (GS302, GS304)
3 CM+9048613651 DISKETTENLAUFWERK 3,5"
FLOPPY-DISK-DRIVE 3,5"
LECTEUR 3,5"
4 CM+9048613540 SCSI FESTPLATTE
SCSI HARDDISK
SCSI DISQUE DUR
5 CM+9048613570 SCSI ULTRA 3 TERMINATOR
SCSI ULTRA 3 TERMINATOR
SCSI ULTRA 3 TERMINATOR
6 CM+9514818501 REVIVE POWER SUPPLY (GS306)
REVIVE POWER SUPPLY (GS306)
REVIVE POWER SUPPLY (GS306)
7 CM+9515516352 VME GLEITBAHN GENIETET
VME SLIDE TRACK
RAIL GLISSANT VME
8 CM+9515546700 KABEL NETZ-VME
POWER CABLE
CORDON D’ALIMENTATION
9 CM+9514614653 EINSCHUB IO-MASTER (GS310)
PLUG-IN MODULE IO-MASTER (GS310)
TIROIR IO-MASTER (GS310)
10 CM+9514615014 OBERON 3 PCB (GS312)
OBERON 3 PCB (GS312)
OBERON 3 PCB (GS312)
11 CM+9048613420 CPCI BACKPLANE 3 SLOT (GS300)
CPCI BACKPLANE 3 SLOT (GS300)
CPCI BACKPLANE 3 SLOT (GS300)
12 CM+6062840 C REVIVE EINSCHUB KOMPLETT
C REVIVE PLUG IN COMPLETE
TIROIR C REVIVE COMPLET
13 CM+6062850 SATA HARD DISK
SATA HARD DISK
SATA HARD DISK
19 CM+6071330 CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - NETWORK PORT
CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - NETWORK PORT
= Assembly
CPCI-RACK


CPCI-RACK


CR35-X
Type 5158/100 (up to SN < 4000)
CR25.0
20 CM+9515888103 MEMORY STICK WITH SW C25_3206 Type 5156/100 (up to SN < 6000)
MEMORY STICK WITH SW C25_3206
Type 5156/105 (up to SN < 6500)
= Assembly
CPCI-RACK


REVIVE RACK


CR35-X
Type 5158/100 (as of SN 4000)
CR25.0
1 CM+9515817100 REVIVE-RACK OHNE BOARD Type 5156/105 (as of SN 6500)
REVIVE-RACK WITHOUT PCB
REVIVE-RACK SANS CIRCUIT IMPRIMÉ
2 CM+9514817600 LUEFTER MIT WINKEL (M300)
FAN BRACKET (M300)
VENTILATEUR (M300)
3 CM+9514818501 REVIVE POWER SUPPLY
REVIVE POWER SUPPLY
REVIVE POWER SUPPLY
4 CM+9514818002 S-REVIVE BOARD
S-REVIVE PCB
CIRCUIT IMPRIMÉ S-REVIVE
5 CM+9048614280 IDE HARD DISK
IDE HARD DISK
IDE HARD DISK
6 CM+6062850 SATA HARD DISK
SATA HARD DISK
SATA HARD DISK
7 CM+9514814900 CABLE SET IDE HARD DISK
CABLE SET IDE HARD DISK
CABLE SET IDE HARD DISK
8 CM+9515888103 MEMORY STICK WITH SW C25_3206
10 CM+6071330 CABLE IO-MASTER PCB - NETWORK PORT
15 CM+9514814500 REVIVE RUECKWAND
REVIVE BACKPLANE
PLAQUE ARRIÈRE REVIVE
= Assembly
REVIVE RACK


01
10
02
09 (GS210)
11
(GS220)
03
12
(TR206) 10 04
13 (S203)
(SI1-SI4) 17
15
16
(GS230)
D707
D2182 14
D5681 (SI5)
08 D707
(SI201) 07
(SI202)
D707 D707
D3227
06 05
(S201) (S202)
5158_CHAP05_20_M.cdr
POWER UNIT


1 CM+9515864000 LEISTUNGSEINHEIT
POWER UNIT
BLOC DE PUISSANCE
1 RF+9515864000 LEISTUNGSEINHEIT
POWER UNIT
BLOC DE PUISSANCE
2 CM+9515591106 GS SWITCH-ERASURE UNIT (GS210)
PCB SWITCH-ERASURE UNIT (GS210)
CI COMMUTATION UNIT D'EFFACEMENT (GS210)
3 CM+9043660590 NETZFILTER 250V/16A
MAINS FILTER 250V/16A
FILTRE RÉSEAU 250V/16A
4 CM+9515541300 KB WAHLSCHALTER (S203)
SELECTOR SWITCH (S203)
SELECTEUR (ELECTRIQUE) (S203)
5 CM+9042663040 TÜR, DECKELSCHALTER (S202)
SAFETY SWITCH (S202)
PORTE, INTERRUPTEUR DE COUVERCLE (S202)
6 CM+9045231730 ÜBERSTROMSCHUTZSCHALTER 14A (S201)
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION 14A (S201)
DISJONCTEUR DE SURCHARGE 14A (S201)
7 CM+9515691000 NETZTEIL 90-264V/24V-1A
POWER SUPPLY, 90-264V/24V-1A
BLOC SECTEUR, 90-264V/24V-1A
8 CM+9045196090 SICHERUNG T 2A (SI201, SI202)
FUSE SLOW-BLOW T 2A (SI201, SI202)
INERTIE FUSIBLE T 2A (SI201, SI202)
9 CM+9515664800 TRAFOWINKEL
TRANSFORMER BRACKET
EQUERRE POUR TRANSFORMATEUR
11 CM+9515564401 GS CURRENT-SENSE (GS220)
PCB CURRENT-SENSE (GS220)
CI CONTROLE COURANT (GS220)
12 CM+9515664050 TRANSFORMATOR XBF (TR206)
TRANSFORMER (TR206)
TRANSFORMATEUR (TR206)
13 CM+9045196040 SICHERUNG T 2,5A (SI1-SI4)
FUSE T 2,5A (SI1-SI4)
FUSIBLE T 2,5A (SI1-SI4)
14 CM+9045197050 SICHERUNG T 6,25A (SI5)
FUSE T 6,25A (SI5)
FUSIBLE T 6,25A (SI5)
15 CM+9047910160 ABSTANDSHALTER
SPACER
ECARTEUR
16 CM+9515664503 GS POWER INTEGRATION BOARD (GS230)
PCB POWER INTEGRATION BOARD (GS230)
CI CARTE INTEGRATION PUIS (GS230)
17 CM+9515541900 KABEL BUS 26POL (GS210/ST1 - ST310)
BUS CABLE 26POL (GS210/ST1 - ST310)
CABLE BUS 26POL (GS210/ST1 - ST310)
= Assembly
POWER UNIT


MODIFICATION KITS, ACCESSORIES


1 CM+9515510152 CU-FILTER VERPACKT
CU FILTER PACKED
FILTER CU EMBALLE
2 CM+9514810900 ALU FILTER VERPACKT
ALUMINIUN FILTER PACKED
ALUMINIUN FILTER PACKED
3 CM+9515885101 REPARATUR - SORTIMENT
REPAIR - KIT
REPAIR - KIT
4 CM+9515885200 LOKALES - SORTIMENT
LOCAL - KIT
LOCAL - KIT
5 CM+9515885301 WARTUNGS - SORTIMENT
MAINTENANCE - KIT
MAINTENANCE - KIT
99 CM+9515595002 MOBILEKIT
MOBILE KIT
KIT MOBILE
= Assembly
MODIFICATION KITS, ACCESSORIES


CASSETTE CR MD4.0 HR / SR 35X35 CM


11-2014 TYPE 8304/780 Agfa Company Confidential
1 10+9999912900 CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET SR 35X35 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET SR 35X35 CM
2 10+9999912910 CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET HR 35X35 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET HR 35X35 CM
3 CM+6045910 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE SR 35X35 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE SR 35X35 CM
4 CM+6045920 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR 35X35 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR 35X35 CM
5 CM+9999911460 CR MD4.0 GENERAL PLATE 35X35 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL PLATE 35X35 CM
6 CM+9830461304 CHIPKARTENHALTER, KOMPL.
CHIP CARD HOLDER, COMPLETE
PORTE CARTE PUCE, COMPLET
7 CM+9830461600 * DECKEL GESCHW.
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
8 CM+9830460300 * BODEN VOLLSTÄNDIG
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
9 CM+9830030702 RIEGEL RECHTS VOLLSTÄNDIG
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
VERROU A DROITE COMPLET
10 CM+9830030802 RIEGEL LINKS VOLLSTÄNDIG
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
VERROU A GAUCHE COMPLET
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
12 CM+9830010340 UMLENKTEIL
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
13 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
14 CM+9830010440 SCHRAUBE
SCREW
VIS
15 CM+9830430110 SCHARNIER
HINGE
CHARNIERE
16 CM+9830010552 ABWEISER BESCHICHTET
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
17 CM+9830010381 BLATTFEDER RECHTS
LEAF SPRING RHS
RESSORT A BRANCHES A DROITE
18 CM+9830010391 BLATTFEDER LINKS
LEAF SPRING LHS
RESSORT A BRANCHES A GAUCHE
19 CM+9830011310 ALULABEL (FILMERKENNUNG)
ALU LABLE (FILM DETECTION)
ETIQUETTE ALU (DETECTION DE FILM)
= Assembly


02
03 01
04
05*
14
06*
13
15
17 07
16
12
09
10
11
11
08 10
09
5158_chap05_51_m.CDR
CASSETTE CR MD4.0 HR 24X30 CM


2 10+9999911940 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR 24X30 CM
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
11 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
SCREW
VIS
HINGE
CHARNIERE
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
LEAF SPRING RHS
LEAF SPRING LHS
= Assembly


02
03 01
04
05*
14
06*
13
15
17 07
16
12
09
10
11
11
08 10
09


2 10+9999911950 CR MD4.0 GENERAL HR CASSETTE 18X24 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL HR CASSETTE 18X24 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL HR CASSETTE 18X24 CM
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
11 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
SCREW
VIS
HINGE
CHARNIERE
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
LEAF SPRING RHS
LEAF SPRING LHS
= Assembly


CASSETTE CR MD4.0 HR 10"X12"


1 10+9999912940 CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET HR 10X12"
CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET HR 10X12"
2 CM+6045950 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR 10X12"
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR 10X12"
3 CM+9999911470 CR MD4.0 GENERAL PLATE 10X12"
CR MD4.0 GENERAL PLATE 10X12"
5 CM+9830861600 * DECKEL GESCHWEISST
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
11 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
SCREW
VIS
HINGE
CHARNIERE
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
LEAF SPRING RHS
LEAF SPRING LHS
= Assembly


02
03 01
04
05*
14
06*
13
15
17 07
16
12
09
10
11
11
08 10
09


1 10+9999912810 CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET HR 8X10"
2 10+9999912780 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR 8X10"
3 CM+9999911480 CR MD4.0 GENERAL PLATE 8X10"
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
11 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
SCREW
VIS
HINGE
CHARNIERE
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
LEAF SPRING RHS
LEAF SPRING LHS
= Assembly


02
03 01
04
05*
14
06*
13
15
17 07
16
12
09
10
11
11
08 10
09


3 10+9999912790 CR MD4.0 GENERAL PLATE 15X30 CM
4 CM+9831661302 CHIPKARTENHALTER
CHIP CARD HOLDER
PORTE CARTE PUCE
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
BOTTOM COMPLETE
FOND COMPLET
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
11 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
SCREW
VIS
HINGE
CHARNIERE
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
LEAF SPRING RHS
LEAF SPRING LHS
= Assembly


03,04
05 01,02
06
07*
16
08*
15
17
19 09
18
14
11
12
13
13
10 12
11


2 10+9999911960 CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET SR 35X43 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR35X43 CM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE HR35X43 CM
4 10+9999911930 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE SR 35X43 CM
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
13 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
SCREW
VIS
HINGE
CHARNIERE
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
LEAF SPRING RHS
LEAF SPRING LHS
= Assembly


CASSETTE CR MD4.1 FLFS 35X43 CM


1 CM+9832008100 FLFS CASSETTE 35X43 CM
FLFS CASSETTE 35X43 CM
FLFS CASSETTE 35X43 CM
= Assembly
CASSETTE CR MD4.1 FLFS 35X43 CM


CASSETTE CR MD4.0 PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM / SYM


11-2014 TYPE 8320/785/790 Agfa Company Confidential
1 10+9999912920 CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET PS 21X43 (35X43) CM SYM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET PS 21X43 (35X43) CM SYM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET PS 21X43 (35X43) CM SYM
2 10+9999912930 CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM
CR MD4.0 GENERAL SET PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM
3 CM+6045930 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE PS 21X43 (35X43) CM SYM (37PWU)
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE PS 21X43 (35X43) CM SYM (37PWU)
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE PS 21X43 (35X43) CM SYM (37PWU)
4 CM+6045940 CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM (EGPRC)
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM (EGPRC)
CR MD4.0 GENERAL CASSETTE PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM (EGPRC)
COVER WELDED
COUVERCLE SOUDE
BOTTOM ASSY
FOND COMPL.
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
13 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
SCREW
VIS
HINGE
CHARNIERE
DEFLECTOR
DEFLECTEUR
LEAF SPRING RHS
LEAF SPRING LHS
= Assembly
CASSETTE CR MD4.0 PS 21X43 (35X43) CM ASYM / SYM


11-2014 TYPE 8320/785/790 Agfa Company Confidential
CASSETTE CR MM3.0 MAMMO / EXTREMITIES 18X24 CM


1 10+9999912130 CR MM3.0 MAMMO SET 18X24 CM
CR MM3.0 MAMMO SET 18X24 CM
2 10+9999912400 CR MM3.0 EXTREMITIES SET 18X24 CM
CR MM3.0 EXTREMITIES SET 18X24 CM
3 10+9999912170 CR MM3.0 MAMMO CASSETTE 18X24 CM
CR MM3.0 MAMMO CASSETTE 18X24 CM
4 10+9999912380 CR MM3.0 EXTREMITIES CASSETTE 18X24 CM
CR MM3.0 EXTREMITIES CASSETTE 18X24 CM
5 10+9999912150 CR MM3.0 MAMMO PLATE 18X24 CM
CR MM3.0 MAMMO PLATE 18X24 CM
7 CM+9833061402 * DECKEL VOLLSTÄNDIG
COVER COMPLETE
COUVERCLE COMPLET
SCREW
VIS
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
13 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
HINGE
CHARNIERE
16 CM+9833012200 PUSHING FINGERS
PUSHING FINGERS
PUSHING FINGERS
17 CM+9833060600 DECKELFEDER UND RÜCKHALTER
DECKELFEDER UND RÜCKHALTER
= Assembly




1 10+9999912140 CR MM3.0 MAMMO SET 24X30 CM
2 10+9999912410 CR MM3.0 EXTREMITIES SET 24X30 CM
3 10+9999912180 CR MM3.0 MAMMO CASSETTE 24X30 CM
4 10+9999912390 CR MM3.0 EXTREMITIES CASSETTE 24X30 CM
5 10+9999912160 CR MM3.0 MAMMO PLATE 24X30 CM
7 CM+9833161402 * DECKEL VOLLSTÄNDIG
COVER COMPLETE
COUVERCLE COMPLET
SCREW
VIS
LATCH RHS COMPLETE
LATCH LHS COMPLETE
TENSION SPRING
RESSORT DE TRACTION
GUIDE PART
PARITE DE RENVOI
13 CM+9830010351 KLINKE
PAWL
CLIQUET
HINGE
CHARNIERE
16 CM+9833012200 PUSHING FINGERS
PUSHING FINGERS
PUSHING FINGERS
17 CM+9833060600 DECKELFEDER UND RÜCKHALTER
= Assembly


Type Overview
This spare parts list is valid for the following machine type(s):
Device Name Type Number Order Code

CR 25.0 5156/0105 -----
CR 25.0 5156/0100 EOV3F
CR 35-X 5158/0100 ES9MZ
Accessory Overview
Following accesssories are separately available:
Accessory Order Number

CR MOBILE KIT EBYO1
PROSAT WIPES (3 X 30 WIPES) ETRTM
CR ID TABLET EPKAP
CR HUB EPZVG
CR EASYLIFT EJ8V8
CR FULL BODY CASSETTE HOLDER EAUGV
CR PLANFELD GRID 37.6 X 128.2 CM ECJ8M
CR ANTISCATTER GRID VERSION 2 EMUXJ
CR PHOSPHOR IP CLEANER 4P EFOJH
CR PHOSPHOR IP CLEANER 2P EQP6D
CR UPS 220 VOLT EGPTG
CR UPS 110 VOLT EGPSE
CR 35-X (CR 25.0) HIGH ALT KIT EZKDB
CR 85-X (CR 75.0) HIGH ALT KIT EZKFF
POLYNIT WIPES 5PCZF


LIST OF CONTENTS
A IDENTIFICATION DIAGRAMS .................................................................................................5

1 OVERVIEW OF UNITS.............................................................................................................5
2 LIST OF COMPONENTS .........................................................................................................6
3 FRAME (ASSEMBLY NO. 100) ..............................................................................................12
3.1 Diagram Frame .......................................................................................................................12
3.2 Table of Components Frame ..................................................................................................13
4 POWER UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 200)....................................................................................14

4.1 Power Unit Diagram A – Part 1...............................................................................................14
4.2 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram A – Part 1 ...........................................................15
4.3 Power Unit Diagram A – Part 2...............................................................................................16
4.4 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram A – Part 2 ...........................................................17
4.5 Power Unit Diagram B – Part 1...............................................................................................18
4.6 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram B – Part 1 ...........................................................19
4.7 Power Unit Diagram B – Part 2...............................................................................................20
4.8 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram B – Part 2 ...........................................................21
5 CPCI RACK (ASSEMBLY NO. 300) CR 35-X UP TO SN 4000, CR 25.0 UP TO SN 6500 ..22
5.1 Diagram cPCI Rack ................................................................................................................22
5.2 Table of Components cPCI Rack with Oberon Board/Scan Master Board ............................23
5.3 Table of Components cPCI Rack with c-Revive Board ..........................................................23
6 REVIVE RACK (ASSEMBLY NO. 300) CR 35-X AS OF SN ≥ 4000, CR 25.0 AS OF SN ≥

6500........................................................................................................................................24
6.1 Diagram Revive Rack .............................................................................................................24
6.2 Table of Components Revive Rack with Revive Board ..........................................................25
6.3 Table of Components Revive Rack with S-Revive Board ......................................................25
7 SCAN UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 400) .......................................................................................26

7.1 Diagram Scan Unit..................................................................................................................26
7.2 Table of Components Scan Unit .............................................................................................27
8 ERASURE UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 500)................................................................................28

8.1 Diagram Erasure Unit .............................................................................................................28


8.2 Table of Components Erasure Unit ........................................................................................29
9 IP TRANSPORT UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 600).......................................................................30

9.1 Diagram IP Transport Unit ......................................................................................................30
9.2 Table of Components IP Transport Unit .................................................................................31
10 CASSETTE UNIT (ASSEMBLY NO. 700) ..............................................................................32

10.1 Cassette Unit - Diagram A ......................................................................................................32
10.2 Table of Components Cassette Unit - Diagram A...................................................................33
10.3 Cassette Unit - Diagram B ......................................................................................................34
10.4 Table of Components Cassette Unit - Diagram B...................................................................35
10.5 Cassette Unit - Diagram C ......................................................................................................36
10.6 Table of Components Cassette Unit - Diagram C ..................................................................37
B CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS .............................................................................................................37


A Identification Diagrams
1 Overview of Units
100
700
600
500
400
200 300
100 Frame
100 Frame
200
200 Power
PowerUnit
Unit
300
300 cPCI
cPCIRack
Rack/ Revive Rack
400 Scan Unit
400 Scan Unit
500 Erasure Unit
500 Erasure Unit
700 Cassette Unit
5156_reg04_001.cdr
700 Cassette Unit
Figure 1


2 List of Components
Component Designation Function Refer to

(also used by Diagnosis mode)
100 BU319 Socket for Service PC Figure 2
100 BU122 Socket for Transport unit power Figure 2
supply
100 BU353 Socket for Erasure unit fan Figure 2
100 GS112 LCD-TERMINAL-BD LCD terminal board Figure 2
100 GS114 IOBUS-DISTRIB I/O-bus distributor board Figure 2
100 GS116 EMERGENCY-NODE Status and Emergency node Figure 2
100 GS118 LCD-DISPLAY LCD display Figure 2
100 M101 POWER-UNIT-FAN Power unit fan Figure 2
500 M501 ERASURE-UNIT-FAN Erasure unit fan Figure 2
100 S101 INTERLOCK-RIGHT Interlock switch right hand side Figure 2
100 ST22 Plug for Transport unit Figure 2
100 ST319 Adapter Ethernet Figure 2
200 BU1 Socket on GS210 Figure 3
200 BU235 Socket Power unit fan Figure 3
200 BU283 Socket for Power integration Figure 3
board
200 BU289 Socket for Erasure unit Figure 3
200 BU306 Socket for cPCI Power board Figure 3
(230 V)



200 D9 LED indicator Figure 3
200 GS210 ERASURE-CTRL-BD Erasure control board Figure 3
200 GS230 POWER-INTEGR-BD Power integration board Figure 3
200 S201 MAINS-SWITCH Mains switch with overload Figure 3
protection
200 S202 INTERLOCK-FRONT Interlock switch front side Figure 3
200 S203 LINE-SELECTOR Line selector Figure 3
200 SI201 POW-FUSE Power Unit fuse T2.0A Figure 3
200 SI202 SM-TRANSF-FUSE Stepper motor transformer fuse Figure 3
T2.0A
200 ST1 Plug on GS210 Figure 4
200 ST7 Jumper on GS230 Figure 4
200 ST8 Jumper on GS230 Figure 4
200 ST309 Plug Interlock switch right hand Figure 4
side
200 ST310 Plug I/O-bus power unit Figure 4
200 ST337 Plug on BU289, connection to Figure 4
erasure unit
erasure unit
200 BU1 Socket for Current sense board Figure 5
200 BU2 Socket for Current sense board Figure 5
200 BU311 Socket for Transformer Figure 5
200 GS220 CURRENT-SENSE Current sense board Figure 5



200 GS240 POWER-SUPPL Power supply 24 V Figure 5
200 MC201 LINE-FILTER Line filter Figure 5
200 PE1 Ground Figure 5
200 ST1 Plug Current sense board Figure 5
200 ST229 Mains plug Figure 5
200 TR206 30V-TRANSFORMER Stepper motor transformer 30 V Figure 5
200 ERASURE-TRANSF-UNIT Figure 6
200 TR 201 Transformer erasure lamps 1, 6 Figure 6
200 TR 205 Transformer erasure lamps 5, Figure 6
10
200 GS230 POWER-INTEGR-BD SI 1 Figure 6
200 SI 2 Figure 6
200 SI 3 Figure 6
200 SI 4 Figure 6
200 SI 5 Figure 6
300 M301 CPCI-RACK-FAN Fan motor Figure 7
300 GS300 BACKPLANE Backplane Figure 7
300 GS302 SCSI HARDDISK Harddisk (SCSI) Figure 7
300 GS304 FLOPPY loppy drive Figure 7
300 GS306 CPCI-POWER-BD Power unit Figure 7
300 GS310 SCAN-CTRL-M-BD Scan Master Board Figure 7
300 GS312 CPU-OBERON-BD CPU-Oberon Board Figure 7
300 M301 CPCI-RACK-FAN Fan motor Figure 7
300 GS301 BACKPLANE Backplane Figure 7
300 GS307 CPCI-POWER Power unit Figure 7
300 GS312 cREVIVE c-Revive Board Figure 7
300 M10 Revive RACK-FAN Fan motors Figure 8
M11



300 GS630 CPCI-POWER-BD Power unit Figure 8
300 GS631 REVIVE-BACKPLANE Revive Backplane Figure 8
300 GS632 REVIVE Revive Board Figure 8
300 HDD2 HARDDISK IDE Harddisk Figure 8
300 GS631 REVIVE-BACKPLANE Revive Backplane Figure 8
300 GS640 sREVIVE S-Revive Board Figure 8
400 M401 ROLLER-LIFT-MOT Roller lift motor Figure 9
400 M402 SLOWSCAN-MOTOR Slowscan drive motor Figure 9
400 GS410 SCAN-ROLLS-LIFT Stepper motor board of roller lift Figure 9
motor M401
400 GS412 SLOWSCAN-BD Stepper motor board of slow Figure 9
scan motor M402
400 GS420 OPTIKMODUL Optic Module Figure 9
400 GS422 PM-TUBE1 Photomultiplier module Figure 9
400 GS436 POLYGON_CTRL Polygon control board Figure 9
400 GS440 PIN-DIODE-BD Pin diode board Figure 9
400 GS442 IP-ALIGNMENT-LS IP alignment light barrier sender Figure 9
400 GS444 IP- ALIGNMENT -LS IP alignment light barrier Figure 9
receiver
400 GS446 IP-DET-LS Scanner IP detection light Figure 9
barrier
400 GS448 ROLLER-LIFT-LS Scan roller lift 0-position light Figure 9
barrier
400 ST14 Plug for scan roller lift motor Figure 9
400 ST351 Plug for I/O-bus scan Figure 9
power unit



500 LA1 + ERASURE-LAMPS Erasure lamps 1 and 6 Figure 10
LA6
LA7
LA8
LA9
500 LA5+ ERASURE-LAMPS Erasure lamps 5 and 10 Figure 10
LA10
600 GS604 IP-TRANSP-0-LS IP transport 0-position light Figure 11
barrier
600 GS606 SOLENOID-VALVE Solenoid valve Figure 11
600 GS608 VACUUM-PUMP Vacuum pump Figure 11
600 M601 IP-TRANSPORT-MOT IP transport motor Figure 11
600 ST123 Plug and socket for power Figure 11
supply stepper motor
600 ST350 Plug and socket for solenoid Figure 11
valve and vacuum pump
700 GS716 CASS-OPEN-0-LS Cassette opener Figure 12
0-position light barrier
700 GS720 CASS-SWITCH Cassette detection switch Figure 12
700 GS722 CASS-CLAMP-0-LS Cassette clamp Figure 12
700 GS726 CASS-POS-DET-LS Cassette position detection light Figure 12
barrier
700 GS728 ALIGN-0-POS-LS IP alignment 0-position light Figure 12
barrier
700 GS730 IP-POS-DET-LS IP position detection light Figure 12
barrier
700 GS732 CASS-IN-DET-LS Cassette input detection light Figure 12
barrier sender
700 GS734 CASS-IN-DET-LS Cassette input detection light Figure 12
barrier receiver
700 GS736 RF-TAG-READER RF-tag serial reader Figure 12
700 GS738 RF-TAG-ANTENNA RF-tag antenna Figure 12



700 M702 CASS-OPENER-MOT Cassette opener motor Figure 12
700 GS714 CASS-BELT-0-LS Cassette belt 0-position light Figure 13
barrier
700 GS718 CASS-LIFT-0-LS Cassette lift 0-position light Figure 13
barrier
700 GS724 CASS-CLAMP-LS Cassette clamp light barrier Figure 13
700 M701 CASS-ROLLER-MOT Cassette roller motor Figure 13
700 M703 CASS-LIFT-MOT Cassette lift motor Figure 13
700 M704 CASS-BELT-MOT Cassette unit belt motor Figure 13
700 M705 CASS-CLAMP-MOT Cassette clamping motor Figure 13
700 M706 IP-ALIGNMENT-MOT IP alignment stepper motor Figure 13
700 BU170 Socket for 40 V cassette power Figure 14
supply
700 BU377 Socket for RF-tag serial reader Figure 14
700 GS710 5FOLD-STEP-BD Fivefold stepper motor board, Figure 14
5FOLD-STEP-JL1 jumper JL1

700 GS712 IP-ALIGNMENT-BD IP alignment board Figure 14
700 ST5 Plug for I/O-bus cassette unit Figure 14
700 ST21 Plug and Socket for cassette Figure 14
opener motor


3 Frame (Assembly No. 100)
3.1 Diagram Frame
BU353
M501
BU319
ST22
5158_reg04_001.cdr
Figure 2: Frame


3.2 Table of Components Frame
Ass. Abbre- Designation Function Circuit

viation (also used by diagram
Diagnosis mode) page
100 BU319 Socket for Service PC 7

100 BU122 Socket for Transport unit power 6
supply
100 BU353 Socket for Erasure unit fan 5
100 GS112 LCD-TERMINAL-BD LCD terminal board 7
100 GS114 IOBUS-DISTRIB I/O-bus distributor board 7
100 GS116 EMERGENCY-NODE Status and Emergency node 7
100 GS118 LCD-DISPLAY LCD display 7
100 M101 POWER-UNIT-FAN Power unit fan 7
500 M501 ERASURE-UNIT- Erasure unit fan 5
FAN
100 S101 INTERLOCK-RIGHT Interlock switch right hand side 7
100 ST22 Plug for Transport unit 6
100 ST319 Adapter Ethernet 7


4 Power Unit (Assembly No. 200)
4.1 Power Unit Diagram A – Part 1
ST5
BU1 ST4
BU2
BU3 BU6
BU4
BU5
ST3
BU3
ST2 GS210
BU8
GS230 ST1
ST2
ST1
BU5
ST7
D9
ST8 S203
D10
D11
ST309
SI201
SI202
BU283
S201
ST310
S202
BU235 BU289
BU306 BU312
5155_reg04_008.cdr
Figure 3: Power Unit Diagram A – Part 1


4.2 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram A – Part 1

200 BU1 Socket on GS210 4

200 BU235 Socket Power unit fan 4
200 BU283 Socket for Power integration 4
board
200 BU289 Socket for Erasure unit 4
200 BU306 Socket for cPCI Power board 4
(230 V)
200 D9 LED indicator 4
200 GS210 ERASURE-CTRL-BD Erasure control board 4
200 GS230 POWER-INTEGR-BD Power integration board 4
200 S201 MAINS-SWITCH Mains switch with overload 4
protection
200 S202 INTERLOCK-FRONT Interlock switch front side 4
200 S203 LINE-SELECTOR Line selector 4
200 SI201 POW-FUSE Power Unit fuse T2.0A 4
200 SI202 SM-TRANSF-FUSE Stepper motor transformer fuse 4
T2.0A


4.3 Power Unit Diagram A – Part 2
ST5
BU1 ST4
BU2
BU3 BU6
BU4
BU5
ST3
BU3
ST2 GS210
BU8
GS230 ST1
ST2
ST1
BU5
ST7
D9
ST8 S203
D10
D11
ST309
SI201
SI202
BU283
S201
ST310
S202
BU235 BU289
BU306 BU312
5155_reg04_008.cdr
Figure 4: Power Unit Diagram A – Part 2


4.4 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram A – Part 2

200 ST1 Plug on GS210 4

200 ST7 Jumper on GS230 --
For settings, see chapter 3.5.
200 ST8 Jumper on GS230 --
For settings, see chapter 3.5.
200 ST309 Plug Interlock switch right hand 4
side
200 ST310 Plug I/O-bus power unit 4
200 ST337 Plug on BU289, connection to 4
erasure unit
erasure unit


4.5 Power Unit Diagram B – Part 1
MC201
GS230
SI1 - SI4
SI5
ST229
PE1
TR202
TR204
TR201 BU1
TR205 ST1
GS220
BU2
TR206
TR203
GS240
BU311
5156_reg04_009.cdr
Figure 5: Power Unit Diagram B – Part 1


4.6 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram B – Part 1

viation (in Diagnosis mode) diagram
page
200 BU1 Socket for Current sense board 4
GS220
200 BU2 Socket for Current sense board 4
GS220
200 BU311 Socket for Transformer 4
200 GS220 CURRENT-SENSE Current sense board 4
200 GS240 POWER-SUPPL Power supply 24 V 4
200 MC201 LINE-FILTER Line filter 4
200 PE1 Ground 4
200 ST1 Plug Current sense board GS220 4
200 ST229 Mains plug 4
200 TR206 30V- Stepper motor transformer 30 V 4
TRANSFORMER


4.7 Power Unit Diagram B – Part 2
MC201
GS230
SI1 - SI4
SI5
ST229
PE1
TR202
TR204
TR201 BU1
TR205 ST1
GS220
BU2
TR206
TR203
GS240
BU311
5156_reg04_009.cdr
Figure 6: Power Unit Diagram B – Part 2


4.8 Table of Components Power Unit Diagram B – Part 2
Erasure Transformer Unit

viation diagram
page
200 ERASURE- 4
TRANSF-UNIT
200 TR 201 Transformer erasure lamps 1, 6 4
GS230 Fuses
Ass. Abbr. Designation Fuse Quality

200 GS230 POWER-INTEGR-BD SI 1 T 2.5 A
200 SI 2 T 2.5 A
200 SI 3 T 2.5 A
200 SI 4 T 2.5 A
200 SI 5 T 6.25 A


5 cPCI Rack (Assembly No. 300)

CR 35-X up to SN 4000, CR 25.0 up to SN 6500
NOTE:
The cPCI Rack is installed ex factory:
 CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 up to SN < 6500
 CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 100 up to SN < 6000
 CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 up to SN < 4000
5.1 Diagram cPCI Rack
M301
M708*
M301
GS302
GS304
GS300 GS650*
GS301*
GS300
GS310
GS306
GS312 GS306
GS307*
SATA HD 2,5’’*
P1/5*
* c-Revive-Board
Figure 7: cPCI Rack and c-Revive Board


5.2 Table of Components cPCI Rack with Oberon Board/Scan Master Board

300 M301 CPCI-RACK-FAN Fan motor 2

300 GS300 BACKPLANE Backplane 2
300 GS302 HARDDISK SCSI Harddisk 2
300 GS304 FLOPPY Floppy drive 2
300 GS306 CPCI-POWER-BD Power supply 2
300 GS310 SCAN-CTRL-M-BD Scan Master Board 2
300 GS312 CPU-OBERON-BD CPU-Oberon Board 2
5.3 Table of Components cPCI Rack with c-Revive Board
NOTE:
The c-Revive Board includes a SATA harddisk. It is available as spare part and
replaces the following components:
GS302 HARDDISK, GS304 FLOPPY, GS310 SCAN-CTRL-MASTER, and
GS312 CPU-OBERON-BD
For further details refer to CR 35-X - Service Bulletin No. 17 - c-Revive Board and
S-Revive Board available as Spare Part, DD+DIS255.12E.

300 M301 Fan motor 10

300 GS301 BACKPLANE Backplane 10
300 GS307 CPCI-POWER Power supply 10
300 G650 cREVIVE c-Revive Board 10
300 SATA HD 2,5‘’ SATA Harddisk 10
300 P1/5 USB USB Port 10


6 Revive Rack (Assembly No. 300)

CR 35-X as of SN ≥ 4000, CR 25.0 as of SN ≥ 6500
NOTE:
The Revive Rack is installed ex factory:
 CR 25.0 Type 5156 / 105 as of SN ≥ 6500
 CR 35-X Type 5158 / 100 as of SN ≥ 4000
6.1 Diagram Revive Rack
M10+M11
M12+M13*
GS631
Backplane
GS632
GS640*
HDD2
SATA HD 2,5’’*
P1/5
GS630
* S-Revive Board
Figure 8: Revive Rack


6.2 Table of Components Revive Rack with Revive Board

300 M10 Fan motors 8

M11
300 GS631 REVIVE- Backplane 8
BACKPLANE
300 GS632 REVIVE Revive Board 8
300 HDD2 HARDDISK IDE Harddisk 8
300 P1/5 USB USB Port for USB flash drive 8
6.3 Table of Components Revive Rack with S-Revive Board

300 M12 Fan motors 9

M13
300 GS631 REVIVE- Backplane 9
BACKPLANE
300 GS640 sREVIVE S-Revive Board 9
300 SATA HD 2,5‘’ SATA Harddisk 9
300 P1/5 USB USB Port for USB flash drive 9


7 Scan Unit (Assembly No. 400)
7.1 Diagram Scan Unit
Figure 9: Scan Unit


7.2 Table of Components Scan Unit

400 M401 ROLLER-LIFT-MOT Roller lift motor 3

400 M402 SLOWSCAN- Slowscan drive motor 3
MOTOR
400 GS410 SCAN-ROLLS-LIFT Stepper motor board of roller lift 3
motor M401
400 GS412 SLOWSCAN-BD Stepper motor board of slow 3
scan motor M402
400 GS420 OPTIKMODUL Optic Module 3
400 GS422 PM-TUBE1 Photomultiplier module 3
400 GS436 POLYGON_CTRL Polygon control board 3
400 GS440 PIN-DIODE-BD Pin diode board 3
400 GS442 IP-ALIGNMENT-LS IP alignment light barrier sender 3
400 GS444 IP- ALIGNMENT - IP alignment light barrier receiver 3
LS
400 GS446 IP-DET-LS Scanner IP detection light barrier 3
400 GS448 ROLLER-LIFT-LS Scan roller lift 0-position light 3
barrier
400 ST14 Plug for scan roller lift motor 3
400 ST351 Plug for I/O-bus scan 3


8 Erasure Unit (Assembly No. 500)
8.1 Diagram Erasure Unit
BU358
LA1
LA2
LA3
LA4
LA5
LA6
LA7
LA8
LA9
LA10
5156_reg04_007.cdr
Figure 10: Erasure Unit


8.2 Table of Components Erasure Unit


power unit
500 LA1 + ERASURE-LAMPS Erasure lamps 1 and 6 5
LA6
LA7
LA8
LA9
500 LA5+ ERASURE-LAMPS Erasure lamps 5 and 10 5
LA10
NOTE:
Erasure unit fan M501 is part of the frame (Assembly No. 100)!


9 IP Transport Unit (Assembly No. 600)
9.1 Diagram IP Transport Unit
ST350
JL1 ST123
1 8
GS608
GS602
GS604
GS606
M 601
5155_reg04_005.cdr
Figure 11: IP Transport Unit


9.2 Table of Components IP Transport Unit

600 GS602 IP-TRANSPORT-BD IP transport board 6

600 GS604 IP-TRANSP-0-LS IP transport 0-position light 6
barrier
600 GS606 SOLENOID-VALVE Solenoid valve 6
600 GS608 VACUUM-PUMP Vacuum pump 6
600 M601 IP-TRANSPORT- IP transport motor 6
MOT
600 ST123 Plug and socket for power supply 6
stepper motor
600 ST350 Plug and socket for solenoid 6
valve and vacuum pump


10 Cassette Unit (Assembly No. 700)
10.1 Cassette Unit - Diagram A
GS736
GS738 M702
GS728
GS716
GS726
GS720 GS730
GS732
GS722
GS734 5155_reg04_010.cdr
Figure 12: Cassette Unit - Diagram A


10.2 Table of Components Cassette Unit - Diagram A

700 GS716 CASS-OPEN-0-LS Cassette opener 1

700 GS720 CASS-SWITCH Cassette detection switch 1
700 GS722 CASS-CLAMP-0-LS Cassette clamp 1
700 GS726 CASS-POS-DET-LS Cassette position detection light 1
barrier
700 GS728 ALIGN-0-POS-LS IP alignment 0-position light 1
barrier
700 GS730 IP-POS-DET-LS IP position detection light 1
barrier
700 GS732 CASS-IN-DET-LS Cassette input detection light 1
barrier sender
700 GS734 CASS-IN-DET-LS Cassette input detection light 1
barrier receiver
700 GS736 RF-TAG-READER RF-tag serial reader 1
700 GS738 RF-TAG-ANTENNA RF-tag antenna 1
700 M702 CASS-OPENER-MOT Cassette opener motor 1


10.3 Cassette Unit - Diagram B
GS714
GS718
GS724
M703
M705
M704
M701
M706 5155_reg04_011.cdr
Figure 13: Cassette Unit - Diagram B


10.4 Table of Components Cassette Unit - Diagram B

700 GS714 CASS-BELT-0-LS Cassette belt 0-position light 1

barrier
700 GS718 CASS-LIFT-0-LS Cassette lift 0-position light 1
barrier
700 GS724 CASS-CLAMP-LS Cassette clamp light barrier 1
700 M701 CASS-ROLLER-MOT Cassette roller motor 1
700 M703 CASS-LIFT-MOT Cassette lift motor 1
700 M704 CASS-BELT-MOT Cassette unit belt motor 1
700 M705 CASS-CLAMP-MOT Cassette clamping motor 1
700 M706 IP-ALIGNMENT-MOT IP alignment stepper motor 1


10.5 Cassette Unit - Diagram C
GS712
BU377
ST21 ST5
JL1 JL2 BU170

1 8 8 1 5156_reg04_005.cdr
GS710
Figure 14: Cassette Unit - Diagram C


10.6 Table of Components Cassette Unit - Diagram C

700 BU170 Socket for 40 V cassette power 1

supply
700 BU377 Socket for RF-tag serial reader 1
700 GS710 5FOLD-STEP-BD Fivefold stepper motor board, 1

700 GS712 IP-ALIGNMENT-BD IP alignment board 1
700 ST5 Plug for I/O-bus cassette unit 1
700 ST21 Plug and Socket for cassette 1
opener motor
B Circuit Diagrams
Overview of Circuit Diagrams F1.5158.4003.1C
Sheet No. Sheet Name

1 CASSETTE_UNIT_700
2 PCI_RACK_300
3 SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400
4 POWER_UNIT_200
5 ERASURE_UNIT_500
6 IP_TRANSPORT_UNIT_600
7 FRAME_100
8 REVIVE_efer
9 sREVIVE
10 cREVIVE
The Circuit Diagrams (Sheets 1-10) can be found on the following pages.


A B C D E F G H
GS736-RF- GS738-RF-
TAG-READER TAG-ANTENNA
1 F7.0486.1316.X 1
F7.0486.1351.X BU1 BU1
*6/6 *6
*6/6
M704-CASS-BELT-MOT F8.5155.4508.X
M705-CASS-CLAMP-MOT M703_CASS-LIFT-MOT M702-CASS-OPENER-MOT M701-CASS-ROLLER-MOT -M706-IP-ALIGNMENT-MOT
RD BR RD BR BR BR
RDWT M M RDWT M M M M
BKWT OR BKWT OR OR OR
BK BK
RD YE RD YE RD YE RD YE ST1
#11/20
GNWT
YE
YEWT
GNWT
YE
YEWT
GN
GN
7/20
2/20
3/20
4/20
5/20
6/20
8/20
9/20
ST1
1/20
1
F8.5145.4574.X 1 1
700MA13 1
1 700MA1 700MA9 700MA7
GS736/ST1
BU377 ST377
1
2
7
3
4
5
6
8
9
1 1 1
1
2 700MA15 2 2 2
700MA11
2
3
4
1
700MA6 3 3
F8.5145.4524.X
F8.5145.4574.X
4 4
B1
F8.5156.4622.X
B2
B3
B4
5 5
F8.5120.5165.X
F8.5120.5165.X
F8.5145.4574.X
ST21
/PCI_RACK_300.2F
F8.5158.4690.X 6 6 RF_READER
A1
A2
A3
A4
F8.5156.4506.X 7 7
-BU371 8 8
9 9
1
2
3
4
10000µF/63V 1/2 1/2 F8.5155.4502.X
1 1 700MA14 1 +
1 700MA12
2/2 2/2
L8.7674.8820.0
1
700MA16 700MA10 700C1 100MA
-ST360
1
700MA3
1
700MA8 700MA2
ST157
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
1
1
1/5 1 BU170 ST170
ST5
BU1
1/2
2/2
2/4
3/4
4/4
*4/4
1/4
F8.5155.4502.X
ST35
ST34
ST32
ST33
ST23
ST24
ST17
ST18
ST15
ST14
4/4
*4/4
4/4
*4/4
4/4
*4/4
4/4
*4/4
4/4
*4/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
*2/2 2/5
3/5 1 1 40v_cass
4/5 2 2 F8.5155.4612.X
/POWER_UNIT_200.2
*4/4 5/5 5 3 3
3 4 4
ST4 3
*2/2 JL1
1234 5678
*2/2
GS710-5FOLD- 1/1
8 76 5 43 2 1
12 34 5 67 8
STEP-BD
SUBNODE2
SUBNODE1
ST10
*4/4 4A 2A F8.5155.4629.X
F8.9499.8120.X ST421
JL2
ST1 GS712/BU1
*4/4 F8.5155.4636.X IO-BUS_CASS
JL1
*26/26 *26 #2 1 #26

/FRAME_100.2A
*26 *26 *26 *26
*4/4 F8.5155.4504.X
*4/4 ST5 BU349
700MA5
*4/4
GS712-IP-
*4/4 *4/4 ALIGNMENT-BD
F8.9499.8140.X
*4/4
ST2
ST3
*4/4
*4/4
4 *4/4 4
*4/4
*4
*4
F8.9889.0615.X
ST38
ST40
ST39
ST11
ST19
ST51
*26/26
*26/26
ST2
ST8
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
ST3
4/6
2/6
3/6
5/6
6/6
1/6
*4/4
F8.9889.0555.X
*4
1
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
2
3
4
5
6
*26
GS710/BU3
1 F8.5155.4504.X
F8.9889.0540.X
F8.9889.0560.X
F8.9889.0555.X
F8.9889.0585.X
F8.9889.0585.X
F8.5156.4518.X
F8.9889.0570.X
F8.5155.4510.X
5
5
*3
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
2
3
4
2
3
4
1
1
*4
ST1
*3/3
ST1
ST1
ST1
4/4
4/4
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
ST1
*4/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
ST1
*4/4
X
X
X
X VDE/UL/CSA
- Teil -
GS714-CASS- GS718-CASS- GS722-CASS- GS724-CASS- GS734-CASS- GS732-CASS- GS728-ALIGN- GS730-IP-POS-
Aenderungen
LIFT-0-LS GS716-CASS- GS720-CASS- GS726-CASS- nur mit
BELT-0-LS CLAMP-LS OPEN-0-LS POS-DET-LS IN-DET-LS IN-DET-LS 0-POS-LS DET-LS
CLAMP-0-LS SWITCH Zustimmung
F8.9499.6540.X F8.9499.6540.X F8.9499.5880.X F8.9499.6540.X F8.9499.6540.X F8.5156.7000.X F8.9499.6540.X F8.5100.7460.X F8.9499.4630.X F8.9499.6540.X F8.9499.6770.X von
third parties without explicit authorisation is strictly forbidden.
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information
FT-LPS
contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
6
6
1C ECN/7002751 04.12.2012 AGHFR DATE NAME
General Schematic Project
1B 40976 12.03.2010 AGHFR USER 20.04.2006 Leith.
06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: CASSETTE_UNIT_700 / 100

Sheet 1
© AGFA
0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. F1.5158.4003.1C of 10 SH

A B C D E F IDX Change-NR DATE NAME Replacement for
A B C D E F
CPCI-RACK-FAN 3J4 BU5 BU1

#135/137 *3/3 *3/3
-M300
3J1
M #135/137
ST429
2 1 BU6 ST1
#48/50 #48/50
ST427 BU875 BU1
1 1 1 1/2
1 2 2 2 2/2 1
GS306
F8.5146.1430.X
CPCI-POWER-BD
F8.5155.4670.X
BU883 MC301 BU877

L 1
L L1
BU876 ST3 BU4 GS310/ST4
BU870 1 1/4
PE 3A 1 1/17 1 bk
/POWER_UNIT_200.1F 2/4
250VAC 2/17 2 br
3 3/4
8/17 8 rd
BU313
N 1 4 4/4 9/17 9 or
2J4 BU2 10/17 10 ye
N N1
#135/137 #135/137 15/17 15 gn
POWER 3/17 3 bk
300PE1 4/17 4 L7.0460.9089.0
1 br
7/17 7 rd F8.5158.4636.X PM_1
11/17 11 or /SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400.1B
12/17 12 ye
14/17 14 gn
5/17 5 bk
2
The area between countinuous line 6/17 6 br
2
13/17 13
may be replaced by 16/17 16
rd
17/17 17
see page 8 (REVIVE_efer) or 2J1
#135/137
BU1
#135/137 L7.0460.9074.0
BU6 GS310/ST6
see page 9 (sREVIVE) or #10/11 #10 F7.0477.1084.X POLYGON_CTRL
/SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400.1B
see page 10 (cREVIVE) ST2 GS310/BU2

#9/11 #9 F8.5156.4622.X RF_READER
/CASSETTE_UNIT_700.2I
10/11 10
BU3 GS310/ST3
#9/10 #9 F8.5156.4640.X LCD
/FRAME_100.1A
SCAN-CTRL-M-BD
BU5 GS310/ST5
#25/27 #25 F8.5156.4570.X IO_Bus_PCI
/FRAME_100.2A
26/27 26 K81:SH1
ST2 BU314 BU317 ST1
#34/36 *34 *34 #34/36 ST1 GS310/BU1
3 #25/27 #25 3
L7.0460.9089.0
26/27 26 F8.5156.4646.X LD-MODUL

/SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400.1B
F8.5146.1460.X
GS310
ST1 BU315
1/4 1
GS304 2/4 2
FLOPPY 1J4 P4
L7.0486.1365.X #135/137 #135/137
ST1 GS312/BU1
*8/8 *8 (8) F7.0477.1070.0 ethernet
/FRAME_100.3A
ST1 BU316 BU318 ST428 ST318 BU3
1/4 1 1 1/4 1J2 P8
2/4 2 1 1 2 2/2 #135/137 #135/137
3/4 3 2 2 3 3/4
4/4 4 3 3 4 4/4
4 4 BU1 GS312/ST1
2 F8.5156.4610.X service
*10/10 *10
/FRAME_100.1A
ST2 ST2 1J1 P10
#68/70 #68/70 #135/137 #135/137
GS302 4
4
HARDDISK
F7.0486.1354.X 1C ECN/7002751 04.12.2012 AGHFR DATE NAME
F8.5146.1500.X 1B 40976 12.03.2010 AGHFR USER 20.04.2006 Leith.
F7.0486.1342.0
CPU-OBERON-BD 06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
BACKPLANE 1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
GS312 / 100
F8.5146.1440.X GS300 1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: PCI_RACK_300
0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH Sheet 2
F1.5158.4003.1C
© AGFA
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. of 10 SH

A B C IDX Change-NR DATE NAME Replacement for
/POWER_UNIT_200.2F
A B C D E F
/PCI_RACK_300.2F
/PCI_RACK_300.2F
/PCI_RACK_300.3F
/FRAME_100.2A
GS442 GS444 GS446
f7-5155-2221-0.dfb f1-5155-2233-0a.dfb
F8.9499.4640.X
IP-Alignment-LS IP-Alignment-LS
SCAN-IP-DET-LS
GS448 ROLLER-LIFT-LS
#8/10
ST1
ST1
ST1
*4/4
PM_1
*4/4
40V_SCAN
IO-BUS_SCAN
POLYGON_CTRL
LD-MODUL
F8.9499.6540.x
GS446/BU1
*4
#8
GS442/BU1 GS444/BU1
*4
F8.5155.4432.X
F8.9889.0520.X
*10
*4
1 1
GS440/BU1
ST1
*4/4
GS440/BU3
BU1
#6/7
ST3
#10/12
ST1
*4/4
F8.5155.4628.X
F8.5155.4638.X
GS448/BU1
*4
L7.0460.9089.0 IR-Send
D7
F8.5158.4636.X
#12/14
F8.9889.0580.X
ST2
400MA2 GS440-PIN-DIODE-BD
f1-5155-4963-0a.dfs
1
GS440/BU2
*12
GS422/BU1
F8.5155.4434.X
BU351 ST351
F8.5155.4436.X
15 gn
14 gn
1 bk
3 bk
5 bk
10 ye
12 ye
*26 *26
2 br
9 or
4 br
11 or
6 br
8 rd
7 rd
13 rd
400MA2
16
17
*4
*4
*26
*26
*4
*4
GS410/BU2 GS410/ST3 GS412/BU1 GS412/BU2
1 GS410/BU1 GS412/ST3
2 2
400MA1
1/17
2/17
10/17
15/17
4/17
11/17
12/17
14/17
6/17
13/17
16/17
17/17
8/17
9/17
3/17
7/17
5/17
ST1
*26/26
GS412/BU4
ST1
*26/26
ST2
ST4
*4/4
*4/4
ST3
ST2
*4/4
*4/4
*4/4
ST8
ST3
1 1/5 +
F7.0477.1084.X
F8.5156.4646.X
ST11 2 2/5
ST1
*4/4 +
3/5
4 4/5 GND
St10 5 5/5 GND St10
GS410/BU4 ST4 ST8
*4/4
1 1/5 + 4A 2A 4A 2A
2 2/5 + JL1
JL1 ST11
-GS422-PM-Module 3/5 *4/4
L7.0460.9074.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F8.5148.2280. 4 4/5 GND
5 5/5 GND ST10 ST10
*3/3 *3/3
F8.9499.8140.X ST5
*4/4 F8.9499.8140.X
GS410-SCAN-ROLLS-LIFT GS412-SLOWSCAN-BD
400MA7
ST7
S329
ST5
ST7
4/4
2/4
2/4
4/4
4/4
3/4
3/4
1/4
1/4
GS412/BU5
3 3
GS410/BU7
1
1
3
3
4
4
2
2
ST1 400MA3
*8/8 *8 1
S1
F8.5145.4592.X
GS436/BU1
1
400MA4
3
4
2
1
-GS436-Polygon-Driver-BD
WHRD
A1
A2
A4
A3
ST14
RD
F8.5146.2510.X
B4
B3
B2
B1
BU421
-M301
GN
M1
1
3
4
1 400MA5
WHGN
1 400MA6
ST2 GS420/BU2 4
4 #25/27 #25
YE WT 1C ECN/7002751 04.12.2012 AGHFR DATE NAME
F8.5145.4578.X
26/27 26 Shielding General Schematic Project

GS420 OPTIKMODUL 1B 40976 12.03.2010 AGHFR USER 20.04.2006 Leith.
F8.5148.2700. BL 06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
M RD 1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400 / 100
0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH Sheet 3
M401-ROLLER-LIFT-MOT
F1.5158.4003.1C
© AGFA
(IP-Clamp) 0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. of 10 SH

A B C D E F
F8.5155.4130.X ST229
100V
MC201-LINE-FILTER F7.0460.9064.0
3 BU327 BU230 BU324 BU321 BU320 BU298 BU229
12 11
4 3
F8.5155.4120.X
L1 L F8.5158.4110.X L 100/120/230V
2 120V
( LOAD )
5
5
4
3
2
1
( LINE )
BU328
Netz
BU299 50/60 Hz
Last
-BU266 PE
240V BU305
8 7 BU326
LAST
F8.5155.4120.X
Netz
1 230V
PE BU302 N
ST4
S203-LINE-SELECTOR
1/5
2/5
3/5
4/5
5/5
BU325 22 21 BU323
-BU6 -ST237 S202-INTERLOCK-FRONT BU322 N1 N BU303
F8.5155.4670.X Netz_Rack ( power_rack )
1/3 1/3 S201-MAINS-SWITCH
F8.5158.4120.X /PCI_RACK_300.1A
2/3 -ST237 BU283 -ST283 ( fan_erasure )
3/3 3/3 BU334 9 9 Luefter-Loesch
BU304 /ERASURE_UNIT_500.4A
ST3 -BU267 200PE1 8 8
1 F8.5155.4614.X 1
BU273 8 10 BU335 7 7
1/4 1
F8.5158.4120.X 1 1
230VAC /11 6 6
30.8VAC
-XK14
BU272 2 2
2/4 2 6 120VAC T2A 5 5 Transport
-XK13 BU369 3 3
F8.5158.4142.X BU271 4 IN 4 4 /IP_TRANSPORT_UNIT_600
3/4 3 100VAC BU306 ST308
BU330 3 3 F8.5155.4614.X
SI201
T2A BU333 BU336 2 2
4/4 4 1 1 1 0V 14
1 1
BU331 BU332 TR206-30V- /15 200MA3
ST5 -BU292 Si202 GS240-24V- F8.5155.4160.X
F8.5155.4120.X TRANFORMER ( fan_LE )
*3/3 *3
POWER-SUPPL Luefter-LE
1 1 /FRAME_100.1A
-BU288
F8.5155.4660.X
2 2
BU235 ST235
10
11
12
13
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
1
7
TR201-ERASURE-TRANSF
230VAC
9 br rt (rd) 11
12.4
VAC
ST6
1/14
2/14
3/14
4/14
5/14
6/14
7/14
8/14
9/14
10/14
11/14
12/14
13/14
14/14
-ST234
120.1VAC
-XK11
-XK12
1
8 (rd) rt rt (rd) 13
BU1 F7.0460.9079.0
1/4 1 100VAC
-ST266 BU3
7 (bk) sw
1 1/3 +24VDC
2/4 2 rt
sw (bk) 15 F8.5156.4150.B 2 2/3
12.4
D11 F8.5155.4638.X
GND24
VAC
2 3/4 3 *10/10 *10 40V_SCAN 2
3.2AT 3/3 T2,5A
/SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_4
4/4 4 0V +5V gn
F8.5156.6480.X 6 sw (bk) 17 -ST8 BU8 rt SI2 D10 BU5 -ST352
D10
bl 1 1/4
2 2/4 SI1 D10 GE
TR202-ERASURE-TRANSF F8.5155.4140.0
9
3 3/4 T2,5A
230VAC 11
br rt (rd) 4 4/4 SI4 D9 GN 1/4 1
13.0
VAC
F8.5155.4120.X ST5 T2,5A

2/4 2
40v_cass
-ST233
8 120.1VAC *3 *3/3 3/4 3 /CASSETTE_UNIT_700.3I

SI5 F8.5155.4612.X
(rd) rt rt (rd) D9 RT 4/4 4
-BU293
BU2 13 T6,25A ST2
1/4 1 7 100VAC GS230-POWER-
15 SI3
2/4 2 (bk) sw D9 GE
sw (bk) INTEGR-BD
*26/26
-BU308
12.4
ST1
3/4 3
VAC
T2,5A
3.2AT F8.5156.6480.X
4/4 4 6 0V F8.5156.6450.X
BU311 1 1
ST291
F8.5156.6480.X bl sw (bk)
2 2
17 -BU341 IO-BUS_LE
3 3 F8.5155.4190.X ST310 F8.5155.4632.X
TR203-ERASURE-TRANSF 4 4
5 5
/FRAME_100.2A
230VAC BU314
6 6 F8.5155.4170.X
9 br rt (rd) 11 200MA5
12.4
7 7 2 2
VAC
8 8 F8.5155.4140.X 1 1 /FRAME_100.4A
-ST232
120.1VAC Interlock
9 9
8 (rd) rt -ST309 BU309 F8.5155.4642.X
3 rt (rd) 13 10 10 3
BU3
BU289 ST337
1/4 1 100VAC
2/4 2 7 (bk) sw 1 1
sw (bk) 15
12.4
2 2
VAC
3/4 3
-ST313
3.2AT 3 3
4/4 4 6 0V BU1
-BU2 4 4
F8.5156.6480.X sw (bk) 17 4 4/12 4/12 4 5 5
F8.5155.4170.X 6 6 F8.5156.4680.X
GS210-ERASURE- bl 3 3/12 3/12 3
7 7
CTRL-BD TR204-ERASURE-TRANSF 12 12/12 12/12 12 8 8
9 230VAC 11 6 6/12 6/12 6 9 9
F8.5155.6420.X br rt (rd) 10 10
2/12 2/12
13.0
2 2 ( Erasure_drilled )
VAC
11 11
11/12 11/12
-ST231
8 11 11 12 12 Loesch_verdrillt
120.1VAC /ERASURE_UNIT_500.3A
(rd) rt
9 9/12 9/12 9 F8.5156.4680.X
rt (rd) BU312 ST338
BU4
13
1 1/12 1/12 1
1/4 1 7 100VAC 7 7/12 7/12 7 1 1
15 2 2
2/4 2 (bk) sw 10 10/12 10/12 10
sw (bk)
12.4
F8.5155.4170.X 3 3
3/4 3
VAC
ST310 4 4 F8.5156.4680.X
4/4 4 6 3.2AT 0V GS220- 5
5
ST1
*20/20
F8.5156.6480.X
bl sw (bk) CURRENT-SENSE 6 6
F8.5155.6440.X 7 7
17
F8.5156.6480.X
8 8
TR205-ERASURE-TRANSF
BU5 -ST230 230VAC -BU318/AR 4
4 9 br rt (rd) 11
*20
12.4
1/4 1
VAC
2/4 2 1C ECN/7002751 04.12.2012 AGHFR DATE NAME

120.1VAC
3/4 3
8 (rd) rt rt (rd) 13
*26/26
*20/20
4/4 4
ST1
ST2
100VAC CR35-X 5158

F8.5155.4190.X
F8.5155.4180.X
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR. 06.12.2012 AGGBN

F8.5156.6480.X 7 (bk) sw
sw (bk) 15
12.4
ERASURE- Sheet name: POWER_UNIT_200 / 100

VAC
1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM

3.2AT
*20
0V TRANSF-UNIT
*26
BU342
BU317
6 sw (bk) 17 0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH Sheet 4

F1.5158.4003.1C
© AGFA
F8.5155.4180.X
bl
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. of 10 SH
A B C D E F
1
ERASURE-LAMPS 1
LA1 LA2 LA3 LA4 LA5 LA6 LA7 LA8 LA9 LA10
2 2
F8.5155.3585.X
9/9
8/9 8/9
7/9 7/9
6/9 6/9
5/9 5/9
4/9 4/9
3/9 3/9
2/9 2/9
1/9 1/9
-BU350 -ST350
( Erasure_drilled ) 12/12 12/12
Loesch_verdrillt
/POWER_UNIT_200.4F 11/12 11/12
F8.5156.4680.X 10/12 10/12
9/12 9/12
8/12 8/12
7/12 7/12
6/12 6/12
5/12 5/12
3 4/12 4/12 3
3/12 3/12
2/12 2/12
1/12 1/12
-BU358 -ST349
M501-ERASURE-
UNIT-FAN
S
(fan_erasure ) 3 3
2
Luefter-Loesch 2 2
/POWER_UNIT_200.1F
F8.5155.4614.X 1 1 F8.5155.3620.X
1
ST353 BU353
100MA12
4
4
06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: ERASURE_UNIT_500 / 100

0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH Sheet 5
F1.5158.4003.1C
© AGFA
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. of 10 SH

A B C D E F
BU122 ST122 F8.5155.4212.X ST350

1 1
2 2 BU361 ST1
Transport BU365 BU360 1/4 +24V
3 3 1 A1 B1 1 1
/POWER_UNIT_200.1F
4 4 2 A2 B2 2 1 2/4
F8.5155.4614.X
5 5 A3 B3 BU362
F8.5155.4216.X
6 6 4 A4 B4 4
5 A5 B5 5
3/4
100MA10 600MA1 600MA2
1 1
GS606-
SOLENOID-VALVE
F7.0424.2164.0
BU366
2
3
4
1
B1
B2
B3
B4
ST123
S1535
BU363 ST1
A1
A2
A3
A4
1 1/4
PUMP+24V
BU364
1
BU123
2
3
4
1 2/4
600MA3
PUMP
3/4
F8.5155.4214.X
2 GS608- 2
BU359
600MA4
VACUUM-PUMP
2
4
5
1
F7.0431.7210.0
ST4
1/5
2/5
4/5
5/5
BU70 BU71
ST2 ST1
*4/4 *4 *4 *4/4
JL1
1234 5678 F8.9889.0535.X
GS604-IP-
ST3
*4/4 TRANSP-0-LS
ST10 F8.9499.6770.X
4A 2A
ST7
*4/4
M601-IP-
TRANSPORT-MOT
F8.5156.4626.X ST5 BU347
BU148[V]
ST1 1/4 1 BR
IO-BUS_TRANS
/FRAME_100.3A
ST22[L] BU22[V] *26
*26/26 2/4 2 M
3 *26 F8.5155.4210.X 3/4 3 OR 3
*26
4/4 4
100MA11 GS602-IP- F8.5155.6140.X
RD YE
TRANSPORT-BD
F8.9499.8140.X
4
4
06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: IP_TRANSPORT_UNIT_600 / 100

0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH Sheet 6
F1.5158.4003.1C
© AGFA
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. of 10 SH

A B C D E F
F8.5156.4610.X
2
/PCI_RACK_300.4F Service
*25
service -BU319
100MA8
M101-POWER-
UNIT-FAN
2
F8.5155.4660.X
M
/POWER_UNIT_200.1F
1 1
Luefter-LE
1
( fan_LE)
BU1
*8/8
ST9
*20/20
ST4 BU419
L7.0460.9074.0 *2/2 *2 J1
LCD F8.5156.4640.X
/PCI_RACK_300.3F
ST12
1/8 ST5 BU417 ST1
GS112/BU12 *20/20 *20/20
2 2/8
3 3/8 BU418
4 4/8
ST375[A]
BU2
GS118-LCD
5 5/8
IO_Bus_PCI F8.5156.4570.X #25 *25/25 DISPLAY
/PCI_RACK_300.3F 6 6/8
GND 7 7/8
F8.8377.3202.X
BU350[K] 8 8/8
ST1
F8.5155.4629.X *26 ST1
*26/26
/CASSETTE_UNIT_700.4I
IO-BUS_CASS 100MA7 14
100MA3
2 12 2
GS114/BU2 ST10
ST2 11
F8.5155.4628.X *26 *20/20
*26/26
/SCAN_OPTIK_UNIT_400.1C 10
IO-BUS_SCAN 100MA4 9
BU348[K] ST3 6
F8.5155.4632.X *26 *26/26
/POWER_UNIT_200.3F 3
IO-BUS_LE 2
100MA5
GS112- 1
BU356[F] LCD-TERMINAL-BD
ST4
F8.5156.4626.X *26 F8.8377.1450.X
*26/26
/IP_TRANSPORT_UNIT_600.3A
IO-BUS_TRANS
100MA6
ST6
*26/26
ST7 1 2 3 6 9 10 11 12 14
F8.5156.4634.X
*26/26
ST5 BU356[K] BU357[K]
*26 ST1
*26/26
GS114-IOBUS-
*26/26
DISTRIB.
3 F8.9499.6020.X 100MA2 100MA1 3
ST319/RJ45
GS116-
1 A1 B1
EMERGENCY-NODE
2 A2 B2
3 A3 B3 F7.0486.1318.X
Adapter
4 A4 B4
ethernet
/PCI_RACK_300.3F 5 A5 B5 ETHERNET
F7.0477.1070.0 6 A6 B6
7 A7 B7
8 A8 B8
KEYPAD F7.5155.1623.0
Interlock
/POWER_UNIT_200.3F
F8.5155.4642.X
1 7 8 1
4
4 BU344 BU345
1 3 4 1
BU343 BU346 General Schematic Project
S101-INTERLOCK-RIGHT
06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: FRAME_100 / 100

0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH Sheet 7
F1.5158.4003.1C
© AGFA
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. of 10 SH

A B C D E F
REVIVE GS632
-P27 -P2 F8.5148.1510.

3/3 1/3
1,5V -LD4#12
2/3 2/3
1,5V MPC5200-PLL -LD5#2
1/3 3/3
5V -LD1#12 -P1#15
*16/16 PM_1
-P38 -P5
1 N Power Supply 3.3V #5/48 #5/48 3,3V -LD2#12 1
CPCI-POWER-BD 8V #2/48 #2/48

2,5V MPC5200 -LD3#2
PE 24V #2/48 #2/48
GS630
-12V 4/48 d8/48 2,5V -LD5#12
L 15V 1/48 d2/48 -LD4#2 -P2#18
1,5V MPC5200 *8/8
-15V 5/48 d10/48 POLYGON-CRPL
1,2V FPGA -LD3#12
5.1V #10/48 #10/48
-P1 -ST12 -BU20 -P21
12V #2/48 #2/48 *64/64 *64/64 *64/64 *64/64 Offboard flash sel -LD2#2
GND #24/48 #24/48
Onboard flash sel -LD1#2 -P1#17
#10/20 RF-TAG_READER
USB 5V -LD1#5
Ethernet receive active -LD1#4
REVIVE-BACKPLANE
-BU13 -P3 -15V -LD19
F8.5148.1470. L L1 F8.5148.1415.0
-BU10 -ST10 -P2#17
Cross reference
1/1 BN 3/3
2
/sREVIVE.3B 3/3 *7/7 2
-A4
1/1 LD test -LD21#11 LCD-TERMINAL
power-rack
F8.5148.1450.
-BU14 -P3 -P1#2
-BU11 PE PE1 1/1 GNYE -ST10 2/3 *64/64 +24V ext -LD14#11
3A flash-prog
/sREVIVE.3B 1/1 250VAC
2/3
GS631
+8V off -LD13#11
-BU15 -P3
-BU12 N N1 1/1 BU -ST10 1/3
/sREVIVE.3B -15V ext -LD17
1/1
-ST363
1/3 -P1#18
#26/52 IO_BUS
GNYE
+15V ext -LD18
-BU16 -BU17
300PE4 +15V -LD20
BK
F8.5148.1475. -LD8#11
F8.5148.1770. +5V TAG
-BU18 -P4
2 -ST18 BK -ST11 2/2
BK -P1#18
2/2 2/2 ATA device slave present -LD1#3 #26/52
M
2/2 -P4 LD_MODUL

1 RD RD 1/2
1/2 FPGA ready -LD12
1/2 1/2
-M10
3 2 BK SLED 1 -LD13 3
M
1 RD SLED 2 -LD14 -P1#4

*8/8
ETHERNET
-W3 SLED 3 -LD15
-M11
40 pol. Flatcable
-BU21 -P1#3
#39/40 *39/39
SLED 4 -LD16
ST1
ST2
300 mA
300 mA -R2#7 -P1#17
-R1#16 #10/20 SERVICE
F8.5148.1485. -P33 -P25 RS232
Power
analog +/- 15V
X *4/4 *4/4
Harddisk T 1A -P1#5
Serial
4 pol. Connection Cable -F1
*4/4 P1/5 - USB-PORT
ST1
ST2
X
USB
for USB flash drive

-HDD2
F8.5148.1495.
4
4
VDE/UL/CSA 1B 40976 12.03.2010 AGHFR USER 20.04.2006 Leith.
- part -
06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
changes 1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
only with
approval 1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: REVIVE_efer / 100
of
FT-LPS 0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH Sheet 8
F1.5158.4003.1C
© AGFA
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. of 10 SH

A B C D E F G H
1 1
-P45 -P39
3/3 1/3
2/3 2/3
1/3 3/3 1,5V -LD4#14
-P36 -P40 1,5V MPC5200-PLL -LD5#14

N Power Supply 3.3V #5/48 #5/48
8V 5V -LD1#17
CPCI-POWER-BD #2/48 #2/48 P1#15
PM_1
PE 24V #2/48 #2/48 3,3V -LD2#13 *16/16
GS630
-12V 4/48 d8/48
2,5V MPC5200 -LD3#14
2 L 15V 1/48 d2/48 2
-15V 5/48 d10/48 2,5V -LD5#13

5.1V #10/48 #10/48
1,5V MPC5200 -LD4#13 P2#18
12V #2/48 #2/48 POLYGON-CTRL
-LD3#13 *8/8
GND #24/48 #24/48 1,2V FPGA
-P46 -ST375 -BU29 P21 Offboard flash sel -LD2#14
*64/64 *64/64 *64/64
*64/64
Onboard flash sel -LD1#13 P1#17
RF-TAG_READER
USB 5V -LD1#15 #10/20
Ethernet receive active -LD1#16
REVIVE-BACKPLANE
-15V -LD29
F8.5148.1470. L -BU23 F8.5148.1415.0 -P42
-BU25 L1 -ST377
Cross reference
1/1 BN 3/3
/REVIVE_efer.2A 3/3 P2#17
-A9
1/1 LD test -LD21#12 LCD-TERMINAL
power-rack
*7/7
PE
-BU22 -P42 P1#2 +24V ext -LD14#12
3 -BU26 PE1 1/1 GNYE -ST377 2/3 3
F8.5148.1450.
3A flash-prog
/REVIVE_efer.2A 1/1 250VAC
2/3 *64/64 +8V off -LD13#12
GS631
-BU24 -P42
-BU27 N N1 1/1 BU -ST377 1/3
/REVIVE_efer.2A -15V ext -LD28
1/1 1/3 P1#18
-ST364 IO_BUS
GNYE
C102923
S5359 +15V ext -LD21 #26/52
-BU31 -BU28
300PE5 +15V -LD27 P1#18
LD_MODUL
BK
F8.5148.1475. #26/52
F8.5148.1770. +5V TAG -LD8#12
-BU32 -P41
2 BK -ST365 BK -ST376 2/2
2/2 2/2 ATA device slave present-LD1#14
M
2/2 -P41
-M13
1 RD RD 1/2
1/2 FPGA ready -LD26
1/2 1/2
2 BK SLED 1 -LD25
-M12
1 RD SLED 2 -LD24
4 P1#4 4
ETHERNET
P1#3 SLED 3 -LD23 *8/8
IDE
-39/39 SLED 4 -LD22
A604852. -BU37 P1
300 mA
7/7 300 mA -R2#8
7/7 P1#17
-R1#17 SERVICE
RS232 #10/20
-Serial analog +/- 15V
SATA HD 2,5"
A604861. T 1A -P1#21
-Power
A604853. -BU30 P25 -F2
*4/4 P1/5 - USB-PORT
4/4 4/4 USB for USB flash drive
sREVIVE
A800495.
5 GS640
5
6
6
06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: sREVIVE / 100

Sheet 9
© AGFA
0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. F1.5158.4003.1C of 10 SH

A B C D E F G H
M708
CPCI-RACK-FAN
M BU7 BU2
*3/3 *3/3
1 2 1 1
ST719 BU888 ST722 BU9
1 1 1 1/2
2 2 2 2/2
BU8 ST2
#48/50 #48/50
CPCI-POWER
F8.5146.1430.
GS307
BU905 MC303 BU903
L 1
L L1
BU882 BU889 ST4
POWER_RACK PE 3A 1 1 1/4
-P24
-P23
-P3#2
-P2#2
-P1#2
Debug *43/43
Debug *43/43
Debug *43/43
Boot Board *64/64
JTAG *10/10
250VAC 2/4
BU904 3 3/4 3J6
N 1 4 4/4 #135/137
2 N N1 2
-U17#2
-F1
-LD1#12
-R1#16
BU887 -LD1#2
PE107 1
-LD1#4
-LD1#5
-LD2#12
3J5 -LD2#2
#135/137 -LD3#12
-LD3#2
-LD4#12
-LD4#2
-LD5#12
-LD8#11
-LD12
-P1#15
-LD13 1/16
3 3
-LD13#11 2/16
8/16
-LD14 9/16
10/16
-LD14#11
15/16
-LD15 3/16
-LD16 4/16 PM_1
7/16
-LD17 11/16
2J5 12/16
#135/137 -LD18
14/16
-LD19 5/16
-LD20 6/16
13/16
-LD21 S/16
-LD21#11
-P2#18
POLYGON_CTRL
*8/8
4 -P1#17 4
2J6 #9/20 RF_READER
#135/137
SH1/20
-P2#17
LCD
*7/7
-P1#18
ST5 SATA HD 2,5" #25/52 I/O BUS
#34/36 -P1 HD SATA SH3/52
A604861.
*7/7
-P1#18
*4/4
#25/52 LD_MODULE
HD POW ER
-P25 SH1/52
5
5
BU3
1/4 -P1#4
-1J4 ETHERNET
2/4 #135/137 -P4 *8/8
3/4
4/4
*135/135 cRevive
A800630.
ST6 -1J2
#68/70 #135/137 GS650
-P1#17
P2/20
P3/20
P5/20
-1J1 P6/20
#135/137 -P10 SERVICE
P7/20
-S1#12
*135/135 P8/20
-S1#2
SH2/20
BACKPLANE
6
6 F7.0486.1342.0 *4/4
GS301 USB 1C ECN/7002751 04.12.2012 AGHFR DATE NAME
-P1#5 General Schematic Project
06.12.2012 AGGBN
CR35-X 5158
1A 40213 04.03.2009 AGHFR APPR.
1 39761 25.07.2008 AGBAH NORM Sheet name: cREVIVE / 100

Sheet 10
© AGFA
0C 39835 10.04.2008 AGBAH
0B 39324 24.11.2006 Leith. F1.5158.4003.1C of 10 SH

HEALTHCARE Accessories
Global Services Organisation
Order-No.: DD+DIS222.06E
CR 35-X
*16BY9U1*
1 Piece 6BY9U MA1
Type 5158
F7.5155.9024.0 CR 25.0
(only needed for production purpose)
Type 5156
ADC SOLO
Type 5155
Fitting Instructions for the Mobile Kit

CM+9 5155 9500 x
This fitting instruction is also enclosed to the accessory “Mobile Kit”.
This document describes the installation of the Mobile Kit, which is

necessary to fix the digitizer on deck when in mobile use.
Necessary time:
approx. 1 hour
Necessary tools:
• 5 mm Allen key
• 6 mm Allen key
• 7 mm socket wrench
• 10 mm wrench
• 13 mm wrench
This fitting instruction replaces DD+DIS233.05E.
Document Node ID: 12403685

printed in Germany eq_06_accessories_e_template_v01
DD+DIS222.06E Accessories
List of contents
1 General Information .....................................................................1

1.1 Introduction .......................................................................................... 1
1.2 Scope of Delivery ................................................................................. 1
1.3 Preparation ........................................................................................... 2
2 Installation Procedure..................................................................2
2.1 Adjust the Wall Mounting Bracket ...................................................... 2
3 Adjust the Ground Plate ..............................................................3

3.1 Fix the Ground Plate and the Wall Mounting Bracket ....................... 3
3.2 Fix the Mounting Bracket to the Digitizer........................................... 4
3.3 Fix the Digitizer to the wall .................................................................. 4
3.4 Security Fix of the Scan Unit............................................................... 5

Edition 1, Revision 0 CR 35-X Chapter 6 / 1

Type 5158 Agfa Company Confidential
1 General Information
1.1 Introduction
Provided with a mobile kit the digitizer can be installed in a van, in a container
or in a vessel. This mobile installation kit is used to fix the machine on deck.
Mobile Kit:
Type Number: 5155 / 153
ABC Code: EBYO1
Spare Parts No.: CM+ 9.5155.9500.x
1.2 Scope of Delivery

• 1 safety bar with screw (1A)
length: 655 mm
• 1 safety bar with screw (1B) SO

LO
length: 605 mm C
AD 3
1 35 +
25
CR CR
(A) (B
)
• 1 mounting block (2). 2
• 1 wall mounting bracket

4
with 2 quick action locks (3).
• 1 bolt with split pin (4). 5
• 1 mounting bracket to be fixed

to the digitizer (6 screws) (5).
• 1 ground plate with mounting

bracket (6).
• 1 set of installation instructions. 6
5158_reg06_001.cdr
figure 1


Accessories DD+DIS222.06E
1.3 Preparation
• Examine thoroughly the path along which the digitizer has to be moved until
it reaches its final location, to guarantee sufficient space to pass all the
doors.
• Make sure that the final location is solid enough to carry the digitizer.
Read carefully the Installation Planning Instructions, chapter 11.
2 Installation Procedure
2.1 Adjust the Wall Mounting Bracket

(1) Remove the side panels of the
digitizer.
(2) Loosen the paneling screws on

the rear of the digitizer.
CAUTION:
The scan unit may be damaged.
Take care that none of the elements
5155P2-A.CDR
fixing the paneling screw
(1 small and 1 large washer, figure 2
1 retaining ring, 1 nut) can fall into the
digitizer.
(3) Fix the mounting block to the

digitizer with a 5 mm Allen key.
Please use the two screw sets
supplied, consisting of 1 allen
screw, 1 washer, 1 retaining
ring and one nut each.
(4) Fix the mounting block to the

wall mounting bracket with the
quick action locks.
figure 3

Chapter 6 / 2 CR 35-X Edition 1, Revision 0

Agfa Company Confidential Type 5158
3 Adjust the Ground Plate
(1) Position the ground plate as

close as possible to the place
where the digitizer is expected
to remain located.
(2) Move the digitizer onto the

ground plate.
(3) Insert the bolt into the guide slot

of the mounting bracket
provided to fix the digitizer on
the ground plate. 5155P1-C.CDR
figure 4
(4) Make sure that the mounting
block touches the wall mounting
bracket.
(5) The mounting bracket of the

ground plate should be
approximately in the middle
position while the screws are
not fixed. Now the ground plate
is in the perfect position.
(6) Mark the corners of the ground

plate with a pencil.
3.1 Fix the Ground Plate and the Wall Mounting Bracket
(1) Remove the bolt from the guide slot and move the digitizer down
from the ground plate.
(2) Select a minimum of 4 holes in the ground plate where you want to
fix it to the floor. You may be guided by the conditions of the floor
where the digitizer is being located.
(3) Fix the ground plate to the floor.
(4) Select a minimum of 4 holes in the wall mounting bracket. You

may be guided by the conditions of the wall where the digitizer is
being fixed.
(5) Fix the wall mounting bracket to the wall.
(6) Examine the solidness of the fixed wall mounting bracket and the
fixed ground plate.


Accessories DD+DIS222.06E
3.2 Fix the Mounting Bracket to the Digitizer

(1) Lift the digitizer to an angle
which allows you to fix the
mounting bracket to the
digitizer. Use the 10 mm
wrench to fix the mounting
bracket tightly (6 screws).
5155P3-A.CDR
figure 5
3.3 Fix the Digitizer to the Wall

(1) Move the digitizer onto the
ground plate again and insert
the mounting block into the wall
mounting bracket.
figure 6
(2) Connect the mounting block to

the wall mounting bracket with
the quick action locks again.
Now screw the quick action
locks to the perfect length. The
perfect length is reached when
the lock snaps softly into the
locking position.
figure 7

Chapter 6 / 4 CR 35-X Edition 1, Revision 0

Agfa Company Confidential Type 5158
(3) Insert the bolt into the guide slot

and the mounting bracket of the
digitizer. This locks the digitizer
to the ground plate.
(4) Attach the split pin to the

provided hole of the bolt.
(5) Fix the 4 screws thoroughly to

connect the mounting bracket
firmly to the ground plate.
figure 8
3.4 Security Fix of the Scan Unit

If the digitizer is being used in a A
mobile location, the scan unit has to
be fixed additionally.
(1) Insert the safety bar into the
provided guides (A) and fix it
with the 7 mm socket wrench
(B).
B
5158_reg06_002.cdr
figure 9


Chapter 8
HEALTHCARE Manufacturing Standard
Imaging Services
Modifications
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document contains an overview of all the technical changes and their
chronological introduction as a production standard. This includes hardware and
software modifications.
Edition. Release
Revision Date
2.0 12-2007 • Initial Release
Document Title
n.a. n.a.


eq_08_modifications_e_template_v02
DD+DIS219.06E Manufacturing Standard Modifications
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


TABLE OF CONTENT
The following modifications of CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 and CR 25.0 - Type 5156 /
105 (as of SN ≥ 6000) are listed in chronological order, the latest modification on top
of the list.
timeline Modification Referenced Documents

2007
August 1. Introduction of High Altitude Vacuum Pump Enclosure: DD+DIS151.07E,
SB No. 02: DD+DIS276.07E
June 2. Introduction of Oberon 3 Board Enclosure: DD+DIS034.07E
April 3. Modification of Brush Stripe complete n.a.
January 4. Modification of Side Panel left n.a.
2006
Dec. 5. Modification of cPCI-Rack n.a.
October 6. Modification of the 5-fold Stepper Motor Board n.a.
SB – Service Bulletin


1 Introduction of High Altitude Vacuum Pump
Reason A modified vacuum pump has been introduced for the use of the
digitizer on sites between 2000 m and 4000 m above sea level.
Product(s)/ The High Altitude Vacuum Pump is not part of series production and
Serial only available as upgrade kit for new installations or already installed
Number(s) digitizers as well as spare part for the replacement of modified
vacuum pumps, which are defective.
Part • Upgrade Kit “High Altitude Vacuum Pump for CR 25.0/CR 35-X”
Number(s) ABC Code: EZKDB
• Spare part “High Altitude Vacuum Pump” CM+9 5158 6130 0
Referenced • Enclosure - Replacement Instructions: High Altitude Vacuum
Document(s) Pump for Use on Sites between 2000 m and 4000 m above Sea
Level, DD+DIS151.07E
• Service Bulletin No. 02, DD+DIS276.07E


2 Introduction of Oberon 3 Board
Reason In respect to the previous Oberon Board, the Oberon 3 Board is

RoHS compliant (Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous
Substances in electrical and electronic equipment).No functional
changes have been made.
Digitizer Software C25_2007 or higher is required when using the
Oberon 3 board. The required Digitizer Software is in scope of the
spare part.
This spare part can be used in RoHS compliant and non-RoHS
compliant Digitizers.
Oberon 3 Board requires Digitizer Software C25_2007 or higher.
Product(s)/ CR 35-X Type 5158:
Serial
SN 2061, 2129, 2131, 2132, 2133, 2134, 2136, 2138, 2142, 2143,
Number(s)
2145, 2149, 2152,
SN ≥ 2155, CW 25/2007
CR 25.0 Type 5156/105:

SN 6211, 6220, 6224, 6225, 6228, 6229, 6231, 6232, 6233, 6236,
6237, 6238, 6239, 6240, 6241, 6242, 6243, 6244,
SN ≥ 6246, CW 25/2007
Part • Spare part “Oberon 3 Board”, CM+9 5146 1501 0
Number(s)
Referenced • Enclosure - Installation Instructions of the Oberon 3 Board,
Document(s) DD+DIS034.07E


3 Modification of Brush Stripe complete
Reason The spare part “Brush stripe complete” has been modified to
prevent from stray light. which could probably influence sensors by
flash light from the erasure unit.
Product(s)/ CR 35-X Type 5158/100:
Serial SN 1744, 1861, 1866
Number(s) SN ≥ 1868, , CW 17/2007
CR 25.0 Type 5156/105:

SN ≥ 6201, CW 17/2007
Part • Spare part “Brush stripe complete” CM+9 5158 2425 1
Number(s)
Referenced n.a.
Document(s)
4 Modification of Side Panel left

Reason The side panel left has been modified to ensure more free space
between photomultiplier and side panel left. This improvement has
been introduced to avoid contact between photomultiplier and side
panel left.
Serial SN ≥ 1001
Number(s)
CR 25.0 Type 5156/105:
SN ≥ 6001
Part • Spare part “Side wall, lhs”, CM+9 5155 1270 4
Number(s)
Referenced n.a.
Document(s)


5 Modification of cPCI-Rack
Reason The power supply unit has been modified to enable the use of hard
disks with higher voltage input.
The modified power supply unit is RoHS compliant.
Serial SN ≥ 1385, CW 52/2006
Number(s)
CR 25.0 Type 5156/105:
SN ≥ 6001, CW 52/2006
Part • Spare part “cPCI-Rack complete, CM+9 5156 1400 1
Number(s) • Spare part “cPCI-Rack assembled”, CM+9 5156 1405 4
Referenced n.a.
Document(s)
6 Modification of the 5-fold Stepper Motor Board
Reason The fixation of the 5-fold stepper motor board has been
changed by introducing new clips to prevent bending of the
board.
Serial
SN ≥ 1048, CW 41/2006
Number(s)
Part The new fixation and the board are included when ordering:
Number(s) spare part “Cassette unit”: CM+9 5156 5000 1
Referenced n.a.
Document(s)


Imaging Services Maintenance
CR 35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
CR 35-X CR 25.0
Type 5158 / 100 Type 5156 / 105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS403.06E.

eq_09_maintenance_e_template_v02
DD+DIS403.06E Maintenance
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.



This document describes all routines and tests to be carried out during maintenance.

Revision Date
Document Title
DD+DIS407.06E


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION ...........................................................................5

1.1 Maintenance Frequency ...........................................................................................................5
1.2 Required Time...........................................................................................................................6
1.3 Required Tools..........................................................................................................................6
1.4 Required Cleaning Material ......................................................................................................6
1.5 Required Spare Parts ...............................................................................................................6
2 MAINTENANCE STEP BY STEP .............................................................................................7

2.1 Diagnostics................................................................................................................................7
2.1.1 Questioning of the Customer ....................................................................................................7
2.1.2 Infocounter Analysis..................................................................................................................7
2.1.3 How to Evaluate the Infocounter...............................................................................................8
2.1.4 Clear Infocounter ......................................................................................................................9
2.1.5 Visual Check .............................................................................................................................9
2.2 Safety Switches ......................................................................................................................10
2.3 Inside.......................................................................................................................................10
2.4 Cassette Unit...........................................................................................................................11
2.5 cPCI Rack ...............................................................................................................................12
2.6 Scan Unit.................................................................................................................................12
2.7 Transport Unit .........................................................................................................................13
2.8 Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................14
2.9 Cassettes ................................................................................................................................16
2.10 Image Plates ...........................................................................................................................17
3 CHECKING THE IMAGE QUALITY........................................................................................17

3.1 Test Cycles .............................................................................................................................17
3.2 Exposure of a Flatfield ............................................................................................................17
3.3 Evaluation of a Flatfield...........................................................................................................20
4 COMPLETION OF MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................21


1 General Maintenance Information
NOTE:
These maintenance instructions must be considered confidential.
To ensure quality and functional reliability of the system all the points listed below
(minimum maintenance points) must be carried out.
• The maintenance points have been arranged in a chronologically suitable order

to make the work routines as efficient as possible.
The sequence of the maintenance points in the checklist (see appendix) is
identical with these maintenance instructions.
• If there is a detailed description for a certain maintenance point in the service
documentation, this will be noted in the column "details".
• During the maintenance procedure always consider the safety instructions, see
service documentation chapter 1 / 1.
• Please check if it is necessary to include country specific regulations as
additional maintenance points!
NOTE:
Only for Systems with DRA Contract:
In systems with DRA Contract the infocounters are checked and evaluated in regular
intervals by the GSC. If there is an indication of an upcoming defect, this is noted in
the DRA Report and sent to the respective NSO with instructions for measures
possibly required on the machine.
Therefore we recommend to contact your NSO about this subject before
maintenance, in order to perform these recommended measures in addition to the
"must" maintenance points.
1.1 Maintenance Frequency
The maintenance has to be carried out:

• every 12.000 cycles
or
• once a year


1.2 Required Time
approximately 2 h
1.3 Required Tools
Order number Description

CM+9 5155 1015 2 Cu Filter (for exposure of test images)
CM+9 5145 3055 0 CD ROM with test images
Commercially available service PC
Commercially available flashlight
1.4 Required Cleaning Material

In addition to the standard equipment the following cleaning substances are required:

CM+9 9999 0895 0 vacuum cleaner
CM+9 9999 0896 0 dirt bags for vacuum cleaner (10 x)
ABC-Code: EFOJH ADC cleaner
commercially available dust brush
commercially available lint-free cloth
commercially available soft dust brush
1.5 Required Spare Parts

The following assortment represents a complete copy of the
Maintenance-assortment (CM+0 5156 0100 733)
according to the R I M L -assortment categorization in the spare parts list:

CM+9 0450 6553 0 10 x erasure lamp, 100 W, 12 V
CM+9 5145 9100 0 1 x roller (for cassette unit)


2 Maintenance Step by Step
2.1 Diagnostics
2.1.1 Questioning of the Customer
• Ask the customer for any problem that appeared since the last maintenance.
2.1.2 Infocounter Analysis

• Service PC, required to analyze the infocounter
(1) Insert an empty floppy in the floppy drive

of the cPCI rack.
See figure 1. MG3000
Infocounter
(2) In the service menu select

<3 Save on floppy>
< 1 Infocounter>
(3) When copying is finished remove the
floppy from the floppy drive and insert it in
the Service PC.
5155_reg09_002.cdr
figure 1
(4) Unzip the file "5156_xxxx_icn.zip"
(xxxx stands for the serial number).
(5) Start an editor (e.g. notepad or wordpad).
(6) Open the file "\D_\infocounter\0\infocounter.txt".
(7) Evaluate the infocounter file.


2.1.3 How to Evaluate the Infocounter
Evaluation of infocounters.txt
What to check in the Comment
infocounter
1.1 Device Info: Serial Compare device serial number to chapter 8
number and “Manufacturing Standard Modifications” and
Installation date chapter 10 “Service Bulletins” to determine whether the
device is modified or requires a modification.
1.4 Software Info It is recommended to have the latest software installed.
Before you upgrade to a new software, make sure that
your hardware is up to date.
2.2 Throughput For throughput most important are the cycles per day.
They usually count between 30 and 100.
3.3 Hardware By comparing the status of the device with the available
Modification History “Field Modifications”, chapter 7, the exact hardware status
can be determined.
3.4 Software modification By checking the software modification history it can be
history determined, whether a recent software upgrade solved a
problem, that occurred quite often in the error list.
4.6 Laser power Check that laser power is constant: no more than 1 mW
difference in between two entries. If the value is higher,
run system check.
4.7 Polygon Jitter If amplitude exceeded 300 milli-pixel, check accurately
Monitoring the image quality on the processing station.
The entries are only indications and can only be
interpreted as one symptom which is conducted to the
optic module.


Evaluation of infocounters.txt
What to check in the Comment
infocounter
5.3 Retries Many retries (> 1%) have to be investigated: They usually
lead to less throughput of the device. Compare it with
frequent error codes.
5.7 Error History Check the errors occurred since last maintenance, how
often they appeared as well as the CBF (cycles between
failures) of these errors. This gives an overview of the
current status of the machine.
Compare frequently occurring errors to the error hit list,
chapter 3.3, and take actions.
5.8 Error List Relatives Troubleshoot these errors with the help of the technical
and documentation, chapter 3.3, “Troubleshooting”.
5.9 Error List Total
2.1.4 Clear Infocounter

(1) Clear the infocounter to refresh relative counters.
2.1.5 Visual Check
• flashlight
(1) Check overall condition of the machine – outside and inside – for obvious
changes or damage.


2.2 Safety Switches

(1) Check both interlock switches
(A) and (B), figure 2.
Note.
The machine starts up only, if both
B
interlocks are pressed.
Note:
The power supply is interrupted, when the 5155_reg09_003.cdr
front door (interlock A) is opened.
figure 2
2.3 Inside
• vacuum cleaner
• lint free cloth
(1) Vacuum the inside of the digitizer and wipe it.


2.4 Cassette Unit

• screw driver
• dust brush
• roller (CM+9 5145 9100 0)
• toothed belt (CM+9 5145 5195 1)
Opener (1) Remove panel on right hand side of

Mechanism the digitizer.
(2) Clean the opener mechanism with a
soft dust brush.
5155_reg09_004.cdr
figure 3
(1) Check roller (A) for visible wear and
replace if necessary (see figure 4).
(2) To replace the roller, remove the
retaining ring (B) and pull the roller
off its shaft.
(3)
NOTE:
In case of recorded cassette feeding
problems replace the roller anyway and in
any case replace it once a year.
B
A
5155_reg09_005.cdr
figure 4
Belt (1) Exchange the transport belt once a year.


2.5 cPCI Rack

• vacuum cleaner
cPCI Fan (1) Check the fan function of the cPCI rack fan by hand.
There is no air filter to be replaced.
General (2) Remove visible dust and dirt deposits using a vacuum cleaner.
2.6 Scan Unit

• soft cloth
• ADC cleaner (if not available, use water)
• Allen key 3 mm
Scan (1) Remove the transport unit.

Rollers (see chapter 3.5).
(2) Clean all scan rollers (use a soft
cloth and ADC cleaner).
IMPORTANT:
The scan rollers have to be cleaned in
place and must not be removed.
To move the scan rollers just turn the
drive of the slow scan motor manually
(C), see figure 5.
Discharge (1) Check the discharge brush (A)

Brush for visible wear and heavy dirt.
Clean them by hand or replace
5155_reg09_006.cdr
(B), if necessary.
figure 5


2.7 Transport Unit

• soft cloth
• suction cups (CM+9 5145 6550 2)
Filter (2) Pull the hoses off the filter.

(3) Unscrew the filter (A).
(4) Shake the micro-filter (B) and
blow it clean.
(5) Check the O-ring for cracks B
and, if necessary, remove the
A
complete filter with its housing
(CM+9 0362 6094 0).
5155_reg09_012.cdr
figure 6
Suction (1) Check the suction cups

Cups position.
(2) Clean the suction cups (C) with
ADC cleaner. A
(3) In case of vacuum problems,
check the suction cups by
bending up the edges (check
for tears) and replace if
necessary.
5155_reg09_007.cdr
figure 7


2.8 Erasure Unit

• soft cloth
• 10 x 100 W lamps (CM+9 0450 6553 0)
Lamps (1) Open the front door. B

(2) Pull the erasure unit out and
remove it.
(3) Remove pane (A).
(4) Pull all lamps carefully out of their
sockets (B).
A
(5) Check all parts of the erasure unit
for damage.
5155_reg09_008.cdr
figure 8
(6) Dust the following parts of the erasure unit
• reflector
• input and output opening of the air stream (protection grid)
• KG2 filter (A).
• front pane (B) (see figure 9).
IMPORTANT:
In case of persistent dirt, use ADC cleaner for cleaning all surfaces except the inner side
of the large glass plate. This side must not be cleaned with anything wet since a gelatin
layer is attached to it.


(7) Check the KG2 filter (A) for

damage and replace if necessary.
A
(8) Insert the new lamps carefully.
5155_reg09_009.cdr
figure 9
NOTE:
Do not touch the glass bulbs with your bare fingers. Use a soft cloth to insert the
lamps.
Fan (9) Check fan of erasure unit for dust and clean if necessary.
(10) Re-insert the erasure unit.


2.9 Cassettes
• aluminum label (CM+9 8300 1131 0)
Visual (1) Check the most frequently used

Check
cassettes and image plates for
damage. If damage is noticed,
check further cassettes.
ALU LABEL
(2) Check the following items of the
cassette:
- Outside condition
- Hinges
- Locking 5156_reg09_010.cdr
- Opening leaf springs
figure 10
- Aluminum label
(3) Attach missing aluminum label.
NOTE:
The digitizer needs the aluminum label to recognize ADC cassettes.


2.10 Image Plates
Visual (1) Check if there are scratches on the surface.

Check
(2) Check if edges are loose as an indication for mechanical problems at IP
transport.
3 Checking the Image Quality
NOTE:
Check the last 20 to 40 images on the VIPS Processing Station / ADC QS Server
Station for artifacts or other image quality problems.
3.1 Test Cycles
NOTE:
Repeat the following procedure for all formats on site!
(1) Carry out four test cycles with each format of the cassettes.
3.2 Exposure of a Flatfield
• Flatfield
(1) Print the flatfield sample provided by the digitizer:

• Start the service program.
• Select from the service menu
<7 Checks>
<2 Send image>
<2 Flatfield Calibration pattern>
<3 Flatfield Banding pattern>
Print the flatfields "Calibration" and "Banding" via the processing station
(Window Setting of 0.6, without changing the Level Setting).


(2) Expose a new image plate:

Rotating
• Place the cassette in length direction Anode X-ray tube
to the
X-ray tube
(see figure 11).
• Set the following exposure
parameters:
− dose 10 µGy
(result of setting:
12 mAs, 75 kVp,
1.3 m distance) 5156_reg09_011.cdr
− 1.5 mm Cu filter with small focus figure 11

• Turn cassette by 180°.
• Expose plate a second time by using
the same parameters.
NOTE:
Notice, that all exposure parameters are approximate values.
(3) Identify the cassette on the ID Station (figure 12):

• In the <Patient name> field, type a name and a cassette format,
e.g. Flatfield 18 x 24.
• In the <First name> field, type the serial number of the digitizer,
e.g. SN1356.
• In the <Birth date> field, type the current date,
e.g. 02012001 (use date format DDMMYYYY for day/month/year).
• In the <Study Group> list, click <SERVICE>.
• In the <Study Type> list, click <system diagnosis>.
• In the <Substudy> list, click <Flatfield>.
• Confirm the Exposure class <200>.
NOTE:
Make sure that the outlined areas are filled in as shown in the example.


(4) Insert the cassette into the digitizer and print the image on a printer with a
Window Setting of 0.6 without changing the Level Setting.
figure 12


3.3 Evaluation of a Flatfield

(1) Inspect the developed image for homogeneity:
Compare the prints of the flatfield sample with your exposed flatfield at a light
box.
• If there are no lines visible or the effects are less than on the example, the
image quality is all right.
• If there are unacceptable effects, compare with the following sketches.
Calibration lines
Blurred dark lines in slow scan direction on the
flatfield
(see figure 13).
• Expose another flatfield and compare it
again with the sample.
If there are still unacceptable effects, you have
to redo shading calibration as described in
chapter 3.6.
Expose another flatfield and compare it again
with the sample. figure 13
NOTE:
If there are still unacceptable effects, please contact the Support Center.
Banding
Fine sharp white or gray lines in fast scan
direction on the flatfield
(see figure 14).
• Check diagnostic images.
figure 14


NOTE:
Dust
Fine sharp lines in slow scan direction on the
flatfield
(see figure 15).
• Check if scanner is dusty. If yes, use the
scan brush to remove it. Expose another flat
field and compare it again with the sample.
figure 15
NOTE:
4 Completion of Maintenance
(1) Confirm the maintenance by signing the checklist.

(2) Make a backup of the system on floppy.
(3) Inform the customer about what was done during the maintenance and which
repairs need to be done in next future.


Copyright  2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert NV

Agfa Company Confidential

Chapter 9
HEALTHCARE Maintenance
Imaging Services
Maintenance Checklist
CR 35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document contains the Maintenance Checklist.

Revision Date
Document Title
DD+DIS407.06E


eq_09_maintenance-checklist_e_template_v02
Maintenance
DD+DIS403.06E Maintenance Checklist
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


Maintenance
1 Maintenance Checklist
Work Instruction for order no. SN Film cycles
The maintenance has to be carried out:

Once a year or every 12.000 cycles.
NOTE:
Maintenance must be carried out according to the maintenance instructions
DD+403.06E
Maintenance Step by Step Done

Diagnostics • Ask customer about problems
• Read out the info counters, analyse them and clear
them afterwards
• Check visually the overall condition
Safety Switches • Check function of both safety switches
Inside • Vacuum the inside and wipe it
Cassette Unit • Clean opener mechanism
• Check roller for visible wear and exchange if necessary
• Exchange belt once a year
cPCI Rack • Check function of the cPCI rack fan manually

• Remove dust and dirt
Scan Unit • Clean scan-rollers with ADC Cleaner
(do not remove!)
• Check discharge brush and clean or replace it if
necessary
Transport Units • Clean micro filter
• Check suction cups position, clean them with ADC
Cleaner and exchange suction cups if necessary


Maintenance
Maintenance Step by Step Done

Erasure Unit • Remove dust from reflector, input and output opening of
air stream, KG2 filter, outer front panel
• Check the KG2 filter
• Exchange lamps every maintenance
• Clean fan, if necessary
Cassettes • Check the following items of the cassette:
outside condition, hinges, locking, opening leaf springs,
aluminum label
• Attach missing aluminum labels
Image Plates • Check if there are scratches on the surface

• Check if edges are loose
Checking the Image Quality Done

General • Check the last 20 to 40 images on the VIPS / ADC QS
• Carry out test cycles, four with each format
• Print flatfield sample provided by the digitizer
• Expose a flatfield
• Evaluate the flatfield and carry out respective actions
Completion of the maintenance Done

General • Confirm the maintenance
• Make a backup of the system on floppy
• Inform the customer about maintenance and which
repairs are necessary


Maintenance
Remarks:
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
............................................................. .........................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician Customer


Imaging Services Service Bulletins
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
► Please note
Service Bulletins are not part of the Service Manual for Download.
Please download the Service Bulletins from the GSO Library:

MEDNET GSO Æ Computed Radiography Æ CR Digitizers Æ
CR 35-X Æ Service Bulletin

service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v01
DD+DIS219.06E Service Bulletins
intentionally left blank

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 35-X Type 5158/100 Chapter 10 / 2

02-2008 CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 as of SN ≥ 6000 Agfa Company Confidential
Imaging Services Installation Planning
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
CR 35-X CR 25.0
Type 5158 / 100 Type 5156 / 105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS402.06E.

06-2014 Printed in Germany Document Node ID: 12403497
eq_11_install-planning_e_template_v08
1
1 2 3
DD+DIS402.06E Installation Planning
► Manufacturer
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
such services.
NOTE:


1 2 3
This document contains all planning data including the required measures to be carried
out on site prior to the machine delivery.
This chapter is divided into:
 construction planning data
 technical connection and performance data
 safety instructions, listing of certificates

Revision Date
2.1 06-2014  Required free Space 4.1.3
 Conditions during Operation 5.2
 Network Connection 6.4
 Operating Current 7.2
 Laser Data 7.4
 Interface Data 7.5
 Safety standards 8
Document Title
DD+DIS407.06E


1 2 3
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 SCOPE OF DELIVERY ............................................................................................................6

2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR INSTALLATION ..............................................................................6
3 SYSTEM OVERVIEW...............................................................................................................7
4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS AND TRANSPORT PATH ...............................................................8
4.1 Required free Space .................................................................................................................8
4.1.1 CR 35-X Standalone .................................................................................................................8
4.1.2 CR 35-X with CRUS..................................................................................................................9
4.1.3 Required free Space when Digitizer is set up in Patient Examination Room .........................10
4.2 Machine Dimensions...............................................................................................................11
4.3 Transport Path ........................................................................................................................12
5 CLIMATIC AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS..............................................................................12

5.1 Conditions during Transport and Storage...............................................................................12
5.2 Conditions during Operation ...................................................................................................13
6 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................14

6.1 External Fuse Protection.........................................................................................................14
6.2 Connection Cables..................................................................................................................14
6.3 Power Connection...................................................................................................................15
6.4 Network Connection in the Installation Room.........................................................................15
7 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................16
7.1 Type Overview ........................................................................................................................16
7.2 Electrical Data .........................................................................................................................16
7.3 Packing Dimensions ...............................................................................................................16
7.3.1 Package ..................................................................................................................................16
7.3.2 Weights ...................................................................................................................................17
7.3.3 Transport Conditions...............................................................................................................17
7.4 Laser Data...............................................................................................................................17
7.5 Interface Data..........................................................................................................................17
8 SAFETY STANDARDS...........................................................................................................18


1 2 3
9 INSTALLATION PLANNING CHECKLIST..............................................................................19

9.1 Checklist..................................................................................................................................20
10 FORM TO FILL IN THE NETWORK PARAMETERS .............................................................21


1 2 3
NOTE:
This document describes the Installation Planning of the CR 35-X Digitizer,
Type 5158 / 100 and CR 25.0 Type 5156/105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)
For the Installation Planning of other CR devices, refer to the respective Installation
Planning documents (see MedNet).
1 Scope of Delivery
Pieces Description
1 Digitizer
1 Installation Instructions
1 Installation Report
1 User Manual
1 Reference Manual
1 Certificates
2 Mains Cable (1 x US- connector, 1 x Euro-DIN connector)
1 UTP network cable (2 x RJ45 connection)
1 CD User Documentation
1 Cu filter
1 Al filter
2 Required Tools for Installation
Pieces Description Order No.

1 CD-ROM with test images CM+9 5145 3055 0


1 2 3
3 System Overview
figure 1
The above example shows the Digitizer connected to a Windows based

NX Workstation.


1 2 3
4 Machine Dimensions and Transport Path

4.1 Required free Space
4.1.1 CR 35-X Standalone
150 (59.05")
5(1.97")
45 (17.72")
5 (1.97")
Digitizer
75 (29.53")
200 (78.74")
120 (47.24")
5155_reg11_002.CDR
figure 2
Free space as shown in the drawing must be reserved for repair and maintenance.
Less space may result in longer repair times!
All dimensions in cm (inch).
Recommended free space for the ventilation, power and

Ethernet connection.


1 2 3
4.1.2 CR 35-X with CRUS
figure 3
Free space as shown in the drawing must be reserved for repair and maintenance.
Less space may result in longer repair times!
Recommended free space for the ventilation, power and

Ethernet connection.


1 2 3
4.1.3 Required free Space when Digitizer is set up in Patient Examination Room
IMPORTANT:
When setting up the machine, the following must be kept in mind during the room
planning:
The classification of this product according to the medical electrical equipment
standard IEC 60601-1 requires installation outside the patient environment.
For definition of patient environment see dimensions below.
R
Patient vicinity
h
Patient vicinity
patient_vicinity.cdr
R = 1.5 m / 4.9 feet (EN 60601-1) or 1.83 m / 6 feet (UL 60601-1)

h = 2.5 m / 8.2 feet (EN 60601-1) or 2.29 / 7.5 feet (UL 60601-1)
figure 4


1 2 3
4.2 Machine Dimensions
figure 5


1 2 3
4.3 Transport Path
It must be possible to transport the digitizer Minimum doorwidth 47 cm (18.50")

through all hallways and doors up to the
installation site.
The machine dimensions are 134 cm x 45 cm x 75 cm
(H x W x D)
52.76" x 17.72" x 29.53"
(H x W x D)
Packed on a pallet 80 cm x 100 cm (31.5" x 39.37")
Minimum space to remove the digitizer off the 200 cm x 350 cm (79" x 138")
pallet
NOTE:
Once the machine is unpacked, it can be moved to the installation site on four mounted
rollers.
5 Climatic and ambient Conditions

5.1 Conditions during Transport and Storage
NOTE:
All specifications in this chapter apply on unpacked digitizer.
Temperature and Humidity

Ambient temperature 15°C min. / 59°F min.
30°C max. / 86°F max.
20°C ideal / 68°F ideal
Rate of change of temperature 0.5°C per min. / 0.9°F per min.
Relative Humidity 15 % min.
(at 25°C / 77°F ambient 80 % max.
temperature) 40 - 50 % ideal


1 2 3
Light Tightness
Tightness SALMIN still met at 2500 lux ambient light
NOTE:
The digitizer must not be operated in direct sunlight exposure.
Throughput (scan mode fast)

Throughput 71 (for size 18 cm x 24 cm)
(Image plates per hour) 48 (for size 35 cm x 43 cm)
Cassette Return Time

Time between entry of cassette < 51 s (for size 18 cm x 24 cm)
and return of erased cassette < 75 s (for size 35 cm x 43 cm)
(seconds)
Floor Conditions
Horizontal Alignment Digitizer works without leveling,
horizontal alignment is not required.
Nevertheless, the digitizer should be run
preferably in a horizontal position.
Take care that the digitizer can not tilt at
the installation site.
Magnetic Fields
Maximal permissible magnetic according to EN 61000-4-8: Level 5
field in the room
Emissions
Noise level during scanning max. 65 dB (A)
stand-by mode / idle max. 45 dB (A)
5.2 Conditions during Operation
Barometric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Related altitude on site 0 m to 3000 m


1 2 3
6 Electrical Connections
6.1 External Fuse Protection
Fuse Rated voltage (single phase)

maximal line fuse 16 A 240 V, + 10 %
maximal line fuse 16 A 230 V, + 10 %
maximal line fuse 15 A 120 V, + 10 % (e.g. USA)
maximal line fuse 15 A 100 V, + 10 % (e.g. Japan)
6.2 Connection Cables
Two mains cables are included as standard delivery:

 USA/Japan: NEMA-5-15P
 Europe: CEE(7)VII 250 V/16 A
One network cable is included as standard delivery

 UTP network cable, 5 m long, (2 x RJ45 connection)


1 2 3
6.3 Power Connection

Single phase connection, operable on 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
IMPORTANT:
The digitizer has a voltage selector at its rear side. Voltage adaptation has to be checked
prior to first operation.
If the voltage adaptation is not correct, take a screw driver and turn the switch
(1, figure 6) to correct position.
1 Voltage selector
Voltage can be adapted to 100 /
120 / 230 - 240 V. The default
setting is
230 - 240 V
2 Mains connection
Put in the correct mains cable
(delivered in the enclosure box)
1
2 g11
_0 04.c
dr
5_re
515
figure 6
NOTE:
If the CR 35-X shall operate at 240 V, 60 Hz, use a phase to phase centre tap wall
outlet. Otherwise the leakage current will rise over 0.5 mA.
6.4 Network Connection in the Installation Room
The network connection in the installation room has to comply with IEC 60950.


1 2 3
7 Specifications
7.1 Type Overview
Digitizer / Type
CR 35-X 5158 / 100
CR 25.0 5156 / 105 (as of SN ≥ 6000)
7.2 Electrical Data
Rated Voltage [~V] 100 V 15 A

120 V 12 A
230 - 240 V 7A
Frequency [Hz] 50 / 60
Power consumption [W] Standby approx. 400 W
Maximum approx. 1400 W
Leakage current  0.5 mA
7.3 Packing Dimensions

7.3.1 Package
Packed on a pallet the size is:
Height 160 cm (63")
Width 80 cm (31.5")
Depth 100 cm (39.4")


1 2 3
7.3.2 Weights
Digitizer without package approx. 215 kg
Digitizer with package approx. 275 kg
NOTE:
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the digitizer.
7.3.3 Transport Conditions
Temperature -25 °C / -13 °F for 72 hrs.

+55 °C / 131 °F for 96 hrs.
Relative Humidity 5 % to 95 %
7.4 Laser Data
Laser Classification Class 1

Laser diode power 80 mW
Laser diode classification Class IIIb
Laser wavelength 640-670 nm
Laser beam deflection frequency 120 up to 170 Hz
Laser beam divergence 12 mrad
7.5 Interface Data
Interface to NX workstation Ethernet, RJ45 connector (female),

10/100 Mbit/s autosensing *, shielding
CAT5
* Gigabit Ethernet is not supported.


1 2 3
8 Safety Standards
The digitizer complies with:
General  IEC 60601-1: 2005

 EN 60601-1: 2006
 EN 60601-1: 1990 / A1:1993, A2:1995, A13:1996
 EN 60601-1-2: 2001
 ES 60601-1 1st Edition;
CAN CSA 22.2 no. 60601-1-08
 IEC 60601-1: 1988/A1 :1991, A2 :1995
 IEC 60601-1-1 / EN 60601-1-1
 UL 60601-1: 2003
 CAN / CSA C22.2 No.601.1-M90
Laser  EN 60825-1: 1994 / A1:2002, A2:2001
 DHHS/FDA 21 CFR, Parts 1040.10 and 1040.11
 ANSI Z 136-1980
Additional  EN ISO 14971:2000
 EN 1041:1998
 EN 980:1996/A1


1 2 3
9 Installation Planning Checklist

In order to avoid any unnecessary delays during the installation and the machine start-
up, the following points of the checklist below should be carried out prior to the
installation.
Check and discuss all the required measures for the installation by means of this
checklist. Remarks on the individual items may be made on the back of the list.
We ask you to give this checklist to your local Agfa representative.
Customer: ........................................................................................
.................................
Department: ........................................................................................
.................................
System ........................................................................................
components: .................................
........................................................................................
.................................
........................................................................................
.................................
........................................................................................
.................................
........................................................................................
.................................
Desired .......................... Signed: .............................................

installation date: .......................... Signature
.......
Remarks:


1 2 3
9.1 Checklist
Subject OK NOK
Required external Fixed connection via an all-pole  
connections main switch or connection via plug
and socket approx. 30 cm from the
floor.
Cables
USA/Japan: NEMA-5-15P
Europe: CEE(7)VII 250 V / 16 A
Mains connection Appointment with the house  
electrician or authorized electrician
for the mains connection has been
made?
Network connection Ethernet connection (Twisted pair)  
prepared?
Direct Remote Remote Access must be  
Access guaranteed!
Transport path Transport to the installation site,
unpacking and taking the machine
off the pallet must be done by the
carrier.
Transport path:
Minimum doorwidth 47 cm
(18.50")
Way:
.......................................................
...................................................  
Free space for taking the machine
off the pallet defined?
200 cm x 350 cm (79" x 138")
Place:
.......................................................
..................................................  


1 2 3
10 Form to fill in the Network Parameters
Digitizer Example 1st Digitizer 2nd Digitizer Remarks

hostname NX
ip_addr. 192.9.200.199
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title NX
Station Name * NX
NX Workstation Example 1st Server 2nd Server Remarks

Station Station
Server Station
hostname NX
ip_addr. 192.9.200.202
subnet_mask
default router
AE_title NX
AE_title ID-
Viewer
Station Name * NX
ID - Viewer Example 1st ID-Viewer 2nd ID-Viewer Remarks

hostname ID207
ip_addr. 192.9.200.207
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title ID207
Station Name * ID207
NX Workstation 192.9.200.202
to connect to or NX
= main components


1 2 3
NX Workstation Example 1st Client 2nd Client Remarks

Station Station
hostname NX206
ip_addr. 192.9.200.206
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title ID-Viewer
NX Workstation to 192.9.200.202
connect to or NX
Hard Copy Example 1st HCP 2nd HCP Remarks

Printer
hostname dsaxys
ip_addr. 12.10.68.41
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title CT2
Station Name * CT2_ARC
RIS-System Remarks
hostname
ip_addr.
Subnet_mask
default router
AE_title
Station Name *
*) Friendly name (Station name) appears in the USER interface
Site filled in by Date


Imaging Services Glossary
CR 35-X
Type 5158 /100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 /105
(as of SN ≥ 6000)

This document contains explanations of product specific terms and abbreviations used
in the service documentation.

Revision Date
Document Title
DD+DIS407.06E


eq_12_glossary_e_template_v02
DD+DIS219.06E Glossary
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


1 Glossary
Term Shord Description
µGy Micro Gray – x-ray dose

1Gy= 0.87 x 10 –2 J/kg
A / D Converter Analog Digital Converter; the part that translates an analog
signal into a digital signal, which can be handled by
computers.
ADC Agfa Diagnostic Center
AE – title Application Entity
AOS Adonis Operating System
Operating system for Agfa CPU's (Gemini, Goliath, David)
APIP Agfa Picture Archiving Protocol
AUI Attachment Unit Interface (External „Box“ to connect to a
network)
AS Archive Station
BOL Begin Of Line; Sensor for exact positioning the scan surface
along the x-axis. A PIN diode is hit by the laser beam before it
reaches the image plate. The Pin diode creates a digital
signal, called begin of line signal. The distance (time)
between this signal and the IP must be adjusted.
BOS Begin Of Scan;
Browser Software that provides an interface to the World Wide Web
BSP Boot Support Package: boot program for Agfa CPU's
Calibration Procedure on ADC to make a homogeneous exposure look
like one on film. Algorithm to counterbalance irregularities in
the scanner of ADC.
CAS Clinical Application Specialist
CCM Configuration and Customization Manager (Tool to edit the
configuration file adc.cpf)
Collimation Determination of the region in the image where the interesting
data is at. On that region the image processing is applied..
Controller Is connected ahead the laser recorder. The controller is
responsible for the image reception from the diagnostic
equipment, the image processing, layout of the images on the
film, and image transmission to the machine.
cPCI compact Peripheral Component Interconnect – bus system
used in CR85-X


CPF – file Customization Parameter File; file that contains settings for
all parameters that can be modified to configure an ADC
System according to local needs.
CPU Central Processing Unit.
CR Computed Radiography
CR Quality System Agfa’s CR Processing Station software
CU-Filter Copper Filter, used for control of image quality
DAC Digital Analog Converter
Decomposition The original image is being split up in a set of bandpass-
filtered images
Diagnostic Logger Tool on ADC to keep a lot of reduced images with the
corresponding image data on the HD.
DICOM Digital Imaging and COmmunications in Medicine;
Dose, x-ray dose = kV x mA x sec see also µGy = Micro Gray

Dosimeter Device to measure x-ray dose
DR Direct Radiography
DRA Direct Remote Access (external product name: AGFATEC
LINK)
Dynamic Range Exposure range in which ADC can get usable image data.
Ethernet A network standard for the hardware and data link levels.
FSE Field Service Engineer
FTP File Transfer Protocol.
The Internet service that transfers files from one computer to
another. (Program used for transmission of files in the
Internet)
Grid to reduce scattered radiation
to increase sharpness
GSC Global Support Center
GUI Graphical User Interface
HT power supply High Tension power supply
HCP Hard Copy Printer
HDD Hard Disk Drive
Heel Effect inhomogeneous exposure
HiRes High Resolution: pixel size = 100 micrometer


HIS Hospital Information System

Histogram graphical display of the distribution of gray levels
HUB (Ethernet) box to interconnect network hosts with Twisted Pair cable.
Also called concentrator.
HUB (in AGFA Switchbox (Hard- or Software) which switches or multiplexes
devices) different channels, e.g. AMDI and Service Channel.
I/O BUS Input / Output BUS.
System consisting of a defined cable, cable connection, and
signal for the parallel transmission of control data. The
machine uses a bus system of 8 V level and 26 parallel lines.
ID Station IDENTIFICATION Station
IMOS IMAGE MONITOR SOFTWARE -Æ succession for SMA
Internet The global computer network, composed of thousands of
Wide Area Networks (WANs) and Local Area Networks
(LANs), that uses TCP/IP to provide world-wide
communication to homes, schools, businesses, and
governments. The World Wide Web runs on the Internet.
IP for ADC: Image Plate (phosphor plate)
IP Image Processing
IP (Internet Protocol) Internet software that divides data into
packets for transmission over the Internet. Computers must
run IP to communicate across the Internet. See also TCP.
IP-Address (Internet Protocol Address) The standard method which
identifies an internet connected computer.
Java A general-purpose programming language created by Sun
Microsystems. Java can be used to create Java applets. A
Java program is downloaded from the Web server and
interpreted by a program running on the machine containing
the Web browser.
Java applet A short program written in Java that is attached to a World
Wide Web page and executed by the browser machine.
JavaScript A cross-platform, World Wide Web scripting language
developed by Netscape Communications. JavaScript code is
inserted directly into the HTML page.
LAN Local Area Network. Network technology, designed to
connect computers over short distances. It is possible to
connect the LAN with the Internet or to make a configuration
into an intranet.
Laser Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation:
LCD Liquid Crystal Display


LED Light Emitting Diode; Semi conductor emitting light

Leeds Phantom Image Plate to check the technical image quality of the ADC.
The Leeds Phantom was developed for Agfa by the
University of Leeds.
Low Pass Filtering Butterworth filter in SAB – board to eliminate frequencies >
250 kHz.
LUT Look Up Table
MD – Plate AGFA MD Æ Medium Definition Image Plate
MFA Machine Factor A
Machine specific value indicating the photo multiplier
sensitivity
MFA is the log of the PM high voltage which results in a scan
average level SAL1800 at a given dose of 1mR (~20 µGy)
and a speed class 200
MFB Machine Factor B
MIMOSA Medical IMage Operating System Agfa; Agfa's workstation
operating software
MODEM MODULATOR DEMODULATOR – device to connect via
telephone line to another computer.
Monitor – level lowest software level on CPU (like BIOS on DOS systems)
stored on EEPROM
mR milli Röntgen, measure for x-ray dose
1 mR corres. 8.7 µGy
MS-Board Multy Supply Board; is part of the Power Unit, detects supply
voltage, controls the mechanical periphery of the digitizer and
protects the stepper motor boards.
MUSICA MUltiple Scale Image Contrast Amplification;
Agfa's image processing software
Network location In a URL, the unique name that identifies an Internet server.
A network location has two or more parts, separated by
periods, as in my.network.location. Also called host name and
Internet address.
Node Nodes in the I/O bus system = printed circuit board in the I/O
bus.
Nullmodem RS 232 (RS242) cable with crossed Transmit / Receive Line
NVE Name value file editor; editor system for parameter


NX NX is Agfa’s new standalone CR Processing Station for:

image acquisition, identification, image processing and image
transmission of digitized images received from a digitizer
It prepares these images for diagnostic use and sends them
to a printer, an archive or a diagnostic station
OBERON board CPU in Agfa digitizers, successor of ARIEL board
OLUT Output Look-Up Table
OS Operating System
Password A text string that allows a user access to an Internet service,
if the service requires it.
Photomultiplier Tube Photo Multiplier Tube: opto – electronical sensitive device to
(PMT) convert light (laser emission) in current and with a I / V –
Converter into voltage
Pixel Scanning point on the film or plate. A maximum of 2048 per
line may be read by the Photomultiplier.
Preview Monitor displays the image and the name of the patient.
This monitor enables to roughly check whether the exposure
was successful.
PRID PREVIEW and ID Station, installed on one PC, used on older
CR systems, current CR QS systems use the ID viewer
software
PS Processing Station
Pyramidal Image Image file format of images on VIPS
Quantisation compression of image files
RAM Random Access Memory
volatile main memory of computers
RAM – DISK virtual harddisk simulated in the CPU main memory
Gemini RAM-Disk contains all the machine dependent
parameters, e.g. stepper motor steps, info counters
REM Tool Debugging tool for AOS logfiles
Reset Machine reset into a defined machine status. Various
checking routines are carried out during a reset.
RIS Radiology Information System
ROI Region Of Interest
ROM Read Only Memory
RS232 interface Serial interface which converts computer internal parallel
information into serial bits, and vice versa.


SAL Scan Average Level

Digitized photo multiplier signal of an average of several
hundred scanned lines
Range SAL0 – SAL4095 (12bit)
SCP SOFTCOPY Tool
SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface – interface to connect
peripherals to computers
(e.g. HDD, CD-ROM)
Server A computer that shares its resources, such as printers and
files, with other computers on the network.
Service interface RS232 standard interface for the connection of the Service
PC.
Shading Calibration position dependent sensitivity calibration; calibration of each
pixel in a line
Shell User Interface of the VME – AOS
Slowscan direction Transport Direction of Image Plate through the scan unit. The
stepper motor speed is calculated such that the distance
between two scan lines equals the distance between two
pixels in a line.
Speed Class (SC) Dose=1mR + SC100 => D=1 above fog + base
A film-screen-system with speed class 100 which is exposed
with a dose of 1mR results in a density 1 above fog+base.
Square Root Signal ∼ N.
Compression
Method to quantisize Signal in 12 similar block sizes
Standard Res Standard Resolution: pixel size = 150 micrometer
Subnet number A part of the internet address which designates a subnet
TCP Transmission Control Protocol. Internet networking software
that controls the transmission of packets of data over the
Internet. Among its tasks, TCP checks for lost packets, puts
the data from multiple packets into the correct order, and
requests that missing or damaged packets be resent.
Computers must run TCP to communicate with World Wide
Web servers.
TCP/IP Transport Control Protocol / Internet Protocol. Common
Protocol for Networks. Used in the Internet
Text Field Part of the film displaying patient, hospital and image
processing information


UI User Interface; part of a computer program that handles

interaction with the user.
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
URL Uniform Resource Locator; address code for multimedia
documents.
UTP - cable Unshielded Twisted Pair (Network transfer medium) cable.
Cable to connect to a computer network.
VIPS Viewing and Image Processing Station
Unix based Processing Station
W/L Window and Leveling of digital images.
X-Rite densitometer Automatic density measuring instrument manufactured by X-
Rite.


Document Number:
DD+DIS219.06E
CR 35-X
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 105
(as of SN > 6000)
2nd edition
Document Number:
CR 35-X
DD+DIS219.06E
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 105
(as of SN > 6000)
2nd edition
Document Number:
CR 35-X
DD+DIS219.06E
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 105
(as of SN > 6000)
2nd edition
Document Number:
CR 35-X
DD+DIS219.06E
Type 5158 / 100
CR 25.0
Type 5156 / 105
(as of SN > 6000)
2nd edition
HEALTHCARE ReadMeFirst
Imaging Services Service Manual for Download

This document describes how to
• add the “order list for documentation”.
• print.
• add comments.

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.1
1.2 06-2008 Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a
printed manual. See section 1.
06-2008 printed in Germany
Document Node ID: 16099429
ReadMeFirst
1 Integrating the Order List for Documentation
IMPORTANT:
The “order list for documentation” is not part of the service manual for download.
Purpose of the “order list for documentation”:
To verify the latest level and completeness of your Service Manual.
(1) In the MEDNET GSO library select the product of your interest.
(2) Select “Order list and Front page → PRODUCT - Chapter 00 - Order List for
Documentation”.
(3) Download the “order list for documentation” to your computer.
(4) When creating a paper manual:
Print the order list and put it behind the cover sheet.
2 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual
IMPORTANT:
Preferably print this manual double-sided:
This PDF manual contains empty pages at the end of several chapters, to have the
next chapter starting with an uneven page number when printed doubles-sided.
If printed one-sided, dispose these empty pages.
Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if

available.
Some pages – especially circuit diagrams for equipment – have been created on paper
size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in
reduced legibility. It is recommended to print these pages separately on a DIN A3 or
ANSI B (Ledger) printer.

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 2 of 5

ReadMeFirst
2.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters
To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:

(1) Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.
(2) Write down or remember the shown PDF page number. See Figure 1.
Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar
(3) Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

(4) Select "Print".
(5) Select the page range.
(6) Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(7) Select “OK”.
Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters


ReadMeFirst
NOTE:
“Shrink to printable area” may be named on other Adobe Reader versions
“reduce to printer margins” or “shrink oversized pages to paper size”.
2.2 Printing the complete Service Manual
To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:

(1) Select "Print".
(2) Select “All”.
(3) Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"
(see NOTE above).
(4) Select “OK”.
Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual
3 Adding Comments
• If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version ≥ 7, the comment toolbar will
show-up.
• This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text
manipulations.
Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar


ReadMeFirst
3.1 Exporting your Comments
NOTE:
Exporting your comments allows importing them again in a next version of the manual.
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
Figure 5: Drop down menu “Comment & Markup”
(2) Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.
(3) Select “Options - Export Selected Comments”.
(4) Save the file with any name.
3.2 Importing Comments
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
(2) Select “Options - Import Comments”.
(3) Browse for the comments file and press “select”.
NOTE:
The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the
comments have been imported has a different number of pages.



CR 35-X - Service Manual For Download

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CR 35-X - Service Manual For Download

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HEALTHCARE

Imaging Services Service Manual

01-2007 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 12434149

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 Chapter 0 / 2

► Purpose of this document

This document provides information on the structure and contents of the

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 Chapter 0 / 3

1 Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures

3 Repair and Service

3.1 Machine specific Safety and Repair Information

3.2 Machine specific Tools, Software Tools and Auxiliary Equipment

4 Reference and Circuit Diagrams

5 Spare Parts List

8 Manufacturing Standard Modifications

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 Chapter 0 / 4

This documentation uses:

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the

Not-safety relevant notes

NOTE: • Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action without

Actions Way of writing Sample

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 Chapter 0 / 5

1 About this Manual

2nd Edition CR 35-X Type 5158/100 / CR 25.0 Type 5156/105

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 Chapter 0 / 6

Download This Service Documentation is available on the MedNet GSO Library.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 Chapter 0 / 7

• If the digitizer is dedicated to one ID Station, additional features are available:

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR 35-X - Type 5158 / 100 Chapter 0 / 8

AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert NV

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Agfa Company Confidential

Generic Safety Directions

► Purpose of this Document

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6

7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11

8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11

9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12

10 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13

11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14

13 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17

14 RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18

15 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18

16 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19

17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 21

18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 23

19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 25

20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................... 28

21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS.................................28

23 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .................28

25 WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................................................................29

26 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI) ...................................30